Operating Instructions

Programming Manual (2/3)

Data Generation System

NPM-DGS

Model No. NM-EJS9A

Thank you for purchasing the “Panasonic product.”

 Read the operating instructions carefully for proper and safe usage.
 Before placing the machine in service, be sure to read “Safety Precautions.”
 Store the operating instructions carefully.

N7201A663E12 (V10.09)
201807
 NPM-DGS

Original Instructions
“Use of this system:
This system is designed for the purpose of efficiently creating and managing the production data to be used for
placing electric and electronic components.
This system shall be used for this purpose only.

It shall not be used for any other purpose.”

“Operation of the machine:

The machine shall be operated by professional, specially trained operators.

It shall be operated by professional, specially trained operators.

For information regarding available training courses, please contact Panasonic Smart Factory Solutions Co., Ltd.,
Sales company or Sales agent.”

Warning
Do not operate the machine without receiving special training
Risk of injury due to improper operation.

Prohibited
●About training, conduct in your company or contact us.

For machine training in Europe,

you may contact Panasonic Industry Europe:

Panasonic Industry Europe GmbH FA Division

Robert-Koch-Strasse 100, 85521 Ottobrunn Germany
Phone number: 0049-(0)89-453541192

EJS9AE-BP-03N-11 Page 3
 NPM-DGS

 NPM-DGS User License Agreement

 This is the Agreement between the users and us related to Programming Terminal Support System
NPM-DGS. The product includes the software of the computer, relative media, (CD-ROM or floppy
disk, etc.), and the printed materials as instruction manuals.
We regard user’s installation or use of this software as their approval of the restriction based on the
terms and conditions of this Agreement. If you have any disagreement with it, please return the
software to the sales agent where you got it, before use.
The software is reserved by the Copyright Laws, International Copy Right Treaties, etc.
The software is to be permitted, but its right is not transferred to others.

 License Grant and Limitations

The users are permitted to get the following rights in this Agreement.
1. The users can install the software to the only specified computer and use.
For installing it to several computers, it is necessary to get the same number of licenses as them.
2. The software cannot be used for several computers on the same network server at the same time.
For using it for several computers, it is necessary to get the same number of licenses as them.
3. Reverse engineering, disassembling, and decompiling of the software are forbidden.
4. This Agreement also includes the license of other company’s software which is constructed in this
software.
5. The software cannot be divided for using for other computer.
6. The software is to be updated with older version one simultaneously and also used together. The
License of the software is effective in older version software, too.
(The new version software itself does not constitute the granting of the license.)
7. The software cannot be lent nor rented.
8. The License of the software shall not be to apply for lending the instruction manuals.

 Product configuration
This product is configured by the following types of software.
1. Software independently developed by Process Automation Division of Panasonic System
Solutions Company of North America and Panasonic Smart Factory Solutions Co., Ltd.
2. SharpZipLib to which GNU General Public License applies.
 Regarding software that a user license is agreed based on the above 2.
For conditions of software use, please see the URL below.
http://www.icsharpcode.net/opensource/sharpziplib/
For conditions of GNU General Public License use, see the URL below.
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html
• This software is distributed in the hope that it will be useful by itself, but without warranty of any
kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to any warranties of “merchantability” or
“fitness for a particular purpose”.
• To acquire the source code if this software, access the URL below.
http://www.icsharpcode.net/OpenSource/SharpZipLib/Download.aspx

Page 4 EJS9AE-BP-03N-11
 NPM-DGS

 Registered trademarks and/or trademarks

Registered trademarks and/or trademarks mentioned herein are as follows.
 Microsoft, Windows, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 ,
Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2016 are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
 The official name of Windows 7 is Microsoft® Windows® 7 operating system.
 The official name of Windows 8 is Microsoft® Windows® 8 operating system.
 The official name of Windows 8.1 is Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 operating system.
 The official name of Windows 10 is Microsoft® Windows® 10 operating system.
 The official name of Windows Server 2008 is Microsoft® Windows® Server 2008 operating
system.
 The official name of Windows Server 2012 is Microsoft® Windows® Server 2012 operating
system.
 The official name of Windows Server 2016 is Microsoft® Windows® Server 2016 operating
system.
 The proper product name of Windows is Microsoft® Windows® operating system.
 Other product and company names mentioned herein may be either registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective companies.

EJS9AE-BP-03N-11 Page 5
 NPM-DGS

Organization of manuals

 Organization of instruction manuals

This system includes the following manuals.
Each of those manuals is designed for the purpose of a work. Refer to a manual suit for the
purpose of a work you will perform.

Manual type Explanation

Programming manual This manual explains how to install and how to create the production data
(1/3), (2/3), (3/3) of this system.

Recognition optional data This manual explains how to create component recognition data.

This manual explains how to create each data of post-placement

2D inspection editor inspection, pre-placement inspection and inspection after printing.

This manual explains how to create the inspection data after printing by
Gerber converter using the gerber data.

SP data editor This manual explains how to create the data for a printer.

Offline Camera Unit The manual explains how to create the part recognition data and how to
(Option) perform the part recognition test using an offline camera unit.

Page 6 EJS9AE-BP-03N-11
 NPM-DGS

Wording in context

 How to read operating instructions

Description depends on the page; however, it is constructed basically as follows.

2 3
1 2.4.1 PCB Information
1 Choose [Modify]  [Edit Top Side
Panel Information] on the menu bar,
or double-click the PCB.

1
4  The <Edit Top Side Panel Information>
window opens.

 On-screen items may vary according to

5
options etc.

Explanation
 Title
 Operation step number
Corresponds to the arrow number in a red
frame on the screen.
 Actual operation
 Describes the effect produced by the
operation.
 Describes the supplementary explanation.

 Symbols used in this manual

In this manual, the following expressions and symbols are used for description.

Symbol Explanation Symbol Explanation

Shows a reference item.

Shows an operation flow.

This shows the part to be clicked on.

Screen name Shows a screen name.

[Button] Shows a button or a menu.

This shows the part to be double-clicked on. “Message” Shows a message on the screen.

‘Item’ Shows an item text on the screen.

EJS9AE-BP-03N-11 Page 7
 NPM-DGS

System requirements

 Hardware
Standards
Item Specifications Class
Main body IBM PC/AT-compatible machine Indispensable
 A desktop PC is strongly recommended.
CPU Intel® CoreTM i5-2430 equivalent or greater
TM
 Intel® Core i7-7700 is recommended.
Motherboard Fully compatible with IBM
Serial I/O Fully compatible with IBM
Graphics board SXGA or higher (Display color: 65536 or more)
Desktop area: 1280 x 1024 dots or higher
Memory 4 GB or more
8GB or more recommended
 When using Windows Server OS, 16GB or more is
recommended.
Internal storage 120GB or more of free space (NTFS file system)
 When using Windows Server OS, 500GB or more is
recommended.
Optical drive DVD drive 4x or faster
(Used for installation)
Card slot SD memory card reader (External device available) Recommended
(Necessary when loading production data with the
equipment.)
Keyboard Japanese version: 106 keyboard Indispensable
English version: 101 keyboard
Mouse Supported by your OS as standard
Monitor SXGA or higher ready
Printer Supported by your OS Recommended
PostScript-ready product recommended
Network card 100BASE-T network card Indispensable
 A network card for 1000BASE-T is recommended
for transferring inspection images of the LWS
editor.
Uninterruptible power supply Supported by your OS as standard Recommended
(UPS)

Page 8 EJS9AE-BP-03N-11
 NPM-DGS

 Software
Standards
Item Specifications Class
OS Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro (64 bit version) is recommended Indispensable
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro (32 bit version)
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro (32 bit / 64 bit version)
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional (32 bit / 64 bit version) SP2 or
later
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 is recommended
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 or later
Support Language English, Chinese, Japanese
Framework Microsoft® .Net Framework 3.5 SP1
Microsoft® .Net Framework 4.6.2
DBMS Microsoft® SQL Server® 2016 is recommended
(Data Base Management Microsoft® SQL Server® 2014 SP1 (32 bit / 64 bit version)
System) Microsoft® SQL Server® 2012 SP3 (32 bit / 64 bit version)
Microsoft® SQL Server® 2008 R2 SP3
Java Runtime Environment Version 7 Updata 25 or later (32 bit / 64 bit version)
(JRE)
Virus check Virus Buster™ Recommended
Program version 10.0 or later

NOTICE
The hardware/OS should be prepared and installed on your own.
 Use the default settings of your OS for font, time, date, color, and others.
A sudden PC-power down may result in data losses. A proper shutdown is
necessary.

 The use environment conforms to that of your hardware.

Software names in the descriptive texts of this document will be expressed as follows;
Expression in the text Software name
Windows 10 Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro (32 bit / 64 bit version)
Windows 8.1 Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro (32 bit / 64 bit version)
Windows 8 Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro (32 bit / 64 bit version)
Windows 7 Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional (32 bit / 64 bit version)
SP1 or later
Windows Server 2012 Microsoft® Windows® Server® 2012 or later
Windows Server 2008 Microsoft® Windows® Server® 2008 R2 or later
.Net Framework 3.5 Microsoft® .Net Framework 3.5
SQL Server 2016 Microsoft® SQL Server® 2016 SP1 (64 bit version)
SQL Server 2014 Microsoft® SQL Server® 2014 SP1 (32 bit / 64 bit version)
SQL Server 2012 Microsoft® SQL Server® 2012 SP3 (32 bit / 64 bit version)

EJS9AE-BP-03N-11 Page 9
 NPM-DGS

Specifications

 Basic specifications
Number of machines Maximum: 1000 machines (Number of machines registered
in the system
Maximum: 30 machines per line
Parts library Maximum: 100000 data (number of data registered in the
system)
1
Placement points Maximum: 10000 points per PCB
Maximum: 100000 points per number of PCBs allowed for
optimization (Data creation job)
2
Number of patterns (blocks) Maximum: 1000 patterns per PCB
Number of marks being set Maximum: 1000 data (number of data registered in the
system)
Maximum: 1000 points per PCB (number of bad marks being
3
set)
Number of PCBs allowed for Maximum: 64 PCBs
optimization

1: It includes placement coordinates, recognition mark coordinates bad mark coordinates
and PCB warpage measurement points.
Please consult us for the mixed line with the CM / DT machines.
2: If PCB warpage measurement is included, the maximum shall be 100 patterns per
machines.
3: Master bad marks and group marks are excluded.

 License is required per machine.

 For use environment, it complies with hardware use environment.

Page 10 EJS9AE-BP-03N-11
 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS
 Safety precautions .................................................................................................. S-1

5. PCB EDIT ........................................................ 5-1

5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 Launching Product Manager ............................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2 PCB Data ............................................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.1.3 Adding Folder ...................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.4 Deleting Folder .................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.1.5 Renaming Folder ................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.1.6 Moving PCB / Folder ......................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.1.7 Editing PCB Data .............................................................................................................................. 5-12
5.1.8 Copying PCB Data ............................................................................................................................ 5-13
5.1.9 Deleting PCB Data ............................................................................................................................ 5-14
5.1.10 Renaming the PCB Data Name ...................................................................................................... 5-15
5.1.11 Import .............................................................................................................................................. 5-16
5.1.12 Export .............................................................................................................................................. 5-18
5.1.13 CSV Output ..................................................................................................................................... 5-20
5.1.14 Update by Recipe ............................................................................................................................ 5-22

5.2 Defining CAD Macro ........................................................................................... 5-25

5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor ............................................................................................................................. 5-28
5.2.2 Script Defined CAD Macro ................................................................................................................ 5-75
5.2.3 Editing CAD Macro ............................................................................................................................ 5-84
5.2.4 Copying CAD Macro.......................................................................................................................... 5-85
5.2.5 Deleting CAD Macro.......................................................................................................................... 5-86
5.2.6 Renaming the CAD Macro Name...................................................................................................... 5-87

5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files .................................................................................. 5-89

5.4 Importing CAD Macros ..................................................................................... 5-108
5.5 Exporting CAD Macros ..................................................................................... 5-109
5.6 Importing PCB in the Recipe ............................................................................ 5-110
5.6.1 Importing the NPM Recipe Data ..................................................................................................... 5-110
5.6.2 Importing CM/DT production data ................................................................................................... 5-116

5.7 Mark Configuration ........................................................................................... 5-120

5.7.1 Mark Editor ...................................................................................................................................... 5-120
5.7.2 Adding Template Marks .................................................................................................................. 5-123
5.7.3 Editing Marks................................................................................................................................... 5-131
5.7.4 Copying Marks ................................................................................................................................ 5-132
5.7.5 Deleting Marks ................................................................................................................................ 5-133
5.7.6 Renaming the Mark Name .............................................................................................................. 5-134

5.8 Editing PCBs..................................................................................................... 5-135

5.8.1 PCB Information .............................................................................................................................. 5-149
5.8.2 PCB Edit .......................................................................................................................................... 5-163
5.8.3 Adding Placement Points ................................................................................................................ 5-242
5.8.4 Editing Placement Points ................................................................................................................ 5-251
5.8.5 Deleting Placement Points .............................................................................................................. 5-280
5.8.6 Pattern Type .................................................................................................................................... 5-281
5.8.7 Pattern Offsets ................................................................................................................................ 5-285
5.8.8 Pattern Group .................................................................................................................................. 5-293
5.8.9 Pattern Outlines...............................................................................................................................5-307
EJS9AE-CT-05P-08 Page 11
 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual

5.8.10 Obstacle........................................................................................................................................ 5-309

5.8.11 Order of Placement Priority .......................................................................................................... 5-312
5.8.12 Component Interference Check ................................................................................................... 5-333
5.8.13 CAD Rotation ................................................................................................................................ 5-337
5.8.14 Starting up the Gerber Converter ................................................................................................. 5-341
5.8.15 Highlight the Expanded Placements ............................................................................................ 5-341
5.8.16 Starting up the Support Pin .......................................................................................................... 5-341
5.8.17 Importing PCB Image ................................................................................................................... 5-342
5.8.18 Saving PCB Data.......................................................................................................................... 5-349
5.8.19 Merging the Bottom Side Data ..................................................................................................... 5-355
5.8.20 Reserved placement point ............................................................................................................ 5-356
5.8.21 Replace Parts by BOM ................................................................................................................. 5-359
5.8.22 Scattering LED Components ........................................................................................................ 5-361

5.9 Searching for PCBs .......................................................................................... 5-364

5.9.1 Search ............................................................................................................................................ 5-364
5.9.2 Label Search .................................................................................................................................. 5-366
5.9.3 Confirming Bonding Position and Angle using Layer ..................................................................... 5-371
5.9.4 List for Determination of the First Pin ............................................................................................. 5-373

6. COMPONENT DATA EDIT ............................. 6-1

6.1 Overview............................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.1 Launching Part Manager .................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Part Manager Screen Configuration ................................................................................................... 6-3

6.2 Adding New Part Library..................................................................................... 6-16

6.3 Searching for Components ................................................................................. 6-19
6.3.1 Component Search Method.............................................................................................................. 6-19
6.3.2 Custom Search ................................................................................................................................. 6-23
6.3.3 Label Search .................................................................................................................................... 6-27

6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data ................................................................ 6-32

6.4.1 Importing Components from NPM Production data ......................................................................... 6-32
6.4.2 Importing Parts from CM/DT Recipe ................................................................................................ 6-37
6.4.3 Importing Components from Export Parts Data ............................................................................... 6-42
6.4.4 Conversion Data List ........................................................................................................................ 6-47
6.4.5 Copying / Importing Parts from a File ............................................................................................... 6-48
6.4.6 Exporting Selected Parts .................................................................................................................. 6-56
6.4.7 Exporting Parts in the Displayed Page ............................................................................................. 6-58
6.4.8 Exporting All Selected Parts ............................................................................................................. 6-60
6.4.9 Updating Parts Data from the Line Part Library to the Master Part Library ..................................... 6-62

6.5 Adding New Components ................................................................................... 6-65

6.5.1 Creating New Components .............................................................................................................. 6-68
6.5.2 Component Type Images ................................................................................................................. 6-69
6.5.3 Editing Components ......................................................................................................................... 6-70
6.5.4 Inspection Data Link ....................................................................................................................... 6-131
6.5.5 Dispensing Option Data.................................................................................................................. 6-133
6.5.6 CM Package Angle Edit.................................................................................................................. 6-148
6.5.7 CM Extension Data Edit ................................................................................................................. 6-149
6.5.8 Setting First Pin .............................................................................................................................. 6-168
6.5.9 Support Pin ..................................................................................................................................... 6-170

6.6 Copying Components ....................................................................................... 6-172

6.6.1 Copying and Creating New Component Data ................................................................................ 6-172
6.6.2 Copying and Pasting to Existing Component Data ........................................................................ 6-173

Page 12 EJS9AE-CT-05P-08
 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual

6.6.3 Copy Inspection Data ...................................................................................................................... 6-174

6.7 Editing Existing Components ............................................................................ 6-175

6.8 Setting Substitute Components ........................................................................ 6-203
6.8.1 Adding a New Setting ...................................................................................................................... 6-203
6.8.2 Deleting a Setting ............................................................................................................................ 6-207
6.8.3 Importing / Exporting the settings.................................................................................................... 6-210

6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error Image .............................. 6-214
6.10 CSV Output..................................................................................................... 6-226
6.11 Lighting Recognition Check List ..................................................................... 6-237
6.12 Head Camera Recognition Option.................................................................. 6-238
6.12.1 Adding and Editing Head Camera Recognition Option ................................................................. 6-238
6.12.2 Deleting Head Camera Recognition Option .................................................................................. 6-239
6.12.3 Top Side Recognition .................................................................................................................... 6-240
6.12.4 Post-Placement Inspection ........................................................................................................... 6-242

EJS9AE-CT-05P-08 Page 13
 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual

= MEMO =

Page 14 EJS9AE-CT-05P-08
 NPM-DGS
Safety precautions

Safety precautions Be sure to observe

The precautions that shall be observed in order to prevent an injury to the user or the
other persons, and damage to property, are described as follows.

 The degrees of danger or injury, resulting from incorrect usage owing to failure to read an
indication, are classified and described as follows.

WARNING This indication refers to a situation which is considered that there is a

possibility of death or serious injury.

CAUTION This indication refers to a situation which is considered that there is a

possibility of only injury or physical damage.

 The matters that shall be observed are classified by the symbols shown below, and
described.
(The following are the examples of the symbols.)

This kind of symbol indicates an action that must not be carried out.

This kind of symbol indicates an action that must be carried out.

NOTICE
This part describes the precautions in using NPM-DGS.
As for the personal computer, monitor, etc., observe the precautions described in
their respective manuals.
In addition, for machine operation, see ‘Safety precautions’ described in the machine
instruction manual.

EJS9AE-SF-01N-02 Page S-1

 NPM-DGS
Safety precautions

WARNING

Use the specialized

outlet and breaker
exclusively.

Sharing between machines may

cause fire because of heat
generated.

●Check the rated power

consumption in the
Specification, and consult an
electrical contractor.
M89ESC

Page S-2 EJS9AE-SF-01N-02

 NPM-DGS
Safety precautions

WARNING

Do not operate the machine

without receiving special training

Prohibited

Risk of injury due to improper operation.

●About training, conduct in your company or contact us.

EJS9AE-SF-01N-02 Page S-3

 NPM-DGS
Safety precautions

CAUTION
Do not give a shock to
the electrical
equipment.

There is a risk of an electric

shock, electrical leakage, or
malfunction.

M27SC

Page S-4 EJS9AE-SF-01N-02

 NPM-DGS
Safety precautions

Guidelines on using the machine

1. The machine, LNB, and NPM-DGS are the equipment to be connected

to LAN.
Use them on your company’s LAN (intranet).
From the perspective of product security, use them to be connected to
the robust network.
2. Do not reveal the equipment-operating passwords to others.
We highly recommend that your password is at least 5 characters long.
3. When sending the PC for LNB, NPM-DGS, etc. to a repair shop or
disposing of it, pull out the hard disk or format the hard disk
beforehand.
4. If you used an SD card in the case of emergency operation due to
network troubles, delete its contents when normal operation is
resumed.
5. From the aspect of enhancement of product security, we highly
recommend that you always keep your OS environment
(including .NET Framework) updated to the latest version.

 Failure to comply could result in the leakage of user ID, password, and your production data to a
malicious outsider.

 The information recorded in an SD card may not be completely deleted through the basic
function of the operating system. Therefore, you are recommended to use commercial software
for complete deletion.

 The machine refers to the NPM machine main body.

 LNB is a relay system connecting the machine and NPM-DGS.
 NPM-DGS refers to the production-data generation system.

 For information about how to remove a hard disk from your computer or initialize a hard
disk, refer to its instruction manual or contact the manufacturer.

EJS9AE-SF-01N-02 Page S-5

 NPM-DGS
Safety precautions

= MEMO =

Page S-6 EJS9AE-SF-01N-02

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual

5. PCB EDIT

This chapter describes functions necessary for PCB creation such as CAD macro
definition and mark edit.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-1

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1 Overview
The PCB data define components and marks on a PCB. Generally, PCB data are created by
importing the PCB CAD data. The PCB list displays the following three data in a list and enables
you to start, copy, and delete the edit application.
1. PCB data : Data that define production PCBs
2. CAD macro : Macro that imports CAD data and converts it to PCB data
3. Mark data : Marks used for correcting a production PCB or in bad mark recognition

Master bad mark Pattern bad mark PCB mark

PCB
Pattern mark

PCB mark Pattern

Term Explanation
PCB Refers to the entire PCB.
Pattern When there are two or more finished-good boards on one
production board, each of the boards is called pattern. After the
mounting positions and the marks on one pattern are defined,
evolution is performed using pattern offsets.
Pattern offset Shows the position and rotation direction of each pattern.
PCB mark Refers to the mark for correcting the entire PCB.
Pattern mark Refers to the mark for correcting each pattern.
Master bad mark Shows whether bad patterns (where no components will be
placed) exist on a PCB. Normally, bad marks are checked for
each pattern; however, if there are no bad patterns, the master
bad mark is used to save time so that they will not be checked
for each pattern.
Pattern bad mark Shows that a bad pattern (where no components will be placed)
exists on a multi-block PCB.
Placement point Shows a component placement point.

The mathematical coordinate system (X: positive rightward, Y: positive upward, angle: positive
counterclockwise) is used.
Your desired CAD origin can be set.
The PCB outline (edge coordinates) is based on the CAD origin. All placement points and mark
coordinates need to exist on the set PCB.

Page 5-2 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.1 Launching Product Manager

To start the PCB list, click [Product Manager] on the application launcher at the lower left of the
screen.

Project050101S-01E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-3

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.2 PCB Data

This section describes the PCB data details.

1
2
2
2

3
2

Project050102S-01E04

No. Name Explanation

 Menu bar Shows each menu.
 Toolbar Shows icons for each operation.
 PCB data display area Displays the PCB data.

 PCB data setting item

Item Explanation
‘Proved’ This is set by users on data with the production record and used
as a flag.
‘Name’ Displays the PCB name.
‘Revision’ Specifies the revision number of a PCB to be created as a result
of import.
‘Placement Count’ Number of placement points
‘CAD File Name’ Displays the name of the loaded CAD file.
‘Creation Date’ Displays the date when PCBs are created.
‘Modification Date’ Displays the date when PCBs are modified.

Page 5-4 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

 Menu
1. Route
Menu bar Toolbar Right-click menu Explanation
[File]
[New] [New] Creates a new PCB.

[Open] [Open] Opens the selected PCB.

  [Export] Exports a PCB.

[Logout]   Logs out.
[Edit]

[Delete] [Delete] Deletes the selected PCB.

[Rename]  [Rename] Renames the selected PCB.

[Copy] [Copy] Copies the selected PCB.

[Paste] [Paste] Pastes the copied PCB.

Sets a ‘Proved’ flag of the PCB data setting

[Proved]  [Proved]
item.
[Import]

[CAD/BOM]  Imports a CAD/BOM file.

[Recipe]   Imports the PCB data from the file in the Recipe.
Imports the PCB data output by the export
[PCB]  
function in the PCB list.
[View]
[Refresh]  Refreshes the displayed PCB list.
[Label]
[New Label]  [New Label] Creates a new label.

[Assign Label] [Assign Label] Assigns a designated label to the selected PCB.
Removes the assigned PCB from the selected
[Remove label]  
label.

[Manage label]   Adds a new label or deletes the existing label.

 Verified flag
By using a verified flag, you can easily distinguish which data has been verified from which has
been not. This is just a flag so there is no relationship with actual output. However, using the flag
is recommended from the viewpoint of data management.

 Label
Labeling data makes it easier to classify and search data. Two or more labels can be put on one
data. Data management more flexible than the conventional folder classification can be realized.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-5

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

2. CAD macro
Menu bar Toolbar Right-click menu Explanation
[File]
[New] [New] Creates a new CAD macro.

[Open] [Open] Opens the selected CAD macro.

[Export]   Exports the CAD macro.

[Logout]   Logs out.
[Edit]

[Delete] [Delete] Deletes the selected CAD marco.

[Rename]  [Rename] Renames the selected CAD macro.

[Copy] [Copy] Copies the selected CAD macro.

[Paste] [Paste] Pastes the copied CAD macro.

[Import]
[CAD macro]   Imports a CAD macro.
[View]
[Refresh]  Updates the displayed CAD macro list.

3. Mark
Menu bar Toolbar Right-click menu Explanation
[File]
[New] [New] Creates a new mark.

[Open] [Open] Opens a selected mark.

[Logout]   Logs out.

[Edit]

[Delete] [Delete] Deletes the selected mark.

[Rename]  [Rename] Rename the selected mark.

[Copy] [Copy] Copies the selected mark.

[Paste] [Paste] Pastes the copied mark.

[View]
[Refresh]  Updates the displayed CAD macro list.

Page 5-6 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.3 Adding Folder

1 1 Choose [Route].

2 Choose [New Folder] from the

right-click menu.
2
 The <New Folder> screen is displayed.

Project050102S-02E00

3 3 Type a new folder name.

 Up to 64 letters are allowed to input

(The following characters cannot be used)
% , ” ’ space \ : ; / . < > ? * | double-byte
character
Project050102S-03E00
4

4 Click [OK].

 A folder is created under the right-clicked

location.

 You cannot use the same folder name under

the same level.

 A folder which can be added is until three

levels from route.

 Same revision PCB cannot be existed even if

the folder name differs.

Project050102S-04E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-7

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.4 Deleting Folder

1 Choose a desired folder to delete.

1

2 Choose [Delete] from the right-lick

menu.
2

Project050102S-05E00

3 The folder deletion confirmation

message appears. Click [Yes] to
delete.

 The folder is deleted.

Project050102S-06E00  If PCBs or folders exist in the deleted folder,

3 they are all deleted.

 If PCB which is still editing exists in the folder,

you cannot delete the folder. To delete it, close
the PCB editor.

Page 5-8 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.5 Renaming Folder

1 Choose a desired folder to rename.

1
 The route folder name cannot be changed.

2 Choose [Rename] from the right-click

2 menu or double-click the folder.

Project050102S-07E00

3 Type a new folder name

 Up to 64 letters are allowed to input

(The following characters cannot be used)
% , ” ’ space \ : ; / . < > ? * | double-byte
3 character

 You cannot use the same folder name under

the same level.

 The folder is circled in a blue frame.

Project050102S-08E00

4 Press the [Enter] key or click another

location.

 The folder name is changed.

Project050102S-09E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-9

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.6 Moving PCB / Folder

You can move PCB and folder by a drag-and-drop operation.
① Moving PCB
1 Choose a desired PCB to move.

Project050102S-10E00

2 Drag and drop the PCB to the

destination folder.

 The PCB is moved to the destination folder.

 The cursor shows in any place where you

2 cannot move the PCB.

Project050102S-11E00

Page 5-10 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

② Moving folder
1 Choose a desired folder to move.

Project050102S-12E00

2 Drag and drop the folder to the

destination folder.

 The folder is moved under the designation

folder level.

2  The cursor shows in any place where you

cannot move the folder.

 Folders and PCBs in the source folder are also

moved.

Project050102S-13E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-11

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.7 Editing PCB Data

The registered PCBs can be edited.

1 Choose the desired PCB from the

PCB list.

2
2 Choose (Open) on the toolbar,
1
choose [File]  [Open] on the menu
bar, or choose [Open] on the
right-click menu.

 The <Product Editor> window opens.

Project050103S-01E05

3 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited.
5
4
4 Choose (Save) on the toolbar or
[File]  [Save] on the menu bar.

5 Choose [File]  [Exit], or click [].

 The <Product Editor> window closes.

Project050103S-03E01

Page 5-12 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.8 Copying PCB Data

The registered PCBs can be copied.

1 Choose the desired PCB from the

PCB list.

2  To make multiple selections

Range selection:
Select the top PCB, and while holding down
1 the [Shift] key, select the last PCB
Individual selection:
Make a selection while holding down the [Ctrl]
key

2 Choose (Copy) on the toolbar,

choose [Edit]  [Copy] on the menu
bar, or choose [Copy] on the right-click
Project050104S-01E05 menu.

3 Choose (Paste) on the toolbar,

choose [Edit]  [Paste] on the menu
3 bar, or choose [Paste] on the
right-click menu.

 The <PCB paste> window opens.

Project050104S-03E05
4 Click ‘New PCB name’ and ‘New
revision’ on the <PCB paste> window
to enter them.

 The following characters cannot be used.

% , ” ’ space \ : ; / . < > ? * | double-byte
character
4
 Up to the set value of ‘Max. Lot Name Length’
in General Settings can be entered for the
PCB name.
Project050104S-05E02
( ‘3.2.3 DGS Setting ■Recipe Settings’)
5
5 Click [OK].

 The PCB is copied.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-13

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.9 Deleting PCB Data

The registered PCBs can be deleted.

1 Choose the desired PCB from the

PCB list.

1
2 Choose (Delete) on the toolbar,
choose [Edit]  [Delete] on the menu
bar, or choose [Delete] on the
right-click menu.

 The confirmation dialog opens.

Project050105S-01E04

3 Click [Yes].

Project050105S-03E02
3

Page 5-14 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.10 Renaming the PCB Data Name

The registered PCBs can be renamed.

1 Choose the PCB to change the name

from the PCB list.

2 Choose [Edit]  [Rename] on the

1 menu bar or [Rename] on the
right-click menu.
2
 The <Rename Product> window opens.

Project050106S-01E06

3 Enter a new name.

 The following characters cannot be used.

% , ” ’ space \ : ; / . < > ? * | double-byte
character

3  Up to the set value of ‘Max. Lot Name Length’

in General Settings can be entered for the
PCB name.
( ‘3.2.3 DGS Setting ■Recipe Settings’)
Project050106S-02E01
4

4 Click [OK].

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-15

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.11 Import
 About import
There are three types for import; a CAD/BOM file, a Recipe and a PCB file.

Import Detail
CAD/BOM file ‘5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files’
Recipe ‘5.6 Importing PCB in the Recipe’
PCB file Describes below.

 Performing PCB import

If the part data is included in the PCB file, it is also imported.

1 Choose [Import]  [PCB] on the

menu bar.

 The <Import Products> window opens.

1

Project050108S-01E01

2 Choose either ‘Single File’ or ‘Files in

folder’.

 Single file:
One PCB data is target for import.
3
 Files in folder:
2 All PCB data in the folder is target for import.

3 Click [...].
Project050108S-02E01

 The following describes in the case that the

single file is selected.

Page 5-16 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

4 Choose the file and click [Open].

Project050108S-03E00
4

5 Choose where to import to.

6 When the part data is overwritten,

mark the checkbox of ‘Overwrite Parts
Data’.

 If you do not overwrite the nozzle number,

5 unmark the checkbox of “Overwrite nozzle
number.”
6
Project050108S-04E01
7
7 Click [Import].

8 Click [OK].

Project050108S-05E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-17

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.12 Export
The registered PCBs can be exported.

1 Choose the desired PCB from the

PCB list.

2 Choose [Export]  [PCB File] on the

1 right-click menu.

 The <Export Products> window opens.

Project050107S-01E01

3 Click [...].

 The <Browse For Folder> window opens.

Project050107S-02E00

4 Choose the folder to export and click

[OK].

 The selected folder is displayed.

Project050107S-03E00
4

Page 5-18 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5 If you also want to export the part

data, mark the checkbox of ‘Include
Part Data’.

6 Click [Export].
5
 The export result is displayed.
Project050107S-04E00

7 Click [OK].

 The PCB file is saved.

Project050107S-05E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-19

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.13 CSV Output

The registered PCB data can be output in CSV format. Items to be output are the same as the
ones in [CSV Output] on the <Advanced Edit> screen of Product Editor. For details of CSV Output
for Product Editor, refer to ‘5.8.4 Editing Placement Points ■CSV CSV output dialog’.

1 Choose the PCB for CSV Output from

the PCB list.

2 Choose [Export]  [CSV Output] from

1 the right-click menu.

 The <Export Products in CSV Format> screen

appears.

Project050113S-01E00

3 Click [...].

 The <Browse For Folder> window opens.

3
Project050113S-02E00

4 Choose the folder to export and click

[OK].

4  The selected folder is displayed.

Project050113S-03E00

Page 5-20 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5 Click [Export].

 If the same file is present in the specified

destination, an overwrite confirmation dialog
appears.
Project050113S-04E00
5

Project050113S-05E00

• [Yes]:
Only the CSV file shown on the message will
be overwritten.
• [Yes to ALL]:
Any CSV files within the specified folder will
be all overwritten.
• [No]:
The output of the CSV file shown on the
message will be skipped.
• [Cancel]:
The export will be cancelled, and the dialog
will be closed.

6 Click [OK].

 The CSV file will be output under the following

file name.
PCB name_Revision_PCB Side.csv

Project050113S-06E00
6

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-21

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

5.1.14 Update by Recipe

If the recipe is created by the mixed line of NPM and CM/DT, the NPM recipe data (.crb) and
CM/DT recipe data (.mai) are separately output. If one data is updated using the original import
function, the data in another machine will also be updated. This function enables you to update
the recipe without reflecting part/coordinate data in another machine. There are following
restrictions on the recipe and PCB to be selected.
 Do not use the same designator and PCB name.
 Set the designator which is not duplicated with other parts.
 CM/DT(*.mai) recipe having a large PCB cannot be used.

1 Choose a desired PCB to update from

the PCB list.
1
2 Choose Update from Recipe from the
right-click menu.

 The <Update from Recipe> window opens.

2
Project050114-01E00

3 Click .

 The <Open> window opens.

Project050114-02E00

4 Specify the recipe.

 You can select the following files for recipe.

・ NPM recipe (.crb)
・ CM / DT recipe (.mai)
4 ・ All files

5 Click [Open].
5

Project050114-03E00

Page 5-22 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

 Update by NPM recipe

In NPM recipe, you can reflect part/coordinate data only changed on the NPM machine.

6 To update the part data as well, mark

the checkbox.

 If the data is the NPM recipe, CM/DT machine

unique information of the part data will not be
updated.

6 7 Click [Update].
7
 The part/coordinate data is not reflected also if
the part in the recipe is set as out of sorting
target.
Project050114-04E00

 The updating PCB window opens.

Project050114-05E00

8 Click [OK].

Project050114-06E00
8

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.1 Overview

 Update by CM/DT recipe

In CM/DT recipe, you can reflect part/coordinate data only changed on CM/DT machine.

6 Confirm if the source data is checked

on PT200, and if yes, click [OK].

 If the source file is not normal, the data cannot

be imported properly. Make sure to perform
data check on PT200.

Project050114-07E0
6

7 Choose the PCB side which has the

data reflected to the PCB in the Side
field.

 If the data is the CM/DT recipe, NPM machine

unique information of the part data will be not
updated.
7
8 Click [Update].
8  The part/coordinate data is not reflected also if
the part in the recipe is set as out of sorting
Project050114-08E00 target.

 The updating PCB window opens.

Project050114-05E00

9 Click [OK].

Project050114-06E00
9

Page 5-24 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 CAD macro data details

1
2
2
2

3
2

Project050200S-01E05

No. Name Explanation

 Menu bar Shows each menu.
 Toolbar Shows icons for each operation.
CAD macro data display Displays the CAD macro data.

area

 CAD macro setting item

Item Explanation
‘Name’ Displays the CAD macro name.
‘Description’ Displays the description of the entered macro.
‘Linked Macro’ Displays the user defined macro used after script conversion.
‘Creation Date’ Displays the date when CAD macros are created.
‘Modification Date’ Displays the date when CAD macros are modified.

For ‘Description’ input: ‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor’

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Menu
Menu bar Toolbar Right-click menu Explanation
[File]

[New] [New] Creates a new CAD macro.

[Open] [Open] Opens the selected CAD macro.

[Import]   Imports a CAD macro.

[Export]   Exports the selected CAD macro.
[Edit]

[Delete] [Delete] Deletes the selected CAD macro.

[Rename]  [Rename] Renames the selected CAD macro.

[Copy] [Copy] Copies the selected CAD macro.

[Paste] [Paste] Pastes the copied CAD macro.

[Import]

  Imports a CAD/BOM file.

[View]
[Refresh]  Refreshes the displayed CAD macro.

Page 5-26 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Defining the CAD macro

1 Choose [CAD Macro] in the navigation

area on the upper left of the screen.

Project050200S-10E02

2 Choose [File]  [Create New] on the

menu bar, choose (creating new
data) on the toolbar, or choose [New]
Project050200S-11E01
on the right-click menu.
2
 The <New CAD Macro> window opens.

3 Type a new CAD macro name.

 Only [User-Defined CAD Format] is

supported.

3
4 Choose the CAD format.

 User defined CAD format

4 The CAD/BOM file format is defined by the CAD
macro editor.
( 5.2.1 CAD Macro editor )
5
Project050200S-13E01
 Script defined CAD macro
The script CAD macro is defined.
( 5.2.2 Script Defined CAD Macro)

5 Click [OK].

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-27

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor

To create and edit the macro, follow the steps below.

---------- Sets the CAD/BOM files to be imported.

---------- Defines the CAD/BOM file formats.

---------- Defines the detailed settings in CAD import.

---------- Saves the defined macro file.

---------- Imports the CAD/BOM files using the defined macro file.

1. Setting the macro input

CAD/BOM files to be imported to the CAD macro are set in the ‘Setup Macro input’ step.

 ‘Description’
 ‘Select Part Library’
 [ASCII Filter]
1  ‘CAD File’
 ‘BOM’
 ‘BOM File’
2 3

Project050201S-06E00

Page 5-28 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

① Description

Project050201S-07E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Description’ Enter macro explanation conveniently.

② Select Part Library

Project050201S-08E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Select Part Library’ Select the part library for the desired CAD system.

③ ASCII Filter

Project050201S-10E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
[ASCII Filter] When a CAD file is captured, specify the ASCII characters that
will not be captured. Clicking this button opens the <ASCII
Character Filter> window.
 Codes ASCII 31 or lower and Codes 127 or higher are not
captured in the default setting. It is also possible to capture
these default codes.
Input details of the ASCII character filter:
‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor’  ‘1. Setting the macro input’
 ‘ Editing the ASCII character filter’

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-29

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

④ CAD File

Project050201S-11E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘CAD File’
‘Delimited’ The CAD data are separated by field with reference to the
specified delimiter. Input the field-separating delimiter in
‘Delimiter.’ When a field is enclosed by quotation marks, input
the delimiter in ‘Enclosure Character.’ Also, on the [CAD] tab in
the ‘Define CAD Format’ step, you can input more than one
field position.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
R1,2000,2105,90,AZ234509
R12,2210,0450,180,B3456789
C32,1508,1298,0,Q34098
By default, ‘Delimited’ is selected.
‘Positional’ The CAD data are separated by field with reference to the
position of the specified character. In the ‘Define CAD Format’
step, you can input the start and end positions of characters for
more than one field.
1234 5678 9012 345 67890123456789
R12 0002 105 90 AZ234509
R122 2100 4500 180 B3456789
C32 1508 1298 0 Q34098
In the above case, identifiers are 1–4, X 5–8, Y 9–2, angles
3–5, and component names 6–9.
‘Delimiter’ Display the characters separating fields when ‘Delimiter’ is
specified. If it is left blank, each field will be separated by more
than one space. There are four types as follows.
• [Tab]
• [Comma]
• [Space]
• [Others]
With [Others] selected, the text box to enter alphabets and
numbers is displayed next to the ‘Delimiter’ dropdown menu.
‘Enclosure Character’ When ‘Delimited’ is specified, this item can be set. When a
character string is put in quotation marks, enter the marks to
be used.
‘Select Sample File’ Checking an actual CAD file, define macro. This CAD file is
referred to as a sample file. Input its name in ‘Select Sample
File,’ or click to open the reference window and choose
the CAD file.

Page 5-30 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

⑤ BOM

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘BOM’ To set a BOM file, check off this checkbox. By default, a file is
not set.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-31

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

⑥ BOM File

Project050201S-14E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘BOM File’
A BOM file is used when a CAD file does not contain the Parts Name.
A BOM file contains a component list and reference numbers corresponding to each component.
‘Delimited’ The BOM data are separated by field with reference to the
specified delimiter. Input the field-separating delimiter in
‘Delimiter.’ When a field is enclosed by quotation marks, input
the delimiter in ‘Enclosure Character.’ Also, on the [BOM] tab
in the ‘Define CAD Format’ step, you can input more than one
field position.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
R1,2000,2105,90,AZ234509
R12,2210,0450,180,B3456789
C32,1508,1298,0,Q34098
By default, ‘Delimited’ is selected.
‘Positional’ The BOM data are separated by field with reference to the
position of the specified character. Also, on the [BOM] tab in
the ‘Define CAD Format’ step, you can input the start and end
positions of characters for more than one field.
1234 5678 9012 345 67890123456789
R12 0002 105 90 AZ234509
R122 2100 4500 180 B3456789
C32 1508 1298 0 Q34098
In the above case, identifiers are 1–4, X 5–8, Y 9–2, angles
3–5, and component names 6–9.
‘Delimiter’ Display the characters separating fields when ‘Delimiter’ is
specified. If it is left blank, each field will be separated by more
than one space. There are four types as follows.
• [Tab]
• [Comma]
• [Space]
• [Others]
With [Others] selected, the text box to enter alphabets and
numbers is displayed next to the ‘Delimiter’ dropdown menu.
‘Enclosure Character’ When ‘Delimited’ is specified, this item can be set. When a
character string is put in quotation marks, enter the marks to
be used.
‘Select Sample File’ Checking an actual BOM file, define macro. This BOM file is
referred to as a sample file. Input its name in ‘Select Sample
File,’ or click to open the reference window and choose
the BOM file.

Page 5-32 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Editing the ASCII character filter

If there are any ASCII characters to ignore during import, use the ASCII character filter. Clicking
[ASCII Filter] opens the edit window.

Project050201S-16E00

 ASCII character filter

Item Explanation
‘From’ Specifies the start position of ASCII characters to be deleted.
‘To’ Specifies the end position of ASCII characters to be deleted.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Add] Adds the range of ASCII characters specified in ‘From’ and ‘To’
fields on the range list.
[Remove] Deletes the selected row from the range list.
[OK] Saves the setting and closes the <ASCII Character Filter>
window.
[Cancel] Cancels the setting and closes the <ASCII Character Filter>
window.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-33

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Setting the input file

1 Input macro details in ‘Description.’

 Enter an explanation for the macro being

defined. (Optional)

1
2 3 2 Choose the part library to which
imported components are linked.

3 To designate ASCII characters to be

ignored during importing, click [ASCII
Filter].

Project050201S-17E00
 The <ASCII Character Filter> window opens.

4 Add the range of ASCII characters to

be ignored, and click [OK].

Project050201S-18E00
4

5 Set the CAD file.

 Specify ‘Delimited’ to use the delimiter or

‘Positional’ to use the set character position.

 For ‘Delimited,’ input the delimiter and

quotation marks.

 Checking an actual CAD file, define macro.

This CAD file is referred to as a sample file.
5 Select the sample file to be used.

Project050201S-19E00

Page 5-34 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

6 Set the BOM file. (When there is a

BOM file)

 Check off the checkbox.

 Specify ‘Delimited’ to use the delimiter or

‘Positional’ to use the set character position.

 For ‘Delimited,’ input the delimiter and

quotation marks.

6  Choose the BOM sample file to be used for

macro definition.

2. Defining the CAD format

CAD/BOM file formats for the CAD/BOM import setting are defined in the ‘Define CAD Format’
step.
There are two tabs in the ‘Define CAD Format’ step as follows.

[CAD]: Defines the identification method of the record type present in the CAD file and its format.
[BOM]: Defines the identification method of the record type present in the BOM file and its format.
This becomes active only when the BOM file is specified in the <Setup Macro input> step.

The information to be displayed on the CAD and BOM tabs is determined by an input method
(‘Positional’/‘Delimited’) in the <Setup Macro input> step. There are four input methods as follows.
• CAD tab when the delimiter-specified CAD file is used
• CAD tab when the position-specified CAD file is used
• BOM tab when the delimiter-specified BOM file is used
• BOM tab when the position-specified BOM file is used

 CAD tab

1 1

2 2
7 8 6 7 8 6

3 4 5 3 4 5

Project050201S-21E01 Project050201S-22E01

CAD tab when the delimiter-specified CAD file is used CAD tab when the position-specified CAD file is used

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-35

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Relationship of record types and field definition

Record Type: Defines ‘ID Method’ and relevant fields to define a record. If necessary, convert the fields. All
the record types contained in the CAD file are displayed in a list.
Record types with ‘’ indicate that they have been identified by the macro.

Indispensable
 Record Type Explanation Field
setting
[Offset] Displays the position of the multi-block pattern (from X-coordinate ○
the second pattern onward) on a PCB and rotation Y-coordinate ○
direction. Placement surface –
Reference number –
Rotation –
Revision code –
PCB name –
Version number –
Explanation –
Pattern identification –
[Master bad mark] When there is a bad pattern on a multi-block PCB, a X-coordinate ○
mark that indicates the bad pattern (components will Y-coordinate ○
not be placed) is called a bad mark. Placement surface –
Although such marks are checked on each pattern, Mark name –
using this item shortens the time by specifying one
(representative) bad mark on a PCB. The XY Explanation –
coordinates take the PCB origin as reference.
[Pattern bad mark(all When there is a bad pattern on a multi-block PCB, aReference number ○
pattern)] mark that indicates the bad pattern (components will
X-coordinate ○
not be placed) is called a bad mark. Y-coordinate ○
The XY coordinates take the pattern origin as
Placement surface –
reference and explorer corresponding to offset value.
Mark name –
Explanation –
Pattern identification –
[Pattern bad When there is a bad pattern on a multi-block PCB, a Reference number ○
mark(Random specify)] mark that indicates the bad pattern (components will X-coordinate ○
not be placed) is called a bad mark. Y-coordinate ○
Although such marks are checked on each pattern,
Placement surface –
using this item shortens the time by specifying a bad
mark in the desired position on a PCB. The XY Mark name –
coordinates take the PCB origin as reference. Explanation –
Pattern identification –
[Pattern mark] Displays correction marks (alignment marks) on a PCB X-coordinate ○
by pattern. Generally, each pattern has zero or two Y-coordinate ○
pattern marks. The XY coordinates take the PCB origin Placement surface –
as reference. Mark name –
Explanation –
Pattern identification –
[PCB mark] Displays the mark position for correcting a PCB. X-coordinate ○
Generally, each CAD file has zero or two PCB marks. Y-coordinate ○
The XY coordinates take the PCB origin as reference. Placement surface –
Mark name –
Explanation –

Page 5-36 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

Indispensable
 Record Type Explanation Field
setting
[Placement point] Displays the component placement position or order. Component name ○
The XY coordinates take the PCB origin as reference. X-coordinate ○
The "Placement order" field indicates simple priority Y-coordinate ○
(first/last) of the placement order.
Rotation ○
( ‘5.2.1 CAD CAD Macro Editor’→’3. Setting the
Placement surface –
macro definition detail’→’■General Settings’ )
Reference number –
The "Priority order layer" field indicates the relative
Explanation –
priority order of placement points (0: Not specified, 1 or
higher number: Setting the larger value will place later.) Pattern identification –
Part description –
Shape code –
Insertion pitch –
Placement order –
Priority layer –
[Unused placement Displays the component placement point which will not Reference number ○
point (not in use)] be loaded. The XY coordinates take the PCB origin as X-coordinate ○
reference. Y-coordinate ○
Rotation ○
Placement surface –
Component name –
Application angle –
Explanation –
Insertion pitch –
Placement order –
[Placement point Displays the positions of individual correction marks X-coordinate ○
recognition] (alignment mark) for precision parts. Generally, each Y-coordinate ○
placement record has zero or two individual correction Placement surface –
marks. The XY coordinates take the PCB origin as Reference number –
reference.
Mark name –
Explanation –
Pattern identification –
[PCB outer dimension] Specifies the PCB dimensions. The XY coordinates X-coordinate ○
take the PCB origin as reference. Y-coordinate ○
X-coordinate 2 –
Y-coordinate 2 –
PCB thickness –
[PAD] Specifies the position and dimensions of the land on a X-coordinate ○
PCB. Y-coordinate ○
X-direction size ○
Y-direction size ○
Placement surface –
Reference number –
Layer –
Network ID –
Shape –
Recognition required –
Rotation –

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-37

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

Indispensable
 Record Type Explanation Field
setting
[Hole] Specifies all the holes on a PCB other than for X-coordinate ○
transferring. Y-coordinate ○
X-direction size ○
Y-direction size –
Placement surface –
Reference number –
Shape –
[Trace segment] Specifies the pattern that connects the lands on a X-coordinate ○
PCB. Y-coordinate ○
X-coordinate 2 ○
Y-coordinate 2 ○
PCB thickness ○
Layer –
Network ID –
Thickness –
PCB warp detection Specifies the point for PCB warp detection. X-coordinate ○
point Y-coordinate ○
Placement surface –
Pattern warpage Specifies the position of the measurement point for X-coordinate ○
measurement point pattern warpage measurement. Y-coordinate ○
Placement surface –
Pattern reference
–
number
PCB barcodes Indicates the PCB barcode position. The XY X-coordinate ○
coordinates take the PCB origin as reference. Y-coordinate ○
Placement surface –
Mark name –
Pattern barcodes Indicates the pattern barcode position. The XY X-coordinate ○
coordinates take the PCB origin as reference. Y-coordinate ○
Placement surface –
Mark name –
Pattern reference
–
number
Support pin Indicates the support pin position. The XY coordinates X-coordinate ○
take the PCB origin as reference. Y-coordinate ○
Placement surface –
CAD comment The CAD file may contain data unnecessary for the
placement program. Those data are used to specify – –
items to be ignored by the CAD file.

Page 5-38 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

Item Explanation
 ‘D Method’ The ID method function can determine the collective identification of
record types in the CAD file. Each record should be identified during the
conversion process. As a part of the CAD system, a check mark () is
attached to the identified records. Selecting the ID method displays the
field list and each input window under ‘ID Method.’
[Not Used] Indicates that the selected (highlighted) record types are not used by the
CAD system. By default, [Not Used] is set.
[Character string] Identifies a character string as one record. Selecting [Character string]
opens a box to input a character string. Input a character string unique to
the selected sample CAD file. The position of the character string can be
anywhere in the record. For example, if ‘CF’ is displayed only on the mark
record, it can also be used to identify the record type of placement point
recognition.
[Field contents] Uses a specific field content to identify the record type. Selecting [Field
contents] displays the boxes into which you will enter [Character string]
and [Row No.]. Input a character string unique to the selected sample
CAD file, and specify [Row No.] of the record.
[Range] Displays all the record types by block. When [Range] is selected,
[Start/End character] will be displayed under ‘ID Method.’ Input a unique
character string, and specify the range of the records. The position of the
character string can be anywhere in the record. If the starting and ending
characters are not specified, the range will be from the beginning and
ending of the file.
[Remaining] Identifies the highlighted record type as one of the record types other
than the defined ones. Only one record is applicable per CAD file.
 ‘Total Records’ Displays the number of total records searched by the sample CAD file.
(For reading only)
 ‘Total Identified’ Displays the number of total records identified by the selected CAD
sample file.
(For reading only)
 ‘Records Unidentified’ Displays the number of total records that are not recognized by the
defined identification types.
(For reading only)

 Checkbox
Item Explanation
 ‘Advance Field Definition’ Loads the CAD file information by using the formula against each field of
the specified record type when referring the CAD file.

 Button
Button Explanation
 [Identify] Clicking this starts searching for the CAD file under the condition set by
the ID method and displays the results in the sample file area in the lower
part of the window.
By clicking [Identify] before defining the fields required for the CAD file
record, you can display the target records only.
 [Apply] Clicking this saves the changes of the record type definition. To save the
record, all the essential fields need to be defined.
The essential fields are displayed with ‘’ in the field selection combo box.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-39

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Advanced field definition

In the ‘Advance Field Definition’ step, you can specify how to view the fields of the CAD file by
setting a formula to each record field.

 CAD tab

Project050201S-23E01 Project050201S-24E01

CAD tab when Advance Field Definition and the CAD tab when Advance Field Definition and the
delimiter-specified CAD file are used position-specified CAD file are used

1 Check off ‘Advance Field Definition.’

2 Click on each column.

2  The edit window opens.

Project050201S-25E01

Page 5-40 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

3 Edit the formula.

3 4 Click [OK].

 The formula is set.

Project050201S-27E01
4

Project050201S-28E01

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-41

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Setting a formula when the position-specified CAD file is used

1 Check off ‘Advance Field Definition.’

2 Click on each column.

2  The edit window opens.

Project050201S-29E01

3 Edit the formula.

3 4 Click [OK].

 The formula is set.

Project050201S-31E01
4

Project050201S-32E01

Page 5-42 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

Operators and formulas that can be used on the edit window are as follows.
 When you use a character string on the edit window, enclose it in “ ” (double quotation marks).

Operators and formulas Explanation

$n (n: 1,2,3…) Indicates the nth column.
 Performs addition.
 Performs subtraction.
 Performs multiplication.
/ Performs division.
% Obtains a remainder.
# Joins together.
 Checks whether the right side and left side are equal.
! Checks whether the right side and left side are not equal.
 Checks whether the left side is smaller than the right side.
 Checks whether the left side is larger than the right side.
 Checks whether the left side is equal to or smaller than the right side.
 Checks whether the left side is equal to or larger than the right side.
|| Takes the logical sum of the right and left sides.
&& Takes the logical product of the right and left sides.
rtrim (x) Deletes a space.
upper (x) Capitalizes a character string.
mid (x,y,z) Returns the character string of the length z from the xth row and yth
column.
carry (x) Takes the record value in front of the target cell if it is blank or the value of
the target cell if it has a value in it.
length (x) Returns the number of the character string length.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-43

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Defining the CAD format when the delimiter-specified CAD file is used

1 Choose the record type to define.

 For ‘Record Type’ available for setting,

see ‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor’  ‘2.
Defining the CAD format’  ‘ CAD tab’  ‘
1 Relationship of record types and field
2 definition.’

3  You are recommended to define a placement

point first.

 The displayed field varies with the selected

record type.

Project050201S-33E01 2 Choose the ID method to use.

 For ‘ID Method’ available for use, see

‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor’  ‘2. Defining the
CAD format’  ‘ CAD tab’  ‘ Relationship
of record types and field definition.’

 The displayed option varies with the selected

4 ID method.

 Set a value appropriate for the displayed

option.
Project050201S-34E00

3 Click [Identify].

 The CAD file is searched under the conditions

set by the ID method, and the search results
will be displayed.

4 Choose the field name from the

5 dropdown menu of each column.

 You should define all the essential fields (with

‘’ at the end) at least.

5 Click [Apply].
Project050201S-35E01

Page 5-44 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Example of CAD macro definition

This section describes an example of definition to extract placement points from a delimited CAD
file.
nd
Let’s assume that a record including the string ‘PLACMENT’ in the 2 column in a delimited CAD
file is one that defines a placement point.

1 Choose the definition target.

 Choose [Placement] from ‘Record Type’.

Project050201S-36E03

2 Define the extraction conditions.

 Choose [Field Contents] from ‘ID Method’.

Project050201S-37E02

a) Type ‘PLACMENT’ into ‘String’, and ‘2’ into

‘Column Ordinal’.

b) Clicking [Identity] displays only the records

a that meet the conditions so that the specified
conditions (In this example, extract the lines
including the character string ‘PLACMENT.’)
b can be verified.

Project050201S-38E02

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-45

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

3 Define the field.

 Define the field necessary to define placement

points. To define placement points, all the
fields below must be defined.

• Component name
• X coordinate
• Y coordinate
• Rotation

 The fields below are options.

• Reference number
• Comments
• Pattern Designator
• Part Description
• Insertion Pitch

3  The field defined as [Part Description] is set to

[Description] of a part during import. If
[Comment] is selected on the BOM tab,
[Description] comes first before [Part
description].
Project050201S-39E02
 The field defined as [Insertion Pitch] is set to
[Insertion Interval] of a part during import.
For the setting of insertion interval, see
’5.8.3 Adding Placement Points’ → ‘④
Insertion Pitch’.

rd
The component name is stored in the 3
column. According to it, define the component
name.

 Choose [Part Name] from the combo box in

rd
the 3 column.

rd
 The 3 column has been defined as [Part
Name].

Project050201S-40E02

Page 5-46 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

4 Repeat these procedures to define the

other fields.
th
• X coordinate (5 column)
5 • Y coordinate
th
(6 column)
th
• Rotation (7 column)
th
• Reference number (4 column)
st
• Placement surface (1 column)
4

5 Apply the definition.

 Click [Apply] to save the definition.

Project050201S-41E02

Project050201S-42E02

Repeat the steps above, and define for each

record type.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-47

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Defining the CAD format when the position-specified CAD file is used

1 Choose the record type to define.

 For ‘Record Type’ available for setting, see

‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor’  ‘2. Defining
the CAD format’  ‘ CAD tab’  ‘
1 Relationship of record types and field
2
definition.’

3  You are recommended to define a placement

point first.

 The displayed field varies with the selected

record type.

Project050201S-43E01 2 Choose the ID method to use.

 For ‘ID Method’ available for use, see

‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor’  ‘2. Defining the
CAD format’  ‘ CAD tab’  ‘ Relationship
of record types and field definition.’

 The displayed option varies with the selected

ID method.
4
 Set a value appropriate for the displayed
option.
Project050201S-44E00

3 Click [Identify].

 The CAD file is searched under the conditions

set by the ID method, and the search results
will be displayed.

 The field list is displayed at the upper right of

the window. The defined field names and their
start and end positions are displayed here.

5
4 Select the data from the displayed
CAD file, and select the field name
shown on the menu.

 You should define all the essential fields (with

‘’ at the end) at least.
Project050201S-45E01

5 Click [Apply].

Page 5-48 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Example of CAD macro definition

This section describes an example of definition to extract placement points from a positional CAD
file.
Let’s assume that a record including the string ‘PLACMENT’ in the CAD file is one that defines a
placement point.

1 Choose the definition target.

 Choose [Placement] from ‘Record Type’.

Project050201S-46E01

2 Define the extraction conditions.

 Choose [String] from ‘ID Method’.

Project050201S-47E01

a) Type ‘PLACMENT’ into ‘String’.

b) Pressing [Identify] displays only the records

that meet the conditions so that the specified
a conditions (In this example, extract the lines
including the character string ‘PLACMENT.’)
can be verified.
b

Project050201S-48E01

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-49

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

3 Define the field.

 Define the field necessary to define the

placement point. To define placement points,
all the fields below must be defined.

• Component name
• X coordinate
• Y coordinate
• Rotation
a

 The fields below are options.

• Placement surface
• Reference number
• Comment
Project050201S-49E01 • Pattern identification
•Part description

 The field defined as [Part description] is set to

[Description] of a part during import. If
[Comment] is selected on the BOM tab,
[Description] comes first before [Part
description].

The component names are stored in the field

th th
from 17 character to 36 character. According
to them, define the component names.
b

th th
a) Click 17 character and drag to 36
character.

Project050201S-50E01
b) Release the button so that the menu is
displayed. Put a cursor on the component name,
and click it.

c) The start and the end points of Field ‘Part

Name’ are defined.

Project050201S-51E01

Page 5-50 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

4 Repeat the same procedures to define

the other fields.
th th
• X coordinate (49 to 58 )
5 th th
• Y coordinates (60 to 69 )
4 • Rotation
st th
(71 to 74 )

5 Apply the definition.

 Press [Apply] to save the definition.

Project050201S-52E01

Project050201S-53E01

By repeating the procedures above, give a

definition (to each record type separately).

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-51

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 BOM tab

1
1

2 2
7 8 6
7 8 6

3 4 5
3 4 5

Project050201S-55E01
Project050201S-54E01

BOM tab when the delimiter-specified BOM file is used BOM tab when the position-specified BOM file is used

 Relationship of record types and field definition

Record Type: Define ‘ID Method’ and relevant fields to define a record. If necessary, convert the fields. All the
record types contained in the BOM file are displayed in a list.
Record types with ‘’ indicate that they have been identified by the macro.

Indispensable
 Record Type Explanation Field
setting
[Bill of Materials] BOM file data showing component data. Component name ○
The field defined as comment is set to [Description] of Reference number -
a part during import. If [Part description] has already Explanation -
been defined on the CAD tab, comment comes first.
Shape code -
Version 1 Marker -
Version 2 Marker -
Version 3 Marker -
Version 4 Marker -
Version 5 Marker -
[PCB Version] PCB revision number PCB version ○
Version 1 Marker -
Version 2 Marker -
Version 3 Marker -
Version 4 Marker -
Version 5 Marker -
[Identifier List] BOM file data showing reference numbers. This is Reference number ○
used for BOM files that set component names to one Component name -
or more reference numbers. Explanation -
Version 1 Marker -
Version 2 Marker -
Version 3 Marker -
Version 4 Marker -
Version 5 Marker -

Page 5-52 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

Indispensable
 Record Type Explanation Field
setting
[Identifier List 2] BOM file data showing reference numbers. This Reference number ○
is used for BOM files that set component names Component name -
to one or more reference numbers. Explanation -
Version 1 Marker -
Version 2 Marker -
Version 3 Marker -
Version 4 Marker -
Version 5 Marker -
[BOM comment] Comment on the BOM file. Up to six types of
-
comments can be defined.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-53

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

Item Explanation
 ‘ID Method’ The ID method function can determine the collective identification of
record types in the CAD file. Each record should be identified during the
conversion process. As a part of the CAD system, a check mark () is
attached to the identified records. Selecting the ID method displays the
field list and each input window under ‘ID Method.’
[Unused] Indicates that the selected (highlighted) record types are not used by the
BOM system. By default, [Not Used] is set.
[Character string] Identifies a character string as one record. Selecting [Character string]
opens a box to input a character string. Input a character string unique to
the selected sample BOM file. The position of the character string can be
anywhere in the record. For example, if ‘CF’ is displayed only in the mark
record, it is OK to use ‘CF’ for identification of the record type for
placement point recognition.
[Field contents] Uses a specific field content to identify the record type. Selecting [Field
contents] opens a box to input [Character string] and [Column]. Input a
character string unique to the selected sample CAD file, and specify
[Row No.] of the record.
[Range] Displays all the record types by block. When [Range] is selected,
[Start/End character] will be displayed under ‘ID Method.’ Input a unique
character string, and specify the range of the records. The position of the
character string can be anywhere in the record. If the starting and ending
characters are not specified, the range will be from the beginning and
ending of the file.
[Remaining] Identifies the highlighted record type as one of the record types other
than the defined ones. Only one record is applicable per CAD file.
 ‘Total Records’ Displays the number of total records searched by the sample CAD file.
(For reading only)
 ‘Total Identified’ Displays the number of total records identified by the selected CAD
sample file.
(For reading only)
 ‘Records Unidentified’ Displays the number of total records that are not recognized by the
defined identification types.
(For reading only)

 Checkbox
Item Explanation
 ‘Advance Field Definition’ Loads the CAD file information by using the formula against each field of
the specified record type when referring the CAD file.

 Button
Button Explanation
 [Identify] Clicking this starts searching for the BOM file under the condition set by
the ID method and displays the results in the sample file area in the lower
part of the window. By clicking [Identify] before defining the fields
required for the BOM file record, you can display the target records only.
 [Apply] Clicking this saves the changes of the record type definition. To save the
record, all the essential fields need to be defined. The essential fields are
displayed with ‘’ in the field selection combo box.

Page 5-54 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Advanced field definition

In the ‘Advance Field Definition’ step, you can specify how to view the fields of the BOM file by
setting a formula to each record field.

 BOM tab

Project050201S-56E01 Project050201S-57E01

BOM tab when Advance Field Definition and the BOM tab when Advance Field Definition and the
delimiter-specified BOM file are used position-specified BOM file are used

 Setting a formula when the delimiter-specified BOM file is used

1 Check ‘Advance Field Definition.’

2 Click on each column.

2  The edit window opens.

Project050201S-58E01

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-55

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

3 Edit the formula.

3 4 Click [OK].

 The formula is set.

Project050201S-60E01
4

Project050201S-61E01

Page 5-56 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Setting a formula when the position-specified BOM file is used

1 Check ‘Advance Field Definition.’

2 Click on each column.

2  The edit window opens.

Project050201S-62E01

3 Edit the formula.

3 4 Click [OK].

 The formula is set.

Project050201S-64E01
4

Project050201S-65E01

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-57

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

Operators and formulas that can be used on the edit window are as follows.
 When you use a character string on the edit window, enclose it in “ ” (double quotation marks).

Operators and formulas Explanation

$n (n: 1,2,3…) Indicates the nth column.
 Performs addition.
 Performs subtraction.
 Performs multiplication.
/ Performs division.
% Obtains a remainder.
# Joins together.
 Checks whether the right side and left side are equal.
! Checks whether the right side and left side are not equal.
 Checks whether the left side is smaller than the right side.
 Checks whether the left side is larger than the right side.
 Checks whether the left side is equal to or smaller than the right side.
 Checks whether the left side is equal to or larger than the right side.
|| Takes the logical sum of the right and left sides.
&& Takes the logical product of the right and left sides.
rtrim (x) Deletes a space.
upper (x) Capitalizes a character string.
mid (x,y,z) Returns the character string of the length z from the xth row and yth
column.
carry (x) Takes the record value in front of the target cell if it is blank or the value of
the target cell if it has a value in it.
length (x) Returns the number of the character string length.

Page 5-58 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Defining the BOM format when the delimiter-specified BOM file is used

1 Choose the record type to define.

 For ‘Record Type’ available for setting, see

‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor’  ‘2. Defining
the CAD format’  ‘ BOM tab’  ‘
1 Relationship of record types and field
2
definition.’
3  You are recommended to define a placement
point first.

 The displayed field varies with the selected

record type.

Project050201S-66E01
2 Choose the ID method to use.

 For ‘ID Method’ available for use, see

‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor’  ‘2. Defining the
CAD format’  ‘ BOM tab’  ‘ Relationship
of record types and field definition.’

 The displayed option varies with the selected

ID method.

 Set a value appropriate for the displayed

option.

3 Click [Identify].

 The BOM file is searched under the conditions

set by the ID method, and the search results
will be displayed.

4 Choose the field name from the

dropdown menu of each column.
4  You should define all the essential fields (with
‘’ at the end) at least.

Project050201S-67E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-59

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

5 Click [Apply].

Project050201S-68E00

Page 5-60 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Defining the BOM format when the position-specified BOM file is used

1 Choose the record type to define.

 For ‘Record Type’ available for setting, see

‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor’  ‘2. Defining
the CAD format’  ‘ BOM tab’  ‘
1 Relationship of record types and field
2 definition.’

3  You are recommended to define a placement

point first.

 The displayed field varies with the selected

record type.

Project050201S-69E00 2 Choose the ID method to use.

 For ‘ID Method’ available for use, see

‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor’  ‘2. Defining the
CAD format’  ‘ BOM tab’  ‘ Relationship
of record types and field definition.’

 The displayed option varies with the selected

ID method.

 Set a value appropriate for the displayed

option.

3 Click [Identify].

 The CAD file is searched under the conditions

set by the ID method, and the search results
will be displayed.

 The field list is displayed at the upper right of

the window. The defined field names and their
start and end positions are displayed here.

4 Choose the data from the displayed

CAD file, and select the field name
shown on the menu.
4
 You should define all the essential fields (with
‘’ at the end) at least.

Project050201S-70E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-61

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

5 Click [Apply].

Project050201S-71E00

Page 5-62 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

3. Setting the macro definition detail

The detail setting for CAD import is defined by the ‘Setup Macro Settings’ step.
There are following five tabs in the ‘Setup Macro Settings’ step.
• General Settings
• Manipulate
• BOM Settings
• Validation Settings
• Global Rotation

 General Settings tab

The basic setting for CAD import is defined.

Project050201S-77E02

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘XY Units’ Selects a unit type to be used by CAD files. ‘Custom’ enables you to define
the coefficient that converts the unit used by each CAD system in millimeter.
Input the coefficient in the input box.
‘Designators’ Indicates T as top and B as bottom. When you want to specify other
direction, input that direction in this field. For the CAD file that several
designators are set, designators and delimited are additionally set.
Example
PCB top side: T,TOP,TopSide
PCB bottom side: B,Bottom,BackSide
Delimited:,
‘Rotation Direction’ Sets the component revolution direction (Clockwise/Anti-clockwise) of the
CAD system to be used.
• ‘CCW’
• ‘CW’

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-63

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

Item Explanation
‘Undefined Parts’ In case components of the CAD data do not exist on the database, you can
search the components from the selected library using specified criteria and
copy the component data matched to the criteria.
There are following two criteria.
・Part Description: Searches using the component description of the
CAD/BOM data.
・Shape Code: Searches using the shape code of the CAD/BOM data.
*If the definition exists in both the CAD file and BOM file, the BOM file has
priority for search.
‘Priority Sets a designator to represent 'First'/'Last' of the simple priority order.
Designators’ This setting is required only when simple priority order is used.
The designator set here is used in the "Placement order" field in the
placement point record.
‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor’ → ’2. Defining the CAD format’ → ‘■CAD
tab’.

Page 5-64 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Manipulate tab
By defining the fields on the operation tab, you can edit the data before creating a PCB file on the
[Product Editor].

Project050201S-78E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Select a Side’ Select the side (surface or reverse side) of the PCB to be
displayed and edited. Tick ‘Bottom same as top with mirror
over Y’ when the following three conditions are met: 1. CAD
data include the surface and reverse sides of a board. 2. The
board is symmetric with respect to the Y axis. 3. Data about
both sides is entered. With ‘Bottom same as top with mirror
over Y’ selected, ‘Bottom side’ cannot be selected.
‘Step 1: XY Offset’ Input values suitable for all the record types to add to the XY
coordinates. The XY coordinates will be changed accordingly.
These values are added in importing a CAD file. With
production model (PCB) files, placement components will be
moved instead of PCBs.
• Into the ‘X Offset Distance,’ enter the X-direction offset to be
applied to the current board surface when capturing a CAD
file.
• Into the ‘Y Offset Distance,’ enter the Y-direction offset to be
applied to the current board surface when capturing a CAD
file.
‘Step 2: Panel Offset’ The record type and XY coordinates will not be changed
against the coordinate reference point (program reference
point). These values are captured as PCB internal data when a
CAD file is captured. With production model (PCB) files, whole
PCBs will be moved.
• Into the ‘X Offset Distance,’ enter the X-direction offset to be
applied to the current board surface when capturing a CAD
file.
• Into the ‘Y Offset Distance,’ enter the Y-direction offset to be
applied to the current board surface when capturing a CAD
file.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-65

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

Item Explanation
‘Step 3: Panel Rotation Offset’ Set this when the PCB direction in the CAD data is different
from that in actual production. Select the automatic rotation
direction of PCBs in importing a CAD file.
• ‘0’
PCBs will not be rotated in importing a CAD file.
• ‘90’
PCBs will be rotated by 90 counterclockwise in importing a
CAD file.
• ‘180’
PCBs will be rotated counterclockwise by 180 in importing a
CAD file.
• ‘270’
PCBs will be rotated counterclockwise by 270 in importing a
CAD file.
‘Step 4: Coordinate and Angle The coordinate direction may vary with the side
Reverse’ (surface/reverse) of double-sided PCBs on the CAD data. For
the  and  directions of the XY coordinates on the
double-sided PCB, specify the same direction or mirror
reverse for the PCB surface.
• ‘None’
PCBs will not be inverted automatically in importing a CAD
file.
• ‘Over Y’
PCBs will automatically be inverted symmetrically over the
Y-axis in importing a CAD file.
• ‘Over X’
PCBs will automatically be inverted symmetrically over the
X-axis in importing a CAD file.
• ‘Both’
PCBs will automatically be inverted symmetrically over the
X- and Y-axes in importing a CAD file.
• ‘Reverse of Rotation Angle’
After a CAD file is loaded, reverse an angle in the same way
as reverse of coordinates.
‘Step 5: Convert panel to single When this field is checked off, multi-block PCBs will
pattern’ automatically be converted to single-block PCBs in importing a
CAD file. This option is valid only to PCBs with two or more
offset records (multi-block PCBs).
 Note that bad PCB marks cannot be checked for each
pattern on the PCB when this option is selected.

 Angle offset is carried out after ‘Step 5’ for the placement angle of a component whose entire
angle offsets or CAD rotation is set.

Page 5-66 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 BOM Settings tab

The CAD file and BOM (Bill of Materials) file are checked.

Project050201S-74E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘ID String’ Specify a character string to be used in PCB modification
identification.
‘Include’/‘Exclude’ Specify whether to include or exclude the ID string in PCB
modification identification.
‘BOM Is Master’ Select this option to ignore components that are absent in a
BOM file but present in a CAD file. When this is not checked
off, such components are regarded as an error.

E.g.) In the sample files shown below, PARTNOx indicates the

component name and Rx indicates the reference number.
CAD files R1 1.23 4.56 90
R2 4.12 3.57 270
R3 3.45 9.87 180
BOM files PARTNOX R1
PARTNOY R2
PARTNOZ R4

When ‘BOM Is Master’ is checked off, R1 and R2 are imported

as PARTNOX and PARTNOY respectively. An error occurs for
R4.

When ‘BOM Is Master’ is not checked off, R1 and R2 are

imported as PARTNOX and PARTNOY respectively. R3 is
imported without the component name.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-67

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

Item Explanation
‘Multiple Designators’ Check this off when more than one reference number is set to
the component name in BOM.
‘Designators wrap to next line’ Check this off when the reference number of a component is
input in more than one line as shown below.
E.g.)
Component number Reference number
ERJ235GSK C100-135,C138,C217-248
C303-325,C327,C329
JDLXC43V45B R15-86,C90-96
‘Designator Separator’ This refers to the characters used to delimit the reference
number. Input a value when the reference number is
duplicated. Ensure that the value is different from the range
characters.
Spaces shown on a BOM file are ignored in front and at the
back of the reference-number delimiter.
E.g.)
PARTNOX R11,R12,R13,R14,R15,Q1,Q2,Q3
Or
PARTNOX R11,12,13,14,15,Q1,2,3
For files in this format, type ‘,’ as a separator for the reference
number.
‘Range Character’ This refers to the characters used to specify the range of the
reference number. Input a value when the reference number is
duplicated. Ensure that the value is different from the range
characters.
Example)
PARTNOX R11-15,Q1-3
Or
PARTNOX R11-5,Q1-3
For files in this format, type ‘-’ as a range character.

Page 5-68 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Validation Settings tab

Check contents used in importing a CAD file are defined on the check contents tab.

Project050203S-04E02

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Validation Settings’
‘Generate error for fiducial Specified to display an error message when there are not two
count mismatches’ marks.
‘Generate error for missing Indicates that an error message appears for CAD files that are
part names’ not registered in the component master database.
‘When duplicate designator is found’
‘Rename duplicate Adds a 3-digit identification code at the end of the reference
designator’ number when the reference number is duplicated.
=Note=
Ensure that the reference number is within twenty digits.
E.g.)
When there is one reference number:
R01
When there is more than one reference number:
R01-001
R01-002
•
•
‘Generate error message (do Displays an error message and does not import the data.
not import)’
‘Allow duplicate designator’ Imports the data even if the reference number is duplicated.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-69

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

Item Explanation
‘When component fiducial designator is blank’
‘Generate error message’ Displays the error message when the placement recognition
data exists but the reference number is not specified.
‘Use designator from previous Used when the reference number of the placement point
placement’ recognition item in the CAD data is not specified.
‘Search for matching Displays the error message when the placement point
placements using recognition is specified but the reference No. is not specified.
coordinates’ The specific reference number is determined by specifying the
lead pitch of the part requiring the placement point recognition
and the distance from the placement point recognition.

Page 5-70 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Global Rotation tab

The conversion method of the CAD data angle is set on the global rotation tab.

Project050201S-76E01

The unit of the input angle must be degree (°).

As for the unit other than degree (°) that is used in the CAD data, conversion of rotation angle
must be defined.

 Scale translation
The scale factor is set for the angle unit, if it is shown in other then degree (°). The angle after the
data is loaded shall be the value shown in the CAD data which is multiplied by the scale factor. For
example, if the angle unit is shown in radian, the input value shall be 57.2957.

 Code translation
If the rotation angle is shown in code, code conversion must be defined. If UP is used instead of 0°
in the CAD data, UP is input in the Code field and 0 is input in the Rotation field in Translate Codes,
and click the Add button.
(Example of codes)
UP = 180°, LEFT = 270°, RIGHT = 90°, DOWN = 0°

 Select CAD System Name

If 0° of a component defined by the CAD system differs from 0° of the one (shape shown in the
part editor) defined by the DGS, mount rotation angle must be converted in order to match 0° of
the one in the DGS.
By selecting the conversion table here, you can import the data adding a certain offset rotation
angle against the defined component.
For how to set offset rotation angle per component, see 5.8.12 CAD Rotation.

 Full angle offset

If offset angle is set to all placement points, full angle offset is used.
You can set angle within a range of ±180°.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-71

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Select CAD System Name’ Selects the tables for conversion of rotation angle per
component.
‘Translate Codes’ Enables the selection boxes for code conversion.
‘Scale Factor’ Enables the selection boxes for a scale coefficient.
‘Scale’ Sets factor for conversion of the rotation unit to degree (°).
‘Code’ Input the code indicates ‘Rotation’ angle.
‘Rotation’ Input rotation indicates ‘Code’.
Code conversion list Displays the defined rotation angle code conversions in a list.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Add] Adds rotation code conversion.
[Change] Changes the rotation code.
[Remove] Deletes the rotation code.

Page 5-72 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

4. Importing
Import the CAD BOM file with the Import tab using the macro file being edited currently.

Project050202S-04E02

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Macro’ Displays the name of the defined macro file.
‘CAD File Name’ Specifies the CAD file path. The sample file used for macro
definition is specified by default. Clicking beside ‘CAD
File Name’ opens the file selection window.
‘BOM File Name’ Specifies the BOM file path. The sample file used for macro
definition is specified by default. Clicking beside ‘BOM
File Name’ opens the file selection window.
‘Same as CAD/BOM file name’ Automatically sets the specified CAD file name or BOM file
name as a PCB name. To use the BOM file name, you need to
define the BOM file format on the CAD macro editor.
5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor→1. Setting the macro input

‘CAD File’ Sets the specified CAD file name as a PCB name.
‘BOM File’ Sets the specified BOM file name as a PCB name.
‘PCB Name’ Specifies the name of the PCB created after importing.
‘Revision’ Specifies the revision number of the PCB created after
importing.

 Button
Button Explanation
Displays the file selection window.
[Import] Imports the selected CAD/BOM file using the defined macro
and creates a PCB. When importing completes, the PCB editor
launches. ( ‘5.8 Editing PCBs’)
[Cancel] Cancels importing.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-73

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

5. Saving
The CAD macro is saved.

Page 5-74 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

5.2.2 Script Defined CAD Macro

Before importing the CAD/BOM file defined by the user defined CAD macro, you can define the
conversion script which automatically executes. If the format cannot be defined by the CAD macro
editor, the following procedure will change it to be the loadable one by the user defined macro.

Project050202S-01E01

 Define Script Defined Macro items

Item Explanation
‘Description’ Inputs description of macro if needed.
‘Script command for CAD Data’ Inputs the command to execute the CAD file conversion script
‘Use Script for BOM Data’ Selects when the BOM file is converted
‘Script command for BOM Data’ Inputs the command to execute the BOM file conversion script
‘Select User defined CAD Macro’ Selects the user defined macro used when imported after
conversion.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-75

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Script defined CAD macro setting

When more than one error exists in the CAD/BOM file, error is displayed during loading the
CAD/BOM file and import will be suspended.
To continue importing, correct the error and import.

1 Input the conversion command of the

CAD file.

 %INPUT% and %OUTPUT% must be

included in the command. When the command
is executed, %INPUT% is replaced with the
source CAD file path specified when imported,
1 and %OUTPUT% is replaced with the
2 destination file path output after conversion.

2 Example:
Location to save the conversion script
C:\Program Files\Convert\Convert.vbs
Project050202S-01E01
3 Argument of script when executed
4 Convert.vbs input file output file

Conversion command to set

"C:\Program Files \Convert
\Convert.vbs" %INPUT% %OUTPUT%

2 To convert the BOM file, mark the

checkbox of ‘Use script for BOM Data’
and input the conversion command of
the BOM file.

3 Select the user defined macro used

when imported after conversion.

4 Click [OK].

Page 5-76 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Example of script creation

Although the script can be registered in any language, it must meet the following conditions.
 Executable from the command line
 As for the command line argument, the path (including the filename) to store the input CAD
file and the file after conversion should be specified
 The return value when the called command is properly executed should be 0. If other than 0
is entered as the return value, export will be interrupted due to error.

Here is an example of the case that the following CAD file is loaded

CAD file
PCB Board
Name TEST
Length 329.50 PCB length, width, thickness are in separate
Width 245.00 records so that you can load by the user defined
Thickness 1.20 CAD macro.

PCB Component
no. x y angle designator component
1 58.200 42.910 90.00 C1 0001
2 73.400 35.450 -90.00 C2 0002
3 99.410 35.450 0.00 C3 0003
・
・
・

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-77

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

① Create the conversion script below by VB Script.

Save the script named as Test.vbs.

Set arg= WScript.Arguments Create argument object

Set Fs = WScript.CreateObject("Scripting.FileSystemObject") Create the file

system object
Set regEx = New RegExp Create the formal expression object
regEx.Global = True

Dim BoardSize(2) Saves the PCB size L, W and T

Set InputFile = Fs.OpenTextFile(arg(0),1) Open the file in read only mode

Set OutputFile = Fs.CreateTextFile(arg(1),True) Create the output file

InputAllStr = InputFile.ReadAll Load all lines in the file

GetBoardSize InputAllStr Save the PCB size in the BoardSize

OutputFile.WriteLine "BOARD_SIZE " & BoardSize(0) & " " & BoardSize(1) & " " &
BoardSize(2) Output the PCB size lineto the output file

OutputFile.WriteLine
OutputFile.Write InputAllStr Write the original CAD data to the output file

InputFile.Close
OutputFile.Close Close the file

Sub GetBoardSize(str) Function to get the PCB size

regEx.Pattern = "(Length|Width|Thickness)\s*(\d+\.*\d*)" Formal expression
Set Matches = regEx.Execute(str) matched to the line
For i = 0 To Matches.Count-1 of the PCB size
If StrComp(Matches(i).SubMatches(0),"Length") = 0 Then
BoardSize(0) = Matches(i).SubMatches(1)
ElseIf StrComp(Matches(i).SubMatches(0),"Width") = 0 Then
BoardSize(1) = Matches(i).SubMatches(1)
ElseIf StrComp(Matches(i).SubMatches(0),"Thickness") = 0 Then
BoardSize(2) = Matches(i).SubMatches(1)
End If
Next
End Sub

② Specify the sample CAD file to the first argument and the output destination file to the second
argument, and execute the script, the output file shall be as follows.

BOARD_SIZE 329.50 245.00 1.20 Output PCB length, width, thickness are in a
line so that you can load by the user defined
PCBComponent CAD macro.
no. x y angle designator component
1 58.200 42.910 90.00 C1 0001
2 73.400 35.450 -90.00 C2 0002
3 99.410 35.450 0.00 C3 0003
・
・
・

Page 5-78 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

③ When script is stored in C:\, the script defined CAD macro is defined as follows.
‘C:\TEST.vbs %INPUT% %OUTPUT%’
Choose the user defined CAD macro for loading the file after conversion.

Project050202S-02E01

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-79

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 About standard CAD macro

The standard CAD macro is initially registered in the CAD macro list. It is defined to load all parameters
which can be defined by the CAD macro function. By creating the output script by the specified format and
creating the script definition CAD macro, you can load the CAD file without creating the user definition CAD
macro.

The standard CAD macro loads a CSV file format (comma-delimited format) so that please follow the format
below. The sample file is saved in the following folder.
(Install drive)\Program Files\Panasonic-MES\Client\Samples\StandardCAD.txt

Example of the standard CAD format

The line that the head field is not specified record type
letters is skipped as comment.
//Offset
//field,X,Y,Angle,Designator,Side,Rivision,Product,Version,Comments,PatternDesignator
Offset,0,0,0,Offset1,T,1,1,1,Comments,P1
Field must delimit with “,”(commas).
Offset,100,100,180,Offset2,T,1,1,1,"Comments 1",P1
If space is included in the letter springs, it must
enclose in " " (double quotation marks).

Write one data (Example: 1 placement point) in one line.

The head field represents the record type.
(The above record is offset)
Example: Type “Placement” at the head field in the placement point record.
Set the required values for each record type after the field.
Items to set by the fields are the same as those defined by the user definition
macro.

Page 5-80 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Standard CAD macro record type

Record type Letters shown Field number Description
Offset Offset 1 Letters shown as record type
2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 Rotation
5 Reference number
6 Mount side
7 Revision code
8 Version number
9 PCB name
10 Comment
11 Pattern identifier
Master bad mark MasterBadMark 1 Letters shown as record type
2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 Mount side
5 Mark name
6 Comment
Pattern bad mark PatternBadMark 1 Letters shown as record type
(all patterns) 2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 Mount side
5 Mark name
6 Comment
7 Pattern identifier
Pattern mad mark OptionalBadMark 1 Letters shown as record type
(option specify) 2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 Mount side
5 Mark name
6 Offset reference number
7 Comment
8 Pattern identifier
Pattern mark PatternFiducial 1 Letters shown as record type
2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 Letters shown as record type
5 Mark name
6 Comment
7 Pattern identifier

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-81

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

Record type Letters shown Field number Description

PCB mark PanelFiducialMark 1 Letters shown as record type
2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 Mount side
5 Mark name
6 Explanation
Placement point Placement 1 Letters shown as record type
2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 Rotation
5 Part name
6 Reference number
7 Mount side
8 Explanation
9 Pattern identifier
10 Part description
Non placement point DiscardedPlacement 1 Letters shown as record type
(Unused) 2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 Rotation
5 Part name
6 Reference number
7 Mount side
8 Explanation
9 Dispense angle
10 Insertion pitch
11 Placement order
Placement point CompornentFiducial 1 Letters shown as record type
recognition 2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 Mount side
5 Mark name
6 Reference number
7 Explanation
8 Pattern identifier
PCB outline PanelOutline 1 Letters shown as record type
2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 X-coordinate 2
5 Y-coordinate 2
6 PCB thickness

Page 5-82 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

Record type Letters shown Field number Description

Pad Pad 1 Letters shown as record type
2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 X direction size
5 Y direction size
6 Mount side
7 Reference number
8 Layer
9 Net ID
10 Shape
11 Recognition necessary
12 Rotation
Hole Hole 1 Letters shown as record type
2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 X direction size
5 Y direction size
6 Mount side
7 Reference number
8 Shape
Trace segment TraceSegment 1 Letters shown as record type
2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 X-coordinate 2
5 Y-coordinate 2
6 PCB thickness
7 Layer
8 Net ID
9 Thickness
PCB warpage detection WarpMeasurement 1 Letters shown as record type
position 2 X-coordinate
3 Y-coordinate
4 Mount side

For interpretation of each record and field, see

( ‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor ■Relationship of record types and field definition’ )

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-83

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

5.2.3 Editing CAD Macro

The registered CAD macros can be edited.

1 Choose the desired CAD macro from

the PCB list.

2
2 Choose (Open) on the toolbar,
1
choose [File]  [Open] on the menu
bar, or choose [Open] on the
right-click menu.

 The <CAD Macro Editor> window opens.

Project050202S-01E04

 For user defined CAD macro

3 Make the setting appropriate for the
parts to be edited.
5
4
4 Click [Save].

5 Click [].

 The <CAD Macro Editor> window closes.

Project050202S-03E00

 For script defined CAD macro

3 Click [OK].

 The <Define Script Defined Macro> window

closes.

Project050202S-01E01
3

Page 5-84 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

5.2.4 Copying CAD Macro

The registered CAD macros can be copied.

1 Choose the desired CAD macro from

the PCB list.

2
2 Choose (Copy) on the toolbar,
1
choose [Edit]  [Copy] on the menu
bar, or choose [Copy] on the right-click
menu.

Project050203S-01E04

3 Choose (Paste) on the toolbar,

choose [Edit]  [Paste] on the menu
3 bar, or choose [Paste] on the
right-click menu.

4 The copied CAD macro is pasted.

Project050203S-03E04

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-85

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

5.2.5 Deleting CAD Macro

The registered CAD macros can be deleted.

1 Choose the desired CAD macro from

the PCB list.

2
1 2 Choose (Delete) on the toolbar,
choose [Edit]  [Delete] on the menu
bar, or choose [Delete] on the
right-click menu.

 The confirmation dialog opens.

 The user defined CAD macro which is linked to

the script defined CAD macro cannot be
Project050204S-01E05
deleted. To delete, delete the script defined
CAD macro to be linked first, and then delete
the user defined CAD macro.

3 Click [Yes].

Project050204S-03E03
3

Page 5-86 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

5.2.6 Renaming the CAD Macro Name

The registered CAD macros can be renamed.

1 Choose the desired CAD macro from

the PCB list.

2 Choose [Edit]  [Rename] on the

1 menu bar or [Rename] on the
right-click menu.
2
 The <Rename CAD Macro> window opens.

Project050205S-01E05

3 Enter a new name.

4 Click [OK].

Project050205S-02E00
4

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-87

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.2 Defining CAD Macro

 Standard Installation CAD macro list

In DGS, the following CAD macros are prepared.

Item Explanation
‘STD’ Standard CAD macro. For details, see below.
‘5.2.2 Script Defined CAD Macro ■About standard CAD
macro’
‘GenCAD’ This macro is used when the CAD data of a GenCAD format is
imported.
‘5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files ■GenCAD import’
‘KMECAD’ This macro is used when the KMECAD data is imported. It is as
same as importing the CAD/BOM files except for selecting
'KMECAD’ when macro is selected.
‘5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files’
‘ODB’ This macro is used when ODB++ format data is imported.
‘5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files ■ODB++ import’

 ODB++ support in NPM-DGS is provided as a result of solutions-development membership of

the ODB++ Solutions Alliance.

Page 5-88 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

To import CAD/BOM files using the defined CAD macro and create PCBs, select [Import] 
[CAD/BOM] on the menu bar. Importing starts after confirming that all the required fields are
defined.

 CAD/BOM file import

1 Choose a desired folder to import in

the navigation area on the upper left of
the screen.

Project050300S-01E03

2 Click (importing CAD data) on

the toolbar, or choose [Import] 
[CAD/BOM] on the menu bar.

 The <Import Cad Macro> window opens.

Project050300S-02E00
2 3 Choose the defined macro to use.

4 Specify the CAD/BOM file to import.

 When using the BOM file with the defined

macro specified in step 3, select ‘BOM File
Name.’
3
4
5 Type a PCB name.

 The following characters cannot be used.

% , ” ’ space \ : ; / . < > ? * | double-byte
5 character
5
 Up to the set value of ‘Max. Lot Name Length’
Project050300S-04E02 6 in General Settings can be entered for the
PCB name.
( ‘3.2.3 DGS Setting ■Recipe Settings’)

6 Click [Import].

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-89

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

 Correcting errors in import

When a CAD/BOM file contains two or more errors, the errors are displayed during CAD/BOM file
import, and the import process is temporarily suspended.
To continue, you need to correct the errors and resume importing.

1 Click [OK].

Project050300S-05E00

2 Check that the total of ‘Invalid’ is 1 or

more, and click [Corrections] to
correct errors.

Project050300S-06E00
2

Page 5-90 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

3 Check and correct the cause of import

errors.

4 Click [Apply], and check that the error

is corrected.

 When the error is corrected, changes to

.

 When there are more errors, click [Next Error]

to correct them.

Project050300S-07E00

NOTICE
The correction made here is temporary. To make the change valid, you need to
redefine the modified CAD system on the [File Format] window under [CAD System
Editor]. Correcting an error and displaying a preview of its result only is available here.

5 Click [Close].

Project050300S-08E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-91

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

6 Check that the total of ‘Invalid’ is 0 and

all errors are corrected. Then, click
[Close].

Project050300S-09E00
6

7 Click on the toolbar, or choose

[File]  [Save] on the menu bar to
7 save the imported PCB.

Project050300S-10E00

Page 5-92 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

① Summary tab
All import results of the PCB surface and reverse side are displayed.

Project050300S-11E02

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Record Type’ Displays all CAD macro record types being imported.
‘Total’ Displays the total records for each record type.
‘Valid’ Displays the total of valid records for each record type.
‘Corrected’ Displays the total of corrected records for each record type.
‘Warning’ Displays the total of warning records for each record type.
‘Invalid’ Displays the total of invalid records for each record type.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Close] Closes the <Import Results> window.
[Corrections] Corrects invalid records.
[Print Report] Prints out reports for all tabs.
[Save Report] Saves reports for all tabs in a text format.
 Because button operations are true of all tabs, the explanations are omitted on the following
pages.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-93

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

② Top Side tab

Only the records of the PCB surface are displayed.

Project050300S-12E02

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Record Type’ Displays all CAD macro record types being imported.
‘Total’ Displays the total records for each record type.
‘Valid’ Displays the total of valid records for each record type.
‘Corrected’ Displays the total of corrected records for each record type.
‘Warning’ Displays the total of warning records for each record type.
‘Invalid’ Displays the total of invalid records for each record type.

Page 5-94 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

③ Bottom Side tab

Only the records of the PCB reverse side are displayed.

Project050300S-13E02

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Record Type’ Displays all CAD macro record types being imported.
‘Total’ Displays the total records for each record type.
‘Valid’ Displays the total of valid records for each record type.
‘Corrected’ Displays the total of corrected records for each record type.
‘Warning’ Displays the total of warning records for each record type.
‘Invalid’ Displays the total of invalid records for each record type.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-95

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

④ No Side tab
Only the records of the PCB without specified sides are displayed.

Project050300S-14E02

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Record Type’ Displays all CAD macro record types being imported.
‘Total’ Displays the total records for each record type.
‘Valid’ Displays the total of valid records for each record type.
‘Corrected’ Displays the total of corrected records for each record type.
‘Warning’ Displays the total of warning records for each record type.
‘Invalid’ Displays the total of invalid records for each record type.

Page 5-96 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

⑤ Part Usage tab

Records of components used by the CAD macro being imported are displayed.

Project050300S-15E01

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Part Name’ Displays the component name.
‘Part Library’ Displays the library to which component data are registered.
‘Top Side’ Displays components to be placed on the surface.
‘Bottom Side’ Displays components to be placed on the reverse side.
‘Total’ Displays the number of components to be placed.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-97

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

 GenCAD import
You can import the CAD data of the GenCAD format.

1 Choose a desired folder to import in

the navigation area on the upper left of
the screen.

Project050300S-16E01

2 Click (importing CAD data) on

the toolbar, or choose [Import] 
[Import] on the menu bar.
Project050300S-17E00
2  The <Import Cad Macro> window opens.

3 Choose ‘GenCad14’.

4 Choose the file to download.

3
4
5 Enter the PCB name and revision.

 The following characters cannot be used.

% , ” ’ space \ : ; / . < > ? * | double-byte
5 character
5
Project050300S-18E02 6  Up to the set value of ‘Max. Lot Name Length’
in General Settings can be entered for the
PCB name.
( ‘3.2.3 DGS Setting ■Recipe Settings’)

6 Click [Import].

 The imported result is displayed.

Page 5-98 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

 Editing GenCAD macro

When GenCAD macro is edited from the GenCAD macro editor, items to be set differ from normal
CAD macro.

1. Input setting
For GenCAD macro, a PNL file can be selected besides a CAD file. The PNL file is used when
PCB and mark information are downloaded by GenCAD macro.

Project0503000S-24E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘CAD File’
‘Select Sample File’ Specifies a CAD file. Because format of GenCAD macro has
already been defined, it is not used as format definition, but it is
used as a CAD file when importing from the CAD macro editor.
Type a name in ‘Select Sample File’ field or click to
display the browser screen to select a sample CAD file.
‘Select Sample Pnl File’ Specifies a PNL file. Like the above sample file, it is used as a
PNL file during import. Type a name in ‘Select Sample Pnl file’
field or click to display the browser screen to select a
sample PNL file.

2. CAD format definition

Because a CAD file and a PNL file formats in GenCAD macro have been already defined, formats
are not defined. To define a BOM file format, follow the same procedure as normal CAD macro.
( ‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor ⑤BOM and ⑥BOM File’ )

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-99

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

3. Setting the macro detail

The detail setting for CAD import is defined by the ‘Setup Macro Settings’ step.
There are following three tabs in the ‘Setup Macro Settings’ step.
 Manipulate
 BOM Settings
 Global Rotation
The manipulate tab and BOM Settings tab are the same as normal CAD macro tab, but in the
Global Rotation tab, you can set ‘Full angle offset’ and ‘CAD system’.
For Manipulate tab and BOM Settings tab, see the following.
( ‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor■Manipulate tab and ■BOM Settings tab’ )

 Global Rotation tab

Project0503000S-25E00

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Full angle offset’ If offset angle is set to all placement points, full angle offset is
used.
You can set angle within a range of ±180°.
‘Select CAD System Name’ If 0° of a component defined by the CAD system differs from 0°
of the one (shape shown in the part editor) defined by the
DGS, mount rotation angle must be converted in order to
match 0° of the one in the DGS.
By selecting the conversion table here, you can import the data
adding a certain offset rotation angle against the defined
component.
For how to set offset rotation angle per component, see
‘5.8.13 CAD Rotation’.

Page 5-100 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

① Summary tab
The result imported by GenCAD14 macro is displayed.

Project050300S-19E00

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Record Type’ Displays all CAD macro record types being imported.
‘Top Side’ Displays the total of the top side for each record type.
‘Bottom Side’ Displays the total of the bottom side for each record type.
‘Inner Layer’ Displays the total of the inner layer for each record type.
‘Invalid’ Displays the total of invalid records among each record type.
‘Total’ Displays the total records for each record type.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Close] Closes the <Import Results> window.
[Corrections] Corrects invalid records.
[Print Report] Prints out reports for all tabs.
[Save Report] Saves reports for all tabs in a text format.
 Because button operations are true of all tabs, the explanations are omitted on the following
pages.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-101

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

② Warnings tab
Warnings occurred during import are displayed during running the GenCAD14 marco.

Project050300S-20E00

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘#’ Assigns a number to warning in occurrence order, and shows
the number.
‘Warning Messages’ Shows the details of warning.

Page 5-102 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

③ Errors tab
Warnings occurred during import are displayed during running the GenCAD14 marco.

Project050300S-21E00

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘#’ Assigns a number to warning in occurrence order, and shows
the number.
‘Error Messages’ Shows the details of warning.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-103

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

④ Part Usage tab

Imported components are shown during running the GenCAD14 macro.

Project050300S-22E01

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Part Name’ Shows the part name.
‘Part Library’ Shows the part library of using components.
‘Top Side’ Shows the placement points on the top side.
‘Bottom Side’ Shows the placement points on the bottom side.
‘Total’ Shows the total placement points.

 Double-clicking the row of unregistered component creates a new component.

( ‘6.5 Adding New Components’ )
 Double-clicking the row of registered component edits the component.
( ‘6.5.3 Editing Components’ )

Page 5-104 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

⑤ Undefined Parts
Undefined components in the DGS within the imported components by the GenCAD14 macro are
displayed.

Project050300S-23E01

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Part Name’ Shows part names which are not registered in import destination
DGS. Double-clicking it creates the new components. ( ‘6.5
Adding New Components’ )

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-105

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

 ODB++ import
Using ODB macro, the ODB++ data is converted and imported. With the ODB++ file, in addition to
acquisition of the PCB / placement point data as before, you can acquire the first pin position and
display it on the PCB editor.
( ‘5.8.2 PCB Edit ■First pin position display’)

1 Choose a desired folder to import in

the navigation area on the upper left of
the screen.

Project050300S-16E01

2 Click (importing CAD data) on

the toolbar, or choose [Import] 
[Import] on the menu bar.

 The <Import Cad Macro> window opens.

Project050300S-02E03

2 3 Choose ‘ODB’.

4 Choose the file to download.

The ODB++ data supports the following
compressed extension files.
.tgz file / .tar file / .zip file

3
4
5 Enter the PCB name and revision.

 The following characters cannot be used.

% , ” ’ space \ : ; / . < > ? * | double-byte
character
5
5  Up to the set value of ‘Max. Lot Name Length’
in General Settings can be entered for the
Project050300S-25E01 6
PCB name.
( ‘3.2.3 DGS Setting ■Recipe Settings’)

6 Click [Import].

 The imported result is displayed.

Page 5-106 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.3 Importing CAD/BOM Files

 Editing ODB macro

When ODB macro is edited using the CAD macro editor, the setting items differ from the original
CAD macro.

1. Input setting
For ODB macro, only the central coordinate setting of placement point for the ODB++ file and the
BOM file are selected. The ODB++ file will be specified when the CAD / BOM file is imported.

Project050300S-26E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘CAD File’
‘Center of Part’ In ODB++, the data is loaded assuming that
the center of a part outline is placement point
coordinates of a part on PCB. In the figure
shown on the right, the dotted line frame is the
part outline and an intersection point of the
diagonal lines is placement point coordinates.
‘Center of Body’ In ODB++, the data is loaded assuming that
the center of the part body is placement
coordinates of a part on PCB. In the figure
shown on the right, a certain lead is set longer
than actual leads in ODB++. In such a case, if
you select ‘Center of Part’, the placement
point is misaligned on DGS. Therefore, select
‘Center of Body’.
‘As It Is’ Placement point coordinates are set as described in ODB++.

2. CAD format definition

Because the ODB++ file format to be converted to the CAD file using ODB macro has already
decided, its format is not defined. To define a BOM file format, follow the same procedure as
normal CAD macro.
( ‘5.2.1 CAD Macro Editor ⑤BOM and ⑥BOM File’ )

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-107

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.4 Importing CAD Macros

5.4 Importing CAD Macros

Importing the CAD macro also imports the detailed settings of the CAD macro editor.

1 Choose [Import]  [CAD Macro] from

the menu bar.

 The <Open> window opens.

1

Project050400S-01E04

2 Choose the desired CAD macro.

3 Click [Open].

 If the name of the CAD macro contained in the

imported file is the same as that of the CAD
macro already registered, the confirmation
message asking whether to overwrite
2 appears.

Project050400S-02E00 3

4 When import is successfully complete,

the message shown left appears.
Click [OK] to close the window.

Project050400S-03E00
4

Page 5-108 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.5 Exporting CAD Macros

5.5 Exporting CAD Macros

Exporting the CAD macro outputs the detailed settings of the CAD macro editor to a file.

1 Choose [File]  [Export]  [CAD

Macro] on the menu bar.

 The <Save As> window opens.

Project050500S-01E04

2 Choose the destination.

3 Click [Save].

Project050500S-02E00 3

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-109

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.6 Importing PCB in the Recipe

5.6 Importing PCB in the Recipe

PCB data are imported from a file through PCB import.

5.6.1 Importing the NPM Recipe Data

The PCB data can be imported from the NPM Recipe data.

1 Choose a desired folder to import in

the navigation area on the upper left of
the screen.

Project050601S-01E02

2 Choose [Import]  [Recipe] on the

menu bar.

 The <PCB import> window opens.

Project050602S-01E03

3 Click .

 The <Open> window opens.

3

Project050601S-07E05

Page 5-110 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.6 Importing PCB in the Recipe

4 Choose the production data to import

5 Click [Open].
4

Project050601S-08E00 5

6 Click [Import].

 To select the PCB to be imported, mark the

desired checkbox on the PCB Name. All
checkboxes are marked as default.

 The PCB side having placement points is

displayed in the PCB list. If there are
Project050601S-09E05 placement points on both sides, both front and
back sides are displayed.
6
 To overwrite onto the existing PCB data,
check off ‘Overwrite existing PCB(s).’

 Choose the processing when there is a

discrepancy between the pattern data and
position data.

Item
 Import both Position Data and Pattern Data
 Import Pattern Data and recreate Position
Data
 Recreate Pattern Data from Position Data

 When the PCB is rotated 180 degree when

imported, mark the checkbox of ‘Rotate Panel
by180°’.
In such a case, the following window opens in
import.

Project050601S-06E01

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-111

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.6 Importing PCB in the Recipe

7 Click [OK].

 If the check is marked on ‘New’ in the PCB list,

it indicates that the PCB is newly created.

 If you want to import the part data as well, the

part list is displayed. If the checkbox of ‘New’
in the part list is in the marked state, it
indicates that the PCB is newly created.
Project050601S-05E02

Page 5-112 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.6 Importing PCB in the Recipe

 PCB import setting item

Item Explanation
Filename Displays the selecting file path.
Checkbox Select the PCB to be imported. All checkboxes are marked as
default.
PCB List – Import Source
‘Source PCB Name’ Displays a name of an import source PCB.
‘Source Revision’ Displays a revision version of an import source PCB.
‘Source Side’ Displays a side of an import source PCB either [Top] or
[Bottom].
PCB List – Import Target
‘Target PCB Name’ Set a name of import target PCB.
‘Target Revision’ Set a revision version of an import target PCB.
‘Target Side’ Set a side of an import target PCB either [Top] or [Bottom].
‘Part Library’
‘As it is’ Specifies the destination to store the component data to be
‘Change To’ placed on the PCB. To select ‘Change To’ pull down list
displays to select the library.
‘Overwrite existing PCB(s)’ Specifies whether to overwrite the data when PCB data have
been registered.
‘In case there is inconsistency’
‘Import both Position Data Specifies the import method when there is a discrepancy
and Pattern Data’ between the pattern data and coordinate data.
‘Import Pattern Data and For details of each item, see
recreate Position Data’ ( ‘5.6.1 ■Processing for the case when there is a
‘Recreate Pattern Data from discrepancy between the pattern data and position data’ )
Position Data’
‘Part Data in PCB(s)’
‘Import Parts in PCB(s)’ Specifies whether to import component data used by the PCB.
‘When same part already exists’
‘Overwrite all data’ If the same part name has existed in the library, the data is
overwritten and saved.
‘Overwrite nozzle number’ If a part of the same name exists in the same library, the nozzle
number is overwritten and saved.
‘Overwrite Inspection Data If the same part name has existed in the library, only the
only’ inspection data is overwritten and saved.
‘Do not overwrite’ If the same part name has existed in the library, the part is not
imported.
‘Import Substitute Part Group’ Whether to import the substitution part group is specified.
‘Overwrite Substitute Part Whether to overwrite the data when the substitution part group
Group’ is imported is specified.
‘PCB Rotation’
‘Rotate PCB 180°’ Mark the checkbox if the PCB data rotates 180 degree and
import as the data created for the line of different flow direction
imports.
‘Skip Default’
‘Import Dispense/Inspection Whether to import skip information of dispensing/component
Skip Setting as Skip Default’ inspection/solder inspection in the production data into PCB is
specified.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-113

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.6 Importing PCB in the Recipe

 Button
Button Explanation
[･･･] The dialog to select the file is displayed.
[Select all] / [Unselect all] Select/deselect all checkboxes of the PCB to import.
[Import] Begins the import process.
[Cancel] Cancels the import process.

Page 5-114 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.6 Importing PCB in the Recipe

 Processing for the case when there is a discrepancy between the pattern data and position data

Position on the pattern data

Data to be imported

• Importing both the position data • Reconstructing the position data • Reconstructing the pattern data
and pattern data by importing the pattern data using the position data

Data are imported as they are Regarding the pattern data as Regarding the position data (first
without correction. correct, the position data is pattern) as correct, the pattern data
corrected and then imported. is corrected and then imported.
Other position data (other than the
first pattern) is also corrected
following the pattern data and then
imported.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-115

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.6 Importing PCB in the Recipe

5.6.2 Importing CM/DT production data

CM/DT production data is imported.

1 Choose [Import]  [Recipe] on the

menu bar.

 The <Import PCBs> window opens.

Project050602S-01E03

2 Click .

 The <Open> window opens.

2

Project050602S-05E04

3 Choose the desired CM/DT

production data.

 If a file does not appear, change the ‘Files of

type’ to ‘All Files’.
3

4 Click [Open].

Project050602S-06E00 4

Page 5-116 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.6 Importing PCB in the Recipe

5 Make sure if the data of the source file

has been checked on PT 200 and click
[OK].

 If the source file is not normal, the data cannot

be imported properly. Please make sure to
check the data on PT 200.
Project050602S-07E00
5
 During converting the CM/DT production data,
if matters that need to be confirmed arise, a
dialog on the left appears.
To confirm later, click [CSV Export] to output the
data to a CSV file. Then click [OK] to continue
importing the data.

Project050602S-09E00

6 Click [Import].

 To select the PCB to be imported, mark the

desired checkbox on the PCB Name. All
checkboxes are marked as default.

 To overwrite onto the existing PCB data,

check off ‘Overwrite existing PCB(s).’
Project050602S-08E04
 Choose the processing when there is a
6 discrepancy between the pattern data and
position data.
( 5.6.1 Importing the NPM Recipe Data)

 When the PCB is rotated 180 degree when

imported, mark the checkbox of ‘Rotate Panel
by180°’.
In such a case, the following window opens in
import.

Project050602S-05E01

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-117

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.6 Importing PCB in the Recipe

7 Click [OK].

 If the check is marked on ‘New’ in the PCB list,

it indicates that the PCB is newly created.

 If you want to import the part data as well, the

part list is displayed. If the checkbox of ‘New’
in the part list is in the marked state, it
indicates that the PCB is newly created.
Project050601S-05E02

 PCB import setting item

Item Explanation
Filename Displays the selecting file path.
Checkbox Select the PCB to be imported. All checkboxes are marked as
default.
PCB List – Import Source
‘Source PCB Name’ Displays a name of an import source PCB.
‘Source Revision’ Displays a revision version of an import source PCB.
‘Source Side’ Displays a side of an import source PCB either [Top] or
[Bottom].
PCB List – Import Target
‘Target PCB Name’ Set a name of import target PCB.
‘Target Revision’ Set a revision version of an import target PCB.
‘Target Side’ Set a side of an import target PCB either [Top] or [Bottom].
‘Part Library’
‘As it is’ Specifies the destination to store the component data to be
‘Change To’ placed on the PCB. To select ‘Change To’ pull down list
displays to select the library.
‘Overwrite existing PCB(s)’ Specifies whether to overwrite the data when PCB data have
been registered.
‘In case there is inconsistency’
‘Import both Position Data Specifies the import method when there is a discrepancy
and Pattern Data’ between the pattern data and coordinate data.
‘Import Pattern Data and For explanation of each item, see below.
recreate Position Data’ ( ‘5.6.1 ■Processing for the case when there is a
‘Recreate Pattern Data from discrepancy between the pattern data and position data’ )
Position Data’
‘Part Data in PCB(s)’
‘Import Parts in PCB(s)’ Specifies whether to import component data used by the PCB.
‘When same part already exists’
‘Overwrite CM/DT data’ If the same part name has existed in the library, only the
CM/DT data is overwritten and saved.
‘Overwrite all parts data’ If the same part name has existed in the library, all parts data is
overwritten and saved in part information in the CM/DT
production data.
 For NPM machine-specific information items which do not
exist in the CM/DT production data, the values for the items
are converted into the fixed values and entered. For the set
values to be converted, see ‘6.4.4 Conversion Data
List’.
‘Do not overwrite’ If the same part name has existed in the library, the part is not
imported.

Page 5-118 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.6 Importing PCB in the Recipe

Item Explanation
‘Part Data in PCB(s)’
‘Use CM Reference’ Same recognition that the reference number set by CM does is
performed.
 The reference number (from 51 to 165) with no extended
data is the target. For the reference number with extended
data, it acts as non-specified case.
‘Remove Unused Nozzles’ Delete the nozzles not used in production from the registered
nozzle in the part data during import.
‘NPM Nozzle Selection’
‘Convert to NPM nozzles’ The nozzles registered in the CM/DT data are converted into
the ones which are suitable for NPM and register them. For
the nozzles to be converted, see ‘6.4.4 Conversion Data
List.
‘Same as CM/DT nozzles’ The nozzles registered in the CM/DT data are registered as
NPM nozzles without conversion.
‘Both CM/DT nozzles and After the nozzles registered in the CM/DT data are registered
NPM nozzles’ as NPM nozzles without conversion, the registered nozzles are
converted into the nozzles suitable for NPM. And they are also
added. For nozzles to be converted, see ‘6.4.4
Conversion Data List.
 When the nozzles are additionally registered, CM/DT
nozzles must be registered before the converted nozzles for
NPM (total of 5 nozzles can be added).
‘Panel Rotation’
‘Rotate PCB 180°’ Mark the checkbox if the PCB data rotates 180 degree and
import as the data created for the line of different flow direction
imports.

 Button
Button Explanation
[･･･] The dialog to select the file is displayed.
[Select all] / [Unselect all] Select/deselect all checkboxes of the PCB to import.
[Import] Begins the import process.
[Cancel] Cancels the import process.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-119

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

5.7 Mark Configuration

You can define and edit PCB marks for PCB recognition and bad marks using Mark Editor.

5.7.1 Mark Editor

PCBs and bad marks targeted for recognition can be defined using Mark Editor.

Project050702S-02E04

Project050701S-01E06

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Mark Image’ Displays the image of the mark.
‘Kind’ Specifies the mark type. This will be a PCB mark, bad mark, or
barcode.

Page 5-120 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Auto (Ref 125)’ Sets a lamp auto-control option. When this option is selected,
the lamps 1–4 become inactive.
‘Manual (Ref 126)’ Sets a lamp manual-control option. When this option is
selected, the lamps 1–4 become active.
‘Block Match Recognition’ Sets block match recognition. Configuring this option enables
to input lamp 1, lamp 2, lamp 3, lamp 4.
‘Lamp 1’ Sets a manual-control option for the lamp 1. (1 ~ 255)
‘Lamp 2’ Sets a manual-control option for the lamp 2. (1 ~ 255)
‘Lamp 3’ Sets a manual-control option for the lamp 3. (1 ~ 255)
‘Lamp 4’ Sets a manual-control option for the lamp 4. (1 ~ 255)
‘Select Color’ Sets a color of PCB marks. Choose black or white using a
radio button. The color of a mark is darker with black and
lighter with white as compared with the area surrounding the
mark.
The auto detection is available only when the barcode is
selected.
‘Threshold’ Sets the threshold to be used to judge bad marks. Normally
teaching is performed by the machine.
( For details, see the machine operating instruction.)
 Cannot be edited with board recognition mark

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-121

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

Item Explanation
‘Judge’ Sets the judgment standard to be used to judge bad marks.
Normally teaching is performed by the machine.
( For details, see the machine operating instruction.)
 Cannot be edited with board recognition mark
‘Search Area’ Specifies the area in which the recognition system searches
for a mark.
Upper right ( , )

Lower left ( , )
Enter the lower-left and the upper-right coordinates
considering a mark position to be in the center.
The default values of the search area are (2.5, 2.5) though
(2.5, 2.5). To maximize the search area, set (3.75, 3.75)
through (3.75, 3.75).
‘Select Shape’ Specifies the mark shape. Selecting this also enlarges the
mark size (for better visual check).
 Use Ball Grid UL, Ball Grid LL, Ball Grid LR, and Ball Grid
UR as recognition marks for PoP.
 This option is unavailable for bad marks.
 Corners on the top left, bottom left, top right and bottom right
can be used even if a part of a square mark is hidden with
clamp.
‘Select Barcode Type’ Specifies the barcode shape.
Choose one from Data Matrix, QR Code, and Auto-Detect.
‘Size(mm)’ Specifies the size of the shape on the a, b, c, and d sides.
(Input range: 0.00 to 5.00)

 Button
Button Explanation
[OK] Saves the edited contents onto the database and closes the
editor.
[Cancel] Does not save the edited contents and closes the editor.
[Apply] Saves the edited contents onto the database with the editor
open.

Page 5-122 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

5.7.2 Adding Template Marks

 Mark data details

1
2
2
2

3
2

Project050702S-01E04

No. Name Explanation

 Menu bar Shows each menu.
 Toolbar Shows icons for each operation.
 Mark data display area Displays the mark data.

 Mark setting item

Item Explanation
‘Mark Type’ Displays mark types (Fiducial Mark / Bad Mark).
‘Shape’ Displays the shape of marks.
‘Name’ Displays the mark name.
‘Creation Date’ Displays the date when marks are created.
‘Modification Date’ Displays the date when marks are modified.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-123

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

 Menu
Menu bar Toolbar Right-click menu Explanation
[File]

[New] [New] Creates a new mark.

[Open] [Open] Opens the selected mark.

[Edit]
[Delete] [Delete] Deletes the selected mark.
[Rename]  [Rename] Renames the selected mark.

[Copy] [Copy] Copies the selected mark.

[Paste] [Paste] Pastes the copied mark.

[View]
[Refresh]  Refreshes the displayed mark list.

Page 5-124 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

 Creating template marks

1 Choose [Mark] in the navigation area

on the upper left of the screen.

1
Project050702S-09E01

2 Click (creating new data) on the

toolbar, or choose [File]  [Create
New] on the menu bar.
Project050702S-10E03  The <New Fiducial Mark> window opens.
2

3 Type a mark name.

 The following characters cannot be used.

“ (double quotes), full-width
3
4 Choose ‘Fiducial Mark’ as the mark
4 type.

Project050702S-12E00 5
5 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor - a> window opens.

For details about each field, see ‘5.7.1
Mark Editor.’

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-125

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

6 Choose the mark shape in ‘Select

Shape.’

7 Type the size of the shape in ‘Size.’

8
9 8 Choose the PCB mark recognition
mode in ‘Lamp Control.’

 When the manual mode is selected, type the

lamp value. Normally the lamp value is taught
10 and determined by the machine.
( For details, see the machine operating
instruction.)
6
9 Choose the mark color in ‘Select
Color.’

 When the color of a mark is darker than its

vicinity, select the black color. When lighter,
select the white color.
7
10 Set the mark recognition range in
‘Search Area.’
Project050701S-01E06 11
11 Click [Apply] or [OK].

 The new PCB recognition mark is displayed in

a mark list.

Page 5-126 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

 Creating bad marks

1 Choose [Mark] in the navigation area

on the upper left of the screen.

1
Project050702S-14E01

2 Click (creating new data) on the

toolbar, or choose [File]  [Create
New] on the menu bar.
Project050702S-15E02  The <New Fiducial Mark> window opens.
2

3 Type a mark name.

 The following characters cannot be used.

“ (double quotes), full-width
3
4 Choose ‘Bad Mark’ as the mark type.
4

Project050702S-17E00 5 5 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor - Bad Mark> window opens.

For details about each field: ‘5.7.1 Mark
Editor’

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-127

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

6 Select the recognition mode of a bad

6 mark on ‘Lamp Control’.

8 7 Type the lamp values.

7  In the case of bad marks, the recognition

mode is manual only. Normally the lamp value
is taught and determined by the machine.
( For details, see the machine operating
9 instruction.)

8 Choose the mark color in ‘Select

Color.’

 When the color of a mark is darker than its

vicinity, select the black color. When lighter,
select the white color.

9 Set the mark recognition range in

‘Search Area.’

Project050702S-18E06 10
10 Click [Apply] or [OK].

 The new bad mark is displayed in a mark list.

Page 5-128 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

 Creating barcodes

1 Choose [Mark] in the navigation area

on the upper left of the screen.

1
Project050702S-19E01

2 Click (New) on the toolbar, or

choose [File]  [New] on the menu
bar.
Project050702S-20E02  The <New Fiducial Mark> window opens.
2

3 Type a mark name.

 The following characters cannot be used.

“ (double quotes)
3
4 Choose ‘Barcode’ for the type.
4

Project050702S-22E00 5 5 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor - Barcode> window opens.

Details of each field: ‘5.7.1 Mark Editor’

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-129

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

6 Choose the type in ‘Select Barcode

Type.’

8
9 7 Type the size of the type in ‘Size.’

8 Choose the barcode recognition mode

in ‘Lamp Control.’

 When Manual is selected, type the lamp value.

Normally, the machine determines the lamp
value by teaching.
6 ( For details, see the machine operating
instruction.)
Project050702S-02E04
7
10 9 Choose the mark color in ‘Select
Color.’

10 Click [Apply] or [OK].

 The <Mark Editor - Barcode> window closes.

 The new barcode is displayed in a mark list.

Page 5-130 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

5.7.3 Editing Marks

The registered marks and barcodes can be edited.

1 Choose the desired mark or barcode

from the PCB list.

2
2 Choose (Open) on the toolbar,
1 choose [File]  [Open] on the menu
bar, or choose [Open] on the
right-click menu.

 The <Mark Editor - Fiducial Mark> window

opens.

Project050703S-01E05

3 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited, and click [Apply].

4 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor - Fiducial Mark> window

closes.

Project050701S-01E06
4 3

Project050702S-02E04

4 3

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-131

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

5.7.4 Copying Marks

The registered marks and barcodes can be copied.
Edit in this section means to edit template data.

 To edit mark data which has been once created and output to PCB data, use [Edit Instance].
Changes are not reflected even if PCB data is reloaded after editing template data on the window
below.

1 Choose the desired mark or barcode

from the PCB list.

2
2 Choose (Copy) on the toolbar,
1
choose [Edit]  [Copy] on the menu
bar, or choose [Copy] on the right-click
menu.

Project050704S-01E05

3 Choose (Paste) on the toolbar,

choose [Edit]  [Paste] on the menu
3 bar, or choose [Paste] on the
right-click menu.

Project050704S-03E05

Page 5-132 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

5.7.5 Deleting Marks

The registered marks and barcodes can be deleted.

1 Choose the desired mark or barcode

from the PCB list.

2
2 Choose (Delete) on the toolbar,
1
choose [Edit]  [Delete] on the menu
bar, or choose [Delete] on the
right-click menu.

 The confirmation dialog opens.

Project050705S-01E05

3 Click [Yes].

 The confirmation dialog closes.

 The selected mark or barcode is deleted.

Project050705S-03E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-133

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.7 Mark Configuration

5.7.6 Renaming the Mark Name

The registered marks or barcodes can be renamed.

1 Choose the desired mark or barcode

from the PCB list.

2 Choose [Edit]  [Rename] on the

1 menu bar or [Rename] on the
right-click menu.
2
 The <Rename Mark> window opens.

Project050706S-01E05

3 Type a new name.

 The following characters cannot be used.

“ (double quotes), full-width

3
4 Click [OK].

 The selected mark or barcode is renamed.

Project050706S-02E00
4

Page 5-134 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8 Editing PCBs

This section describes how to create, edit, and delete PCBs in detail.

1 Choose a desired holder in the

navigation area on the upper left of the
screen.

2 Click (creating new data) on the

toolbar, or choose [File]  [Create
New] on the menu bar.
Project050800S-01E03
 The <New Product/PCB> window opens.

3 Enter the PCB name and the revised

version.

 The following characters cannot be used.

% , ” ’ space \ : ; / . < > ? * | double-byte
character
2
Project050800S-02E00

4 Input the length, width, and thickness

of the PCB.

 ‘Length’ is a direction of board transportation

flow.

 Up to the set value of ‘Max. Lot Name Length’

3 in General Settings can be entered for the
PCB name.
( ‘3.2.3 DGS Setting ■Recipe Settings’)

 Regarding PCB width, you may be able to

input a little bit larger value than the maximum
size of the machine PCB specifications. It
4 means that the maximum width can be input
on the machine mechanism because we give
you extra space for variation of your PCB size.
However, regarding a PCB exceeding the
maximum size of PCB specifications, we do
Project050800S-04E00
5 not guarantee.

5 Click [OK].

 The <Product Editor> window opens.

For details about the PCB editor: ‘5.8.1
PCB Information’ onward

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-135

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Editing existing PCBs

1 Choose the desired PCB from the

PCB list. Then, click (Open) on
the toolbar, choose [File]  [Open] on
the menu bar, or choose [Open] on the
1 right-click menu.

Project050800S-05E03

 The PCB editor opens.

Project050800S-07E00

Page 5-136 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Deleting existing PCBs

1 Choose the desired PCB from the

PCB list. Then, click (Delete) on
the toolbar, choose [Edit]  [Delete]
on the menu bar, or choose [Delete]
1 on the right-click menu.

 The confirmation dialog opens.

Project050800S-08E03

2 Click [Yes].

 The PCB is deleted.

Project050800S-10E00
2

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-137

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Copying existing PCBs

1 Choose the desired PCB from the

PCB list. Then, click (Copy) on
the toolbar, choose [Edit]  [Copy] on
the menu bar, or choose [Copy] on the
right-click menu.
1

Project050800S-11E03

2 Choose the PCB from the PCB list.

Then, click (Paste) on the
toolbar, choose [Edit]  [Paste] on the
menu bar, or choose [Paste] on the
right-click menu.

 The <Paste Products> window opens.

2

Project050800S-13E03

3 Click ‘New Product Name’ and ‘New

Revision’ on the <Paste Products>
window to enter them.

 The following characters cannot be used.

% , ” ’ space \ : ; / . < > ? * | double-byte
3 character

 Up to the set value of ‘Max. Lot Name Length’

in General Settings can be entered for the
PCB name.
( ‘3.2.3 DGS Setting ■Recipe Settings’)

Project050800S-15E00
4 4 Click [OK].

 The PCB is copied.

Page 5-138 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Renaming the existing PCB name

1 Choose the desired PCB from the

PCB list. Then, choose [Edit] 
[Rename] on the menu bar or
[Rename] on the right-click menu.

 The <Rename Product> window opens.

1

Project050800S-16E04

2 Type a PCB name.

 The following characters cannot be used.

% , ” ’ space \ : ; / . < > ? * | double-byte
character

2  Up to the set value of ‘Max. Lot Name Length’

in General Settings can be entered for the
PCB name.
( ‘3.2.3 DGS Setting ■Recipe Settings’)
Project050800S-17E00
3

3 Click [OK].

 The PCB is renamed.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-139

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Verified flags

1 Choose the desired PCB from the

PCB list. Then, choose [Edit] 
[Proved] on the menu bar or [Proved]
on the right-click menu.

 The confirmation dialog opens.

Project050800S-18E03

2 Click [Yes].

Project050800S-19E00
2

 The corresponding ‘Proved’ checkbox is

marked.

 To remove a flag, repeat steps 1 and 2.

Project050800S-20E00

Page 5-140 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Updating PCB data

1 Choose [View]  [Refresh] on the

menu bar, or click (Refresh) on
1 the toolbar.

 The display of the registered PCBs in the PCB

list is updated.

Project050800S-21E04

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-141

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 PCB editor

1
2
2
2

3
2

Project050800S-23E00

No. Name Explanation

 Menu bar Shows each menu.
 Toolbar Shows icons for each operation.
 PCB image display area Displays the PCB image.

Page 5-142 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Menu
Right-click menu
On PCB
On placement
Menu bar Toolbar On On PCB On master bad warpage Explanation
point On PCBs
Components marks marks measurement
recognition
points
[File]
[Save]       Saves the PCB data.

[Print]       Prints out the PCB image.

Displays the PCB image print preview
[Print Preview]       
in the new window.
Changes the setup of the printer that
[Printer Setup]       
prints out the PCB image.
Saves PCBs and gray parts around
[Save [All]       
them.
Product
[Panel Saves only PCBs
Image]       
Only]  Can be used for support pin image.
[CAD/BO Imports the PCB data from the
      
M] CAD/BOM file.
[Gerber Imports the background data from the
[Import]       
Data] gerber data to PCB.
[Backgro
       Imports the background data to PCB.
und Data]
[Backgro
[Export]        Outputs the background data to a file.
und Data]
[Exit]        Exits the PCB editor.
[Edit]
Searches and displays the placement
[Find Step]        step by Parts Name or reference
number.
Selects all marks, placement
[Select All]        components, and measurement
points displayed in the PCB image.
Select All Select All Select All
[Select Pattern Selects all marks and placement
 Pattern   Pattern  Pattern
Steps] points displayed in the PCB image.
Steps Steps Steps
Copies all information of the selected
[Copy]       
components.
Copies and cuts all information of the
[Cut]        selected components from the
currently displayed PCB.
Pastes and moves the copied/cut
[Paste Special]        component information to a new PCB
(PCB file) or other PCBs (PCB files).
Displays the currently displayed CAD
[Advanced Edit]       
data in a text image for editing.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-143

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

Right-click menu
On PCB
On placement
Menu bar Toolbar On On PCB On master bad warpage Explanation
point On PCBs
Components marks marks measurement
recognition
points
[Modify]
Specifies a name of a particular
[Edit
[Edit Product]       production program to edit its
Product]
contents.
Edits/Adds the coordinates of the
following data relating to the current
[Edit Top
[Edit Top product:
Side/Bottom
Side/Bottom Side       • PCBs
Side Panel
Panel Information] • PCB marks
Information]
• Master bad marks
• PCB-warp detection positions
[Edit Model String for
       Set a model string for PanaCIM.
PanaCIM]
[Pattern
       Adds a pattern type.
Type]
[Pattern
       Adds a pattern offset.
Offset(s)]
[Add] [Placement
       Adds a placement point.
Step]
[Pattern Adds an outline of a PCB, such as
      
Outline] dividable PCBs, in line drawings.
[Obstacle]        Adds an obstacle.
[Edit Pattern [Edit Pattern [Edit Pattern [Edit Pattern
    Edits pattern types and pattern marks.
Type] Type] Type] Type]
[Edit Pattern [Edit Pattern [Edit Pattern [Edit Pattern Adds, edits, and deletes a pattern
  
Offset] Offset] Offset] Offset] offset.
[Edit
Placement
Step (All
[Placement Pattern)]/
[Edit] Edits placement points and
Step (All [Edit     
placement point recognition.
Pattern)] Placement
Step
(Selected
Step)]
[Edit [Edit Opens the part editor and edits
     
Component] Component] components.
[Obstacle]        Edits or deletes an obstacle.
[Pattern [Pattern
Edits pattern coordinates for multiple
coordinate  coordinate     
[Multi-E placement points at once.
s] s]
dit]
[Position [Position Edits developed coordinates for
     
Data] Data] multiple placement points .
[Delete
Pattern        Deletes a pattern type.
Type PT1]
[Pattern
       Deletes a pattern offset.
Offset]
[Delete
[Delete [Delete
[All [Delete Placement
Placement Selected   Deletes all selected steps.
[Delete] Step(s)] PCB Mark] point
Step] Step]
recognition]
[Delete extra
[Extra placement Deletes the placement point
     
Step(s)] Point recognition.
Recognition]
[Pattern
       Deletes the added pattern outline.
Outline]

Page 5-144 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

Right-click menu
On PCB
On placement
Menu bar Toolbar On On PCB On master bad warpage Explanation
point On PCBs
Components marks marks measurement
recognition
points
[Manipulate]
Adjusts placement point, mark, PCB
[Adjust XY]        information and background data at
the entered XY coordinate position.
Flips placement point, mark, PCB
information and background data on
[X Axis]       
the X-axis to be horizontally
symmetrical.
[Mirror Flips placement point, mark, PCB
Panel information and background data on
[Y Axis]       
Side the Y-axis to be vertically
Over] symmetrical.
Flips placement point, mark, PCB
[Both X and information and background data on
      
Y Axes] both X- and Y-axes to be horizontally
and vertically symmetrical.
Rotates placement point, mark, PCB
[90]        information and background data 90
degrees counter-clockwise.
[Rotate Rotates placement point, mark, PCB
Panel [180]        information and background data 180
Side] degrees counter-clockwise.
Rotates placement point, mark, PCB
[270]        information and background data 270
degrees counter-clockwise.
Converts dividable PCBs to
undividable PCBs. If 'Designator
duplicate check' is set in General
[Convert Top
Settings, 'Convert Top Side/Bottom
Side/Bottom Side To       
Side To One Up' cannot be used for
One Up]
duplicate avoidance of the designator
with other placement points'
designator
Used to import the NC data output
from the coupled machines and link
[Select [Specify [Specify [Specify [Specify [Specify
them to the CAD data. Choose this
Nudge  Nudge Nudge Nudge Nudge Nudge 
function after an item targeted for fine
Landmark] Position] Position] Position] Position] Position]
adjustment is specified on the PCB
editor.
[Nudge]
[Specify
[Specify [Specify [Specify [Specify [Specify
Nudge Specifies the coordinate targeted for
 Nudge Nudge Nudge Nudge Nudge 
Measureme fine adjustment.
Measurement] Measurement] Measurement] Measurement] Measurement]
nt]
[Nudge [Nudge [Nudge [Nudge [Nudge [Nudge Corrects the specified position after
 
Selection] Selection] Selection Selection Selection Selection the alignment amount is set.
[Recognition]
Adds, edits, and deletes a PCB
[Fiducial]        recognition mark and pattern
recognition mark.
Adds, edits, and deletes a PCB bad
[Bad Mark]       
mark and pattern bad mark.
Adds, edits, and deletes a PCB
[Barcode]       
barcode and pattern barcode.
Adds, edits and deletes PCB warpage
[Warpage]       
and pattern warpage.
[Product Adds, edits, and deletes a product
      
Identification mark ] identification mark.
[Tool]
[Component
       Checks for component interference.
Collusion Check]
[Gerber Editor]        Starts up the gerber converter.
[Import Board
       Starts up the PCB image import.
Image]
[Support Pin Editor]        Sets the support pin.
[CAD Rotation]        Displays the CAD Rotation window.
[Replace Parts by Displays the Replace parts by BOM
      
BOM] window.
[Led Scattering]        Displays the LED scattering window.
 For details of the support pin, see the following chapter.
( ‘13.2.5 Support Pin Setting to the PCB Data’ )
EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-145
 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs
 For details of the PCB image import, see the following chapter.
( ‘5.8.16 Importing PCB Image’ )
 For details of designator duplicate check, see the following.
( '3.2.3 DGS Setting')

Right-click menu
On PCB
On placement
Menu bar Toolbar On On PCB On master bad warpage Explanation
point On PCBs
Components marks marks measurement
recognition
points
[View]
Used to choose the side of a PCB to
[Top Side]/[Bottom
      which setting/operation will be
Side]
performed.
Loads the background data such as
[Bad / Trace]        bad / trace to be set to PCB, and
displays the data to a PCB image.
Used to update the component data
of the PCB which is modified by other
[Refresh Part Data]       
users or networks on the master
component database (part editor).
[Designator] Specifies whether to display the
     
reference number or not.
[References]
[Part Specifies whether to display the Parts
     
Name] Name or not.
[Highlight Expanded Specifies whether to highlight the
      
Placements] expanded placements or not.
[Reserved
       Displays reserved placement points.
Placements]
[Part
       Displays the image of parts.
Image]
[Part [Simple
       Displays the outer frame of parts.
Image] Outline]
[True
       Displays the detailed view of parts.
Outline]
Highlights the first pin position of a
[First Pin]        part using an orange marker and
displays it.
Specifies whether to display the
[Dispense Position]       
dispense position or not.
Specifies whether to display/hide the
CAD origin (programming reference
point). If a pattern is displayed in a
[Origin]       
smaller size because the position of
the origin is far, hiding the origin
enlarges the PCB display size.
Specifies whether to display/hide the
status bar that shows the Parts Name
and reference number as well as the
[Status Bar]        coordinates of the selected
component. When a component is not
selected, the clicked coordinate is
displayed.
Specifies whether to display/hide the
toolbar. This provides useful shortcut
menus and, therefore, is
[Tool Bar]        recommended to be displayed;
however, the toolbar takes up the
display space where otherwise the
PCB is displayed in a large size.
Displays scale bars on the left and at
[Rulers]       
the top of the window.
Displays the whole-PCB window. This
[Thumbnail]        clearly shows the PCB range in an
enlarged view.
Switches layers when a file is in a
[Layers]       
hierarchy structure.
Displays unregistered components in
[Undefined Part List]       
a list.
[Order Of Placement Displays the window for the
      
Priority] placement priority.

Page 5-146 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

Right-click menu
On PCB
On placement
Menu bar Toolbar On On PCB On master bad warpage Explanation
point On PCBs
Components marks marks measurement
recognition
points
[PCB data] Displays a warning dialog if there is
       PCB data on neither the front nor back
sides of PCB.
[PCB Displays a warning dialog for the
[Warnin
outline        marks and parts located outside of the
g
coordinate] PCB outline.
display
[Mark Displays a warning dialog if there is no
upon
template]        mark template used for a PCB is not
save]
on the DGS.
[CAD Displays a warning dialog if there is a
rotation        part that CAD Rotation has been [Not
state] Verified] yet in PCB.
Zooms in/out around the specified
       position when magnifying/reducing
the PCB image.
       Magnifies the PCB image.

       Reduces the PCB image.

Zooms in around the specified
      
placement point.
Adjusts the zoom so that the whole
       PCB is displayed on the current-size
window.
Switches the pattern type to be
displayed in the PCB image when
      
there are two or more pattern types on
one PCB.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-147

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Right-click menu (Not displayed on the menu bar)

Right-click menu
On PCB
On placement
Menu bar Toolbar On On PCB On master bad warpage Explanation
point On PCBs
Components marks marks measurement
recognition
points
Hide/
Display Displays/Hides the selected
      
Designator component on/from the PCB image.

Rotate all
Changes the placement angle of the
  placemen     
selected component.
t point
[Skip
Dispense
Skips dispensing on placement
  for     
points.
Placement
]
[Skip Part
Inspection
Skips component inspection on
  for     
placement points.
Placement
]
[Skip
Production
Skips solder inspection on placement
  for     
points
Placement
]
[Edit
[Edit Placement
[Edit PCB
   Master Point   Opens the edit window for each mark.
Mark]
Bad Mark] Recognitio
n]
PCB
warpage
Starts up the PCB warpage
      measurem 
measurement point edit screen.
ent point
edit 
PCB
warpage
Deletes PCB warpage measurement
      measurem 
points.
ent point
deletion
[Edit
Specify the length overhang from a
  overhang     
board edge for a selected placement.
amount]
[Specify [Specify [Specify [Specify [Specify
Sets to the positioning reference
  Nudge Nudge Nudge Nudge Nudge 
point.
Position] Position] Position] Position] Position]
Adds a placement point/PCB
warpage/pattern warpage on the
       Add right-clicked coordinates. After added,
the edit window for the selected item
is open.
Copy from
Copies the selected component data
existing
       to the selected undefined
component
component.


Page 5-148 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.1 PCB Information

You can edit properties of a PCB on the PCB information screen.

 Saving product image

The PCB editor image is saved as an image file.

1 Set resolution of the saved image by

zooming in / out of the PCB image.

 If you zoom in the PCB image before saving

1 the image, you can save it as high resolution.
To zoom out the image, you can save it as low
resolution.

2
Project050801S-19E01
2 Select a desired image from [File] 
[Save Product Image] on the menu
bar.
When [All] is selected:
PCBs and gray parts around them are saved

Project050801S-21E00

When [Panel Only] is selected:

Only PCBs are saved.
You can use then for support pin image. (
‘13.2 Support Pin Arrangement Data Creation
Function’ )

Project050801S-22E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-149

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

3 Choose a drive to save to.

4 Enter a file name.

3
5 Choose a save as type.

 Saving format type: .bmp, .jpg, .gif, .png

6 Click [Save].
4
Project050801S-20E00 5
6

Page 5-150 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Importing CAD / BOM to PCB image

1 Choose [File]  [Import] 

[CAD/BOM] on the menu bar

 The <CAD / Garber / Background Data

Import> window opens.

Project050801S-17E02 1

2
2 Choose the CAD Macro to use.

 CAD macro should be created in advance.

( ‘5.2 Defining CAD Macro’ )

3
3 Choose the CAD file to use.

4 Click [OK].
Project050801S-18E01
4  Import starts with specified file and macro.

 For CAD macro operation, see ‘5.2.1

CAD Macro Editor’.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-151

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Importing gerber data to PCB image

1 Choose [File]  [Import]  [Gerber

Data] on the menu bar.

 The <CAD / Gaber / Background Data Import>

window opens.

Project050801S-23E00
1

2 Choose a gerber file to be imported

and a setting file (INI file) (optional).

 The INI file is a file described layers to be

skipped in the gerber file. Specifying the INI
file enables to reduce the loading time.
To specify the INI file, you must create the file
in advance before import.

Example of INI file:

2 [Layer]
SkipLayer1=111.art
SkipLayer2=222.art
Project050801S-24E00
3
3 Click [OK].

 If the background data has been already set to

PCB, the background data loading
confirmation dialog appears.
Project050801S-25E00

Project050801S-27E00

 The imported gerber data is displayed as a

PCB background data. If it is displaced from
the placement point, adjust the position.

 For adjusting the position, see below.

‘5.8.2 PCB Edit  ■XY adjustment, ■
PCB inversion and ■PCB rotation’
Project050801S-26E00

Page 5-152 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Importing background data to PCB image

You can import the background data to the PCB layer. This is used when a gerber image is
confirmed on the PCB data which is opened from the PPD / LWS mode.

1 Choose [File]  [Import] 

[Background Data] on the menu bar.

 The <CAD / Gaber / Background Data Import>

window opens.

Project050801S-28E00

2 Choose a desired background file to

import.

3 Click [OK].

 If the background data has been already set to

PCB, the background data loading
confirmation dialog appears.

2
Project050801S-29E00
3

Project050801S-27E00

 The imported background data is displayed as

Project050801S-30E00
PCB layer. If it is displaced from the placement
position, adjust the position.

 For adjusting the position, see below.

‘5.8.2 PCB Edit  ■XY adjustment, ■
PCB inversion and ■PCB rotation’

 If it is started up from the PPD editor (including

the LWS mode), the background data cannot
be saved to PCB. Import the background file
each time you start up.

Project050801S-31E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-153

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Exporting background data

You can export the background data. It is mainly used to confirm the gerber data on the PPD
editor.

1 Choose [View]  [Load Pads /

Traces] on the menu bar.

 The background data set to PCB is loaded.

Project050801S-32E00

2 Choose [File]  [Export] 

[Background Data] on the menu bar.

 The <Save As> window opens.

Project050801S-33E00
2

3 Choose a directory to save the

background data.
3
4 Type a background data name.

5 Click [Save].

 The <Save As> window closes and the file is

4 saved.
Project050801S-34E00

Project050801S-35E00

Page 5-154 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Editing the PCB property

1 Choose [Modify]  [Edit Top Side

Panel Information] on the menu bar,
choose [Edit Top Side Panel
Information] on the right-click menu, or
double-click the PCB.
1  The <Edit Top Side Panel Information>
window opens.

Project050801S-01E02

2 Edit the tab.

<PCB data copy> window: ‘5.8.1 PCB
Information’  ‘ [Panel] tab’

 Regarding PCB width, you may be able to

input a little bit larger value than the maximum
size of the machine PCB specifications. It
means that the maximum width can be input
on the machine mechanism because we give
you extra space for variation of your PCB size.
However, regarding a PCB exceeding the
maximum size of PCB specifications, we do
Project050801S-02E01 not guarantee.
3

3 Click [OK].

 The changed contents will be reflected on the

PCB image.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-155

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Editing the model String for PanaCIM

1 Click [Modify][Edit Model String for

PanaCIM] on the menu bar.

 The <Model String for PanaCIM> window

opens.

Project050801S-36E00

2 2 Type model strings of a side you want

to set.

 Use the following letters for model strings.

・Uppercase alphabet, ‘-‘, ‘_’

 It complies with the PanaCIM rule.

3 Click [Update].
Project050801S-37E00 3
 Model strings for PanaCIM is configured.

Page 5-156 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Magnifying the PCB image

1 Use the mouse wheel while holding

down the [Ctrl] key on the PCB editor,
or click (zoom in) on the toolbar.
1
 The PCB image is magnified.

Project050801S-03E00

 Reducing the PCB image

1 Use the mouse wheel while holding

down the [Ctrl] key on the PCB editor,
or click (zoom out) on the toolbar.
1
 The PCB image is reduced.

Project050801S-05E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-157

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Specifying the PCB-image zoom in/out point

1 Click (Zoom in/out point) on the

toolbar of the PCB editor.
1

Project050801S-07E00

2 Click either (Magnify) or

(Reduce) on the toolbar of the PCB
2 editor.

3 Click the center point of the PCB

image on the PCB editor.
3
 The PCB image is magnified/reduced around
the clicked point.

Project050801S-07E00

Page 5-158 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Zooming in the selected item

1 Choose an item to be magnified on

the PCB image of the PCB editor.
2
2 Click (Zoom in item) on the toolbar
of the PCB editor.
1  The PCB image is magnified around the
selected item.

Project050801S-11E00

 Zooming in the PCB

1 Click (Zoom in PCB) on the

toolbar of the PCB editor.
1  The PCB image is magnified according to the
window size.

Project050801S-13E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-159

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① [Panel] tab
Set the PCB dimensions on this tab.

Project050801S-15E02

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Top’ Y-direction coordinate of the PCB upper end
‘Bottom’ Y-direction coordinate of the PCB lower end
‘Left’ X-direction coordinate of the PCB left end
‘Right’ X-direction coordinate of the PCB right end
‘Thickness’ PCB thickness
‘Use Carrier’ Check the box when using a carrier.
Carrier is a thing you may use when transporting a PCB(s) that
you could have difficulty in transporting. By putting such PCB
on the carrier, you can transport the PCB. For details, see ‘■
Setting method to use carrier’ to be described later.

(Upper right)

 The CAD origin is optional. Enter the PCB

edge coordinates from the CAD origin.

CAD origin

(Lower left)

 Button
Button Explanation
[Add Panel Data] Enables the PCB field and allows you to input values.
 This is displayed when there are no PCB data.
[Remove Panel Data] Disables the PCB field and deletes the existing values.
 This is displayed when there are PCB data.
[Copy Panel Data] Copies and pastes the PCB’s current data on its reverse side.
You can choose whether to invert the coordinates.

 The surface and reverse-side data can be stored in one PCB data. The board dimensions are not
different between the surface and reverse sides. They can be copied and used.

Page 5-160 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Clicking [Copy Panel Data] opens the following window.

Specify whether to invert the coordinates when copying, and click [OK].

Project050801S-16E00

Item Explanation
‘No Mirroring’ Maintains the same coordinate without inverting.
‘Mirror over X axis’ Inverts the coordinate around the X-axis.
‘Mirror over Y axis’ Inverts the coordinate around the Y-axis.
‘Mirror over both axes’ Inverts the coordinate around the X- and Y-axes (mirror
flip-over).

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-161

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Setting procedure to use carrier

Before using the carrier, set [Thickness] and [height] as follows.

Example 1) When the mounting position is 0.15mm higher than the setting position
Mounting position FPC
0.15mm

Setting position
Carrier (2mm thick)

Project050801S-17E00

Example 2) When the mounting position is 0.15mm lower than the setting position
FPC flexible circuit
Setting position 0.15mm

Mounting position
Carrier

Project050801S-18E00

No. Name Explanation

1 Thickness Enter the thickness of the carrier.
2 ex.1) Enter the height from the setting position to the
mounting position.
3 Height ex.2) Enter the height from the setting position to the
mounting position; provided, however, that the value
should be negative.

Page 5-162 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.2 PCB Edit

Information relating to PCB edit can be set on the <Product Editor> window.

 Surface/Reverse-side image selection

1 Click (Top Side/Bottom

Side) on the toolbar of the PCB editor
or [View]  [Bottom Side] on the
1
2 menu bar.

2 Choose the reverse side.

Project050802S-01E00

 The PCB reverse side image is displayed.

Project050802S-02E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-163

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Pattern type selection

1 Click (pattern type

selection) on the toolbar of the PCB
1 editor.
2

2 Choose the pattern type.

Project050802S-03E00

 The selected pattern type image is displayed.

Project050802S-04E00

Page 5-164 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 XY adjustment

1 Choose [Manipulate]  [XY Panel

Offset].
1  If the background data exists in PCB, the
<Manipulate Confirmation> window opens.

Project050802S-140E00

2 Choose the desired data to offset.

3 Click [OK].

Project050802S-141E00 2
3

4 Type an offset amount.

5 Click [OK].
4

Project050802S-142E00
5

 Coordinates of only the selected data move as

many amount as you entered.

Project050802S-143E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-165

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 PCB inversion

1 Click [Manipulate]  [Mirror Panel

Side Over] on the menu bar, and
choose the desired axis.
1
Inversion axis: ‘5.8 Editing PCBs’  ‘
PCB editor’

 If the background data exists in PCB, the

<Manipulate Confirmation> window opens.

Project050802S-05E02

2 Choose the desired data to invert.

3 Click [OK].

Project050802S-141E00 2
3

 The PCB image is displayed with it inverted

around the specified axis.

Project050802S-06E00

Page 5-166 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 PCB rotation

1 Click [Manipulate]  [Rotate Panel

Side] on the menu bar, and choose
the desired angle.
1
Rotation direction: ‘5.8 Editing PCBs’  ‘
PCB editor’

 If the background data exists in PCB, the

<Manipulate Confirmation> window opens.

Project050802S-07E02

2 Choose the desired data to rotate.

3 Click [OK].

Project050802S-141E00 2
3

 The PCB image is displayed with it rotated at

the specified angle.

Project050802S-08E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-167

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Undividable PCB conversion

1 Choose [Manipulate]  [Convert Top

Side to One Up] on the menu bar.

1  If 'Designator duplicate check' is set in General

Settings, 'Convert Top Side/Bottom Side To
One Up' cannot be used for duplicate
avoidance of the designator with other
placement points' designator.
'3.2.3 DGS Setting'

Project050802S-09E00

 The PCB image is displayed with it converted

from the dividable PCB to undividable PCB.

Project050802S-10E00

Page 5-168 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Positioning
① Reference position selection

1 Choose [Manipulate]  [Nudge] 

[Select Nudge Landmark] on the
menu bar.

 The <Select Nudge Landmark> window

opens.

Project050802S-11E02
1

2 Specify the reference point for

positioning.

 If ‘Selected Step’ is used for a reference

position, choose a placement point or a mark
on the PCB and choose [Manipulate] 
[Nudge]  [Select Nudge Landmark].
2

Project050802S-12E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-169

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② Setting the alignment amount

1 Choose the desired step on the PCB

image of the PCB editor.

2 Choose [Manipulate]  [Nudge] 

2 [Specify Nudge Measurement] on the
menu bar.
1
 The <Specify Nudge Measurement> window
opens.

Project050802S-13E02

3 Set the fine-adjustment values (X and

Y) from the specified reference point.

4 Click [OK].

Project050802S-14E00 4

③ Positioning
1 Choose the desired step.

2 Choose [Manipulate]  [Nudge] 

[Nudge Selection By] on the menu
2 bar.

Project050802S-15E02

Page 5-170 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Reset Inconsistency
① Update Pattern Data from Position Data

1 Choose [Manipulate]  [Reset

Inconsistency] [Update Pattern
Data from Position Data] on the menu
bar.

 The <Reset Inconsistency – Update Pattern

Data> screen appears.
Product050802S-121E01
1

2 Specify the offset used for pattern

data configuration.

 To reflect to other patterns, mark the checkbox

of ‘Update Position Data for other offsets from
updated Pattern Data.’
2
3 Click [OK].

Product050802S-122E01

② Update Position Data from Pattern Data

1 Choose [Manipulate]  [Reset

Inconsistency] [Update Position
Data from Pattern Data] on the menu
bar.

 The confirmation message of the position data

re-update appears.
Product050802S-123E01

2 Specify whether to re-update the

position data from the pattern data.
Product050802S-124E00  The teach result of the taught placement point
is reset.
2

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-171

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 PCB recognition mark

Project050802S-16E02

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Define Fiducial’ Checks PCB recognition marks.
‘Number of Marks’ Sets the number of PCB recognition marks.
‘Panel Coordinates’
‘X’ Sets X coordinates of PCB recognition marks.
‘Y’ Sets Y coordinates of PCB recognition marks.
‘Template’ Template mark used for this pattern mark. Template marks
created in ‘5.7 Mark Configuration’ can be selected. Template
marks available for view are shown on the drop-down list.

 Button
Button Explanation
‘Number of Marks’
[1] Sets a recognition mark with one recognition point.
[2] Sets a recognition mark with two recognition points.
[3] Sets a recognition mark with three recognition points.
[4] Sets a recognition mark with four recognition points.
‘Panel Coordinates’
[New Template] Displays the template mark creation window.
[Edit Instance] Displays the edit window of the selected PCB recognition
mark.

Page 5-172 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① Adding new PCB recognition marks

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Fiducial] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Fiducial> window opens.

Project050802S-17E02

2
2 Choose the [Panel Fiducial] tab.

3
3 Check off ‘Define Fiducial.’
4
4 Choose the number of marks.

5 To register a new mark, click [New

5 Template].
Project050802S-18E00
 The <New Fiducial Mark> window opens.

 When using a mark that has been registered,

skip step 5 and go to step 8.

6 Type a mark name in ‘Name,’ and

click [OK].

Project050802S-19E00
6

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-173

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

7 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited, and click [Apply].

8 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor> window closes.

Project050701S-01E06 8 7

9 Set marks for the number set in step

4.

10 Click [Apply].

9 11 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Fiducial> window closes.

 The PCB recognition marks are displayed on

Project050802S-21E00
the PCB editor.
11 10

Page 5-174 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② Editing PCB recognition marks

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Fiducial] on

the menu bar, or double-click the PCB
recognition mark.

 The <Recognition - Fiducial> window opens.

1

Project050802S-22E02

2
3 2 Choose the [Panel Fiducial] tab.

3 Choose the number of marks if you

want to change it.

4 4 Choose the desired PCB recognition

mark.

5
Project050802S-23E00 5 To edit the mark, click [Edit Instance].

 The <Mark Editor> window opens.

 When not wishing to change the mark, skip

step 5 and go to step 8.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-175

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

6 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited, and click [Apply].

 If there is any mark arranged on the same

PCB surface and created from the same
template, the following confirmation dialog
appears.

Project050802S-144E00

[Yes] : Reflects the change to other marks

as well.
[No] : Reflects the changes only to the
edit mark.

7 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor> window closes.

Project050701S-01E06 7 6

8 Click [Apply].

9 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Fiducial> window closes.

 The change made on the PCB recognition

mark is displayed on the PCB editor.

Project050802S-25E00

9 8

Page 5-176 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

③ Selecting and deleting PCB recognition marks

1 Choose a mark you want to delete,

and click [Delete Panel fiducial] in the
right-click menu.

Project050802S-130E00

2 The confirmation dialog box appears.

Click [Yes].

Project050802S-131E00
2

 The selected recognition mark will be deleted,

which causes the number of marks to
decrease by one.

3 To reflect the change in PCB, click

[OK] or [Apply].

Project050802S-132E00

3 3

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-177

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

④ Selecting and deleting PCB recognition marks on the PCB editor

1 Choose a PCB mark on the PCB

editor that you want to delete, and
click [Delete Panel fiducial] in the
right-click menu.

Project050802S-133E00

2 The confirmation dialog box appears.

Click [Yes].

Project050802S-131E00
2

 The selected PCB recognition mark will be

deleted from the PCB editor.

Project050802S-134E00

Page 5-178 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

⑤ Deleting PCB recognition marks

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Fiducial] on

the menu bar, or double-click the PCB
recognition mark.

 The <Recognition - Fiducial> window opens.

1

Project050802S-26E02

2
2 Choose the [Panel Fiducial] tab.

3
3 Uncheck ‘Define Fiducial.’

4 Click [Apply].

5 Click [OK].

Project050802S-27E00
 The <Recognition - Fiducial> window closes.
5 4  The PCB recognition marks are deleted from
the PCB editor.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-179

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Pattern recognition mark

Project050802S-28E02

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Expanded Coordinates’
‘Offset’ Displays the X and Y coordinate offsets of the pattern
recognition mark.
‘ABCD’ Shows which point (points A–D) the pattern recognition mark
belongs to.

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Pattern Type’ Specifies the pattern type to which setting is made.
‘Define Fiducial’ Checks pattern recognition marks.
‘Number of Marks’ Sets the number of pattern recognition marks.
‘Pattern Coordinates’
‘X’ Sets the X coordinate of the pattern recognition mark
reference.
‘Y’ Sets the Y coordinate of the pattern recognition mark
reference.
‘Template’ Template mark used for this pattern mark. Template marks
created in ‘5.7 Mark Configuration’ can be selected. Template
marks available for view are shown on the drop-down list.
‘Expanded Coordinates’
‘X’ Sets the position shifted for the X coordinate offset from the X
coordinate of the pattern recognition mark reference.
‘Y’ Sets the position shifted for the Y coordinate offset from the Y
coordinate of the pattern recognition mark reference.
‘Override’ Shows whether a user has changed the X and Y coordinates of
the pattern recognition mark.

Page 5-180 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Button
Button Explanation
‘Number of Marks’
[1] Sets a pattern recognition mark with one recognition point.
[2] Sets a pattern recognition mark with two recognition points.
[3] Sets a pattern recognition mark with three recognition points.
[4] Sets a pattern recognition mark with four recognition points.
‘Pattern Coordinates’
[New Template] Displays the template mark creation window.
‘Expanded Coordinates’
[Edit Instance] Displays the edit window of the selected pattern recognition
mark.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-181

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① Adding new pattern recognition marks

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Fiducial] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Fiducial> window opens.

Project050802S-29E02

2 Choose the [Pattern Fiducial] tab.

 Double-clicking the pattern recognition mark

2 displays the [Pattern Fiducial] tab
automatically.

3 Choose the pattern type to add a

pattern recognition mark.

Project050802S-30E00
4 Check off ‘Define Fiducial.’

5 Choose the number of marks.

4  Only when components are separately-placed
on a PCB, 4 marks can be set to the number of
marks.
3 When components are not separately-placed
on a PCB, set 3 or less to the number of
marks.
5

6 To register a new mark, click [New

Template].
Project050802S-31E00
6  The <New Fiducial Mark> window opens.

 When using a mark that has been registered,

skip step 6 and go to step 9.

7 Type a mark name in ‘Name,’ and

click [OK].

Project050802S-32E00
7

Page 5-182 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

8 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited, and click [Apply].

9 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor> window closes.

Project050701S-01E06 9 8
10 Set marks for the number set in step
5.

11 If necessary, change the X and Y

positions according to each pattern
recognition mark.

 When XY coordinates are performed teaching

by the machine and they are changed from the
default value to be set with the pattern
coordinate, the checkbox of ‘Override’ is
11 marked. Use to determine whether the XY
coordinates of the pattern mark position is
changed from the default setting or not.
10
Project050802S-34E00  For ‘Override’ marked, the position can be
specified without affecting the pattern offset
13 12 setting.

12 Click [Apply].

13 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Fiducial> window closes.

 The pattern recognition marks are displayed

on the PCB editor.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-183

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② Editing pattern recognition marks

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Fiducial] on

the menu bar, or double-click the
pattern recognition mark.

 The <Recognition - Fiducial> window opens.

1

Project050802S-35E02

2 Choose the [Pattern Fiducial] tab.

 Double-clicking the pattern recognition mark

2 displays the [Pattern Fiducial] tab
automatically.

Project050802S-36E00

3 3 Choose the pattern type to edit the

pattern recognition mark.

4 Choose the number of marks if you

want to change it.
4
6
5 To change the pattern recognition
5 mark reference, choose the desired
7 pattern recognition mark reference
Project050802S-37E00 and change the setting.

6 Choose the desired pattern

recognition mark.

7 To edit the mark, click [Edit Instance].

 The <Mark Editor> window opens.

 When not wishing to change the mark, skip

step 7 and go to step 10.

Page 5-184 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

8 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited, and click [Apply].

 If there is any pattern offset which uses the

mark from the same template, the following
confirmation dialog appears.

Project050701S-01E06 8

9 Click either [Yes] or [No].

[Yes] : Reflects the changes to other
marks as well.
[No] : Reflects the changes only to the
Project050802S-145E00
edit mark

9  In addition, if any mark arranged on the same

PCB surface and created from the same
template exists, the confirmation dialog
appears when [Yes] is selected in step 9.

10 Click [Yes] or [No].

[Yes] : Reflects the changes to other
marks as well.
Project050802S-144E00 [No] : Reflects the changes only to the
10 edit mark

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-185

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

11 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor> window closes.

Project050701S-01E06 11

12 Click [Apply].

13 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Fiducial> window closes.

 The change made on the pattern recognition

mark is displayed on the PCB editor.

Project050802S-39E00

13 12

Page 5-186 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

③ Selecting and deleting pattern marks

1 Choose a pattern mark you want to

delete, and click [Delete Pattern
fiducial] in the right-click menu.

1
Project050802S-135E00

2 The confirmation dialog box appears.

Click [Yes].

Project050802S-136E00
2

 The selected pattern mark will be deleted,

which causes the number of marks to
decrease by one.

 To reflect the change in PCB, click [OK] or

[Apply].

Project050802S-137E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-187

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

④ Selecting and deleting pattern marks on the PCB editor

1 Choose a pattern mark you want to

delete on the PCB editor, and click
[Delete Pattern fiducial] in the
right-click menu.

Project050802S-138E00

2 The confirmation dialog box appears.

Click [Yes].

Project050802S-136E00
2

 The selected pattern mark will be deleted from

the PCB editor.

PProject050802S-139E00

Page 5-188 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

⑤ Deleting pattern recognition marks

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Fiducial] on

the menu bar, or double-click the
pattern recognition mark.

 The <Recognition - Fiducial> window opens.

1

Project050802S-40E02

2 Choose the [Pattern Fiducial] tab.

 Double-clicking the pattern recognition mark

2 displays the [Pattern Fiducial] tab
automatically.

Project050802S-41E00

3 Choose the pattern type to delete a

pattern recognition mark.

3
4 4 Uncheck ‘Define Fiducial.’

5 Click [Apply].

6 Click [OK].
Project050802S-42E00

6 5  The <Recognition - Fiducial> window closes.

 The pattern recognition mark is deleted from

the PCB editor.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-189

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Master bad marks

Project050802S-43E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Define Bad Mark’ Checks master bad marks.
‘X’ Sets X coordinates of master bad marks.
‘Y’ Sets Y coordinates of master bad marks.
‘Comment’ Enters comments on master bad marks.
‘Template’ Template mark used for this pattern mark. Template marks created
in ‘5.7 Mark Configuration’ can be selected. Template marks
available for view are shown on the drop-down list.

 Button
Button Explanation
[New Template] Displays the template mark creation window.
[Edit Instance] Displays the edit window of the selected representative bad mark.

Page 5-190 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① Adding new master bad marks

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Bad Mark]

on the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Bad Mark> window opens.

Project050802S-44E02

2
2 Choose the [Master Bad Mark] tab.

3 3 Check off ‘Define Bad Mark.’

4
4 To register a new mark, click [New
Template].

 The <New Fiducial Mark> window opens.

 When using a mark that has been registered,

Project050802S-45E00
skip step 4 and go to step 7.

5 Type a mark name in ‘Name,’ and

click [OK].

Project050802S-46E00
5

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-191

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

6 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited, and click [Apply].

7 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor> window closes.

Project050702S-18E06 7 6

8 Set the master bad mark.

9 Click [Apply].
8
10 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Bad Mark> window closes.

 The master bad marks are displayed on the

PCB editor.
Project050802S-48E00

10 9

Page 5-192 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② Editing master bad marks

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Bad Mark]

on the menu bar, or double-click the
master bad mark.

 The <Recognition - Bad Mark> window opens.

Project050802S-49E02

2 Choose the [Master Bad Mark] tab.

2 3 To edit the mark, click [Edit Instance].

3  The <Mark Editor> window opens.

 When not wishing to change the mark, skip

step 3 and go to step 6.

Project050802S-50E00

4 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited, and click [Apply].

5 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor> window closes.

Project050702S-18E06 5 4

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-193

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

6 Click [Apply].

7 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Bad Mark> window closes.

 The change made on the master bad mark is

displayed on the PCB editor.

Project050802S-52E00

7 6

Page 5-194 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

③ Deleting master bad marks

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Bad Mark]

on the menu bar, or double-click the
master bad mark.

 The <Recognition - Bad Mark> window opens.

Project050802S-53E02

2
2 Choose the [Master Bad Mark] tab.

3 3 Uncheck ‘Define Bad Mark.’

4 Click [Apply].

5 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Bad Mark> window closes.

Project050802S-54E00

5 4  The master bad marks are deleted from the

PCB editor.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-195

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Pattern bad mark

Project050802S-55E00

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Expanded Coordinates’
‘Offset’ Displays the X and Y coordinate offsets of the pattern bad
mark.

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Pattern Type’ Specifies the pattern type to which setting is made.
‘Define Bad Mark’ Checks pattern bad marks.
‘Pattern Coordinate’
‘X’ Sets the X coordinate of the pattern bad mark reference.
‘Y’ Sets the Y coordinate of the pattern bad mark reference.
‘Template’ Template mark used for this pattern mark. Template marks
created in ‘5.7 Mark Configuration’ can be selected. Template
marks available for view are shown on the drop-down list.
‘Expanded Coordinates’
‘X’ Sets the position shifted for the X coordinate offset from the X
coordinate of the pattern bad mark reference.
‘Y’ Sets the position shifted for the Y coordinate offset from the Y
coordinate of the pattern bad mark reference.
‘Override’ Shows whether a user has changed the X and Y coordinates of
the pattern bad mark.

 Button
Button Explanation
‘Pattern Coordinate’
[New Template] Displays the template mark creation window.
‘Expanded Coordinates’
[Edit Instance] Displays the edit window of the selected pattern bad mark.

Page 5-196 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① Adding new pattern bad marks

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Bad Mark]

on the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Bad Mark> window opens.

Project050802S-56E02

2 Choose the [Pattern Bad Mark] tab.

 Double-clicking the pattern bad mark displays

2 the [Pattern Bad Mark] tab automatically.

Project050802S-57E00

3 Choose the pattern type to add a

pattern bad mark.

3 4 Check off ‘Define Bad Mark.’

4

5 To register a new mark, click [New

5 Template].

 The <New Fiducial Mark> window opens.

Project050802S-58E00  When using a mark that has been registered,

skip step 5 and go to step 8.

6 Type a mark name in ‘Name,’ and

click [OK].

Project050802S-59E00
6

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-197

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

7 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited, and click [Apply].

8 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor> window closes.

Project050702S-18E06 8 7
9 Set the pattern bad mark reference.

10 If necessary, change the X and Y

positions according to each pattern
bad mark.

 When XY coordinates are performed teaching

by the machine and they are changed from the
default value to be set with the pattern
9 coordinate, the checkbox of ‘Override’ is
marked. Use to determine whether the XY
10 coordinates of the pattern defect mark position
is changed from the default setting or not.

Project050802S-61E00  ‘For ‘Override’ marked, the position can be

12 11 specified without affecting the pattern offset
setting.

11 Click [Apply].

12 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Bad Mark> window closes.

 The pattern bad marks are displayed on the

PCB editor.

Page 5-198 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② Editing pattern bad marks

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Bad Mark]

on the menu bar, or double-click the
pattern bad mark.

 The <Recognition - Bad Mark> window opens.

Project050802S-62E02

2 Choose the [Pattern Bad Mark] tab.

 Double-clicking the pattern bad mark displays

2 the [Pattern Bad Mark] tab automatically.

Project050802S-63E00

3 3 Choose the pattern type to edit the

pattern bad mark.

4 Change the setting of the pattern bad

mark reference if you want to change
it.
4 5

5 Choose the desired pattern bad mark.

6
Project050802S-64E00
6 To edit the mark, click [Edit Instance].

 The <Mark Editor> window opens.

 When not wishing to change the mark, skip

step 6 and go to step 9.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-199

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

7 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited, and click [Apply].

 If there is another pattern offset which

arranges on the same PCB surface and uses
the mark from the same template, the
following confirmation dialog appears.

Project050802S-145E00

[Yes] : Reflects the changes to other

marks as well.
[No] : Reflects the changes only to the
edit mark

8 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor> window closes.

Project050702S-18E06 8 7

9 Click [Apply].

10 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Bad Mark> window closes.

 The change made on the pattern bad mark is

displayed on the PCB editor.

Project050802S-66E00

10 9

Page 5-200 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

③ Deleting pattern bad marks

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Bad Mark]

on the menu bar, or double-click the
representative bad mark.

 The <Recognition - Bad Mark> window opens.

Project050802S-67E02

2 Choose the [Pattern Bad Mark] tab.

 Double-clicking the pattern bad mark displays

2 the [Pattern Bad Mark] tab automatically.

Project050802S-68E00

3 Choose the pattern type to delete a

pattern bad mark.

3 4 Uncheck ‘Define Bad Mark.’

4

5 Click [Apply].

6 Click [OK].
Project050802S-69E00  The <Recognition - Bad Mark> window closes.
6 5
 The pattern bad mark is deleted from the PCB
editor.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-201

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 PCB barcodes

Project050802S-70E01

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Define Barcode’ Checks PCB barcodes.
‘X’ Sets X coordinates of PCB barcodes.
‘Y’ Sets Y coordinates of PCB barcodes.
‘Comment’ Enters comments on PCB barcodes.
‘Template’ Template mark used for this pattern mark. Template marks created
in ‘5.7 Mark Configuration’ can be selected. Template marks
available for view are shown on the drop-down list.

 Button
Button Explanation
[New Template] Displays the template mark creation window.
[Edit Instance] Displays the edit window of the selected PCB barcode.

Page 5-202 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① Adding new PCB barcodes

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Barcode] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Barcode> window opens.

1
Project050802S-71E02

2
2 Choose the [Panel Barcode] tab.

3
3 Check off ‘Define Barcode.’

4
4 To register a new mark, click [New
Template].

 The <New Fiducial Mark> window opens.

 When using a mark that has been registered,

skip step 4 and go to step 7.
Project050802S-72E00

5 Type a mark name in ‘Name,’ and

click [OK].

Project050802S-73E00
5

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-203

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

6 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited, and click [Apply].

7 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor> window closes.

Project050702S-02E04
7 6

8 Set the PCB barcode.

9 Click [Apply].
8
10 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Barcode> window closes.

 The PCB barcodes are displayed on the PCB

editor.

Project050802S-75E00

10 9

Page 5-204 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② Editing PCB barcodes

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Barcode] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Barcode> window opens.

1
Project050802S-76E02

2 Choose the [Panel Barcode] tab.

2
3 To edit the mark, click [Edit Instance].

 The <Mark Editor> window opens.

3
 When not wishing to change the mark, skip
step 3 and go to step 6.

Project050802S-77E00

4 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited, and click [Apply].

5 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor> window closes.

Project050702S-02E04
5 4

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-205

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

6 Click [Apply].

7 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Barcode> window closes.

 The change made on the PCB barcode is

displayed on the PCB editor.

Project050802S-79E00

7 6

Page 5-206 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

③ Deleting PCB barcodes

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Barcode] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Barcode> window opens.

1
Project050802S-80E02

2
2 Choose the [Panel Barcode] tab.

3 3 Uncheck ‘Define Barcode.’

4 Click [Apply].

5 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Barcode> window closes.

Project050802S-81E00
 The PCB barcodes are deleted from the PCB
5 4 editor.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-207

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 PCB warpage measurement points

Project050802S-117E00

 Item to be set
Item Explanation
‘X’ X-coordinate of PCB warpage measurement point
‘Y’ Y-coordinate of PCB warpage measurement point
‘Enable’ Select whether you actually use the set warpage measurement
point or not.
Select either one.
‘Yes’: Use warpage measurement point.
‘No’: Not use warpage measurement point.

 Button
Item Explanation
[Default] Sets the default warpage point for PCB.
[Disable All] Sets all warpage measurement points to ‘disable’
[Enable All] Sets all warpage measurement points to ‘enable’

Page 5-208 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① New creation of PCB warpage measurement points

You can add or edit PCB warpage measurement points on the <Recognition - Warps> window.
You can also add them from the right-click menu on PCB.

 Adding PCB warpage measurement points (menu bar)

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Warps] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Warps> window opens.

1
Project050802S-118E00

2 Choose [Panel Warp] tab.

2
3 Mark the checkbox of ‘Define Warps’.
3

4 Change ‘No’ in the Enable field to

‘Yes’. Or click [Enable All] button.
4
Project050802S-119E00

5 If you set batch warpage

measurement point as default, click
[Default] button.

 The <Warp Settings> screen opens.

Project050802S-120E00

6 Set the point arrangement for PCB,

and click [OK].

 Enter the area not applying PCB warpage

measurement with percentage of the PCB
6 length.

 The warapage measurement point displays on

Project050802S-121E00
the <Recognition-Warps> window.
6

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-209

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

7 Click [Apply].

8 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Warps> window closes.

 The warpage measurement point is shown on

the PCB editor.

Project050802S-122E00

8 7

Project050802S-126E00

 Adding PCB warpage measurement points (right-click menu)

 To add PCB warpage measurement points on

the right-clicked position on PCB, click [Add]
→ [Panel Warpage Detection Point-○ to
define] in the right-click menu.

 Settable PCB warpage measurement points

(number) is shown in ○.

Project050802S-152E00
 While the right-clicked coordinates are
selected, launch the [Panel Warp] tab on the
<Recognition - Warps> window.

Page 5-210 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② Editing PCB warpage measurement points

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Warps] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Warps> window opens.

1
Project050802S-118E00

2 Choose [Panel Warp] tab.

2 3 Choose and edit the desired PCB

warpage mark.

3  Changing ‘No/Yes’ in the Enable field can

pass the setting of the warpage measurement
point.

Project050802S-122E00

5 4
4 Click [Apply].

5 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Warps> window closes.

 The changes of the PCB warpage mark are

reflected to the PCB editor.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-211

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

③ Deleting PCB warpage measurement points

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Warps] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Warps> window opens.

1
Project050802S-118E00

2 Choose [Panel Warp] tab.

2
3 Unmark the checkbox of ‘Define
3 Warps’.

4 Click [Apply].

Project050802S-122E00
5 Click [OK].
5 4
 The <Recognition - Warps> window closes.

 The PCB recognition mark is deleted from the

PCB editor.

Page 5-212 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Pattern warpage measurement points

Project050802S-123E00

 Items to be displayed
Item Explanation
‘Expanded Coordinates’
‘Offset’ Displays the X and Y coordinate offsets of the pattern warpage
measurement point.

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Pattern type’ Specifies the pattern type to which setting is made.
‘Define warpage’ Checks when using pattern warpage.
‘Pattern Coordinates’
‘X’ Sets X coordinates of pattern warpage measurement point.
‘Y’ Sets Y coordinates of pattern warpage measurement point.
‘Enable’ Select whether you actually use the set warpage measurement
point or not. Select either one.
‘Yes’: Use warpage measurement point.
‘No’: Not use warpage measurement point.
‘Expanded Coordinates’
‘X’ Sets the position shifted for the X coordinate offset from the X
coordinate of the pattern warpage measurement point
reference.
‘Y’ Sets the position shifted for the Y coordinate offset from the Y
coordinate of the pattern warpage measurement point
reference.
‘Enable’ Select whether you actually use the set warpage measurement
point or not. Select either one.
‘Yes’: Use warpage measurement point.
‘No’: Not use warpage measurement point.
‘Override’ Shows whether a user has changed the X and Y coordinates of
the pattern warpage measurement point reference.
 When XY coordinates are performed teaching by the machine
and they are changed from the default value to be set with the
pattern coordinate, the checkbox of ‘Override’ is marked.
Use to determine whether the coordinates are changed from
default value.
 With ‘Override’ is marked, the position can be specified
regardless of the pattern offset settings.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-213

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Button
Button Explanation
[Disable All] Sets all warpage measurement points to ‘disable’
[Enable All] Sets all warpage measurement points to ‘enable’

Page 5-214 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① New creation of pattern warpage measurement points

You can add or edit pattern warpage measurement points on the <Recognition - Warps> window.
You can also add them from the right-click menu on PCB.

 Adding Pattern warpage measurement points (menu bar)

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Warps] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Warps> window opens.

1
Project050802S-118E00

2 Choose [Pattern Warps] tab.

Project050802S-117E00

3 Choose the desired pattern type for

additional pattern warpage.

3
4 4 Mark the checkbox of ‘Define Warps’.

Project050802S-123E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-215

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5 Change ‘No’ in the Enable field to

‘Yes’. Or click [Enable All] button.

6 Type XY coordinates.

7 If the warpage measurement point is

required for each pattern, change the
X and Y positions.
6 5 7  When XY coordinates are performed teaching
by the machine and they are changed from the
default value to be set with the pattern
coordinate, the checkbox of ‘Override’ is
Project050802S-124E00 5 marked.
Use to determine whether the coordinates are
changed from default value.

 ‘With ‘Override’ is marked, the position can be

specified regardless of the pattern offset
settings.

8 Click [Apply].

9 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Warps> window closes.

 The changes of the PCB warpage mark are

Project050802S-124E00 reflected to PCB editor.
9 8

 Adding Pattern warpage measurement points (right-click menu)

 To add pattern warpage measurement points

on the right-clicked position on PCB, click
[Add] → [Pattern Warpage Detection Point-○
to define].

 Settable PCB warpage measurement points

(number) is shown in ○.
Project050802S-154E00

 While the right-clicked coordinates are

selected, launch the [Pattern Warp] tab on the
<Recognition - Warps> window.

Page 5-216 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② Editing PCB warpage measurement points

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Warps] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Warps> window opens.

1
Project050802S-118E00

2 Choose [Pattern Warps].

 Double-clicking the pattern warpage

2 measurement point on the PCB editor
automatically displays the [Pattern Warps] tab.

Project050802S-117E00
3 Choose the desired pattern type for
editing pattern warpage.

4 If you change the pattern warpage

measurement point reference, select
to change the desired measurement
3
point reference.

4 5
5 Choose and edit the desired pattern
warpage measurement point.
Project050802S-125E00
 Changing ‘No/Yes’ in the Enable field can
7 6 pass the setting of the warpage measurement
point.

6 Click [Apply].

7 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Warps> window closes.

 The changes of the PCB warpage mark are

reflected to the PCB editor.

Project050802S-127E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-217

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

③ Deleting pattern warpage measurement points

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Warps] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Warps> window opens.

1
Project050802S-118E00

2 Choose [Pattern Warps].

 Double-clicking the pattern warpage

2 measurement point on the PCB editor
automatically displays the [Pattern Warps] tab.

Project050802S-117E00

3 Choose the desired pattern type for

deleting pattern warpage.

3
4 4 Unmark the checkbox of ‘Define
Warps’.

5 Click [Apply].
Project050802S-125E00

6 5 6 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Warps> window closes.

 The PCB recognition mark is deleted from the

PCB editor.

Page 5-218 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Pattern barcodes

Project050802S-82J02

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Expanded Coordinates’
‘Offset’ Displays the X and Y coordinate offsets of the pattern barcode.

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Pattern Type’ Specifies the pattern type to which setting is made.
‘Define Barcode’ Checks pattern barcodes.
‘Pattern Coordinate’
‘X’ Sets X coordinates of pattern barcodes.
‘Y’ Sets Y coordinates of pattern barcodes.
‘Template’ Template mark used for this pattern mark. Template marks
created in ‘5.7 Mark Configuration’ can be selected.
Template marks available for view are shown on the
drop-down list.
‘Expanded Coordinates’
‘X’ Sets the position shifted for the X coordinate offset from the X
coordinate of the pattern barcode reference.
‘Y’ Sets the position shifted for the Y coordinate offset from the Y
coordinate of the pattern barcode reference.
‘Override’ Shows whether a user has changed the X and Y coordinates of
the pattern barcode.

 Button
Button Explanation
‘Pattern Coordinate’
[New Template] Displays the template mark creation window.
‘Expanded Coordinates’
[Edit Instance] Displays the edit windows of the selected pattern barcodes.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-219

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① Adding new pattern barcodes

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Barcode] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Barcode> window opens.

1
Project050802S-83E02

2 Choose the [Pattern Barcode] tab.

Project050802S-84E00

3 Choose the pattern type to add a

pattern barcode.

3 4 Check off ‘Define barcode.’

4

5 To register a new mark, click [New

5 Template].

 The <New Fiducial Mark> window opens.

 When using a mark that has been registered,

Project050802S-85E00
skip step 5 and go to step 8.

6 Type a mark name in ‘Name,’ and

click [OK].

Project050802S-86E00
6

Page 5-220 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

7 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited, and click [Apply].

8 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor> window closes.

Project050702S-02E04
8 7

9 Set the pattern barcode reference.

10 If necessary, change the X and Y

positions according to each pattern
barcode.
9  When XY coordinates are performed teaching
by the machine and they are changed from the
default value to be set with the pattern
10 coordinate, the checkbox of ‘Override’ is
marked. Use to determine whether the XY
coordinates of the pattern barcode mark
Project050802S-88E00 position is changed from the default setting or
12 11 not.

 ‘With ‘Override’ marked, the position can be

specified without affecting the pattern offset
setting.

11 Click [Apply].

12 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Barcode> window closes.

 The pattern barcodes are displayed on the

PCB editor.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-221

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② Editing pattern barcodes

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Barcode] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Barcode> window opens.

1
Project050802S-89E02

2 Choose the [Pattern Barcode] tab.

Project050802S-90E00

3 Choose the desired pattern type.

3
4 Change the setting of the pattern
barcode reference if you want to
change it.
4 5
5 Change the setting of the pattern
barcode if you want to change it.
6
Project050802S-91E00 6 To edit the mark, click [Edit Instance].

 The <Mark Editor> window opens.

 When not wishing to change the mark, skip

step 6 and go to step 9.

Page 5-222 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

7 Make the setting appropriate for the

parts to be edited, and click [Apply].

 If there is another pattern offset which

arranges on the same PCB surface and uses
the mark from the same template, the
following confirmation dialog appears.

Project050802S-145E00

[Yes] : Reflects the changes to other

marks as well.
Project050702S-02E04 [No] : Reflects the changes only to the
8 7 edit mark

8 Click [OK].

 The <Mark Editor> window closes.

9 Click [Apply].

10 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition - Barcode> window closes.

 The change made on the pattern barcode is

displayed on the PCB editor.

Project050802S-93E00

10 9

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-223

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

③ Deleting pattern barcodes

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Barcode] on

the menu bar.

 The <Recognition - Barcode> window opens.

1
Project050802S-94E02

2 Choose the [Pattern Barcode] tab.

Project050802S-95E00

3 Choose the pattern type to delete a

pattern barcode.

3 4 Uncheck ‘Define barcode.’

4

5 Click [Apply].

6 Click [OK].

Project050802S-96E00
 The <Recognition - Barcode> window closes.
6 5  The pattern barcodes are deleted from the
PCB editor.

Page 5-224 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Product Identification Mark

A product identification mark is set when two types of products are changed over automatically in
the judgment of mark existence. To change over automatically products with the use of this mark,
a paired PCB must be set. The mark color is decided when the paired PCB is set.

Product050802S-116E01

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘X’ X-coordinate of product identification mark
‘Y’ Y-coordinate of product identification mark
‘Description’ Enter comments on product identification mark
‘Template’ Template used for a model identification mark. Bad mark
template can be selected for the model identification mark.
For the setting of a mark, see the following page.
‘5.7 Mark Configuration’

 Button
Button Explanation
[Edit Instance ] Displays the edit windows of product identification marks

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-225

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① Adding new product identification marks

1 Choose [Recognition]  [Product

Identification Mark] on the menu bar

 The <Recognition – Product Identification

Mark> window opens.

Product050802S-117E00
1

4
2 Check off ‘Use Product Identification
2 Mark’.

3 Enter X and Y coordinates of Product

Identification Mark.

 The mark must be set at the same coordinates

3 5 as a paired PCB.

Product050802S-118E01 4 Select a template from the drop-down

list.

 Only bad mark can be selected for model

identification mark templates.

5 Click [Edit Instance].

 The <Mark editor> window opens.

・Template selected:
Opens according to bad mark setting of the
selected template.
6 ・Template not selected:
Opens the identification mark setting in a new
data.
Because identification mark does not have
template, if you want to add an identification
mark, you must configure the setting.

6 Make the settings appropriate for the

places where you want to edit.

7 Click [OK].

Product050802S-119E02
7  The <Mark Editor> window closes.

Page 5-226 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

8 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition – Product Identification

Mark> window closes.

 The product identification mark is displayed on

the PCB editor.

Product050802S-120E01

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-227

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Component data refresh

1 Choose [View]  [Refresh Part Data]

on the menu bar.

 The component data of the PCB image is

refreshed.

Project050802S-97E02

Page 5-228 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Displaying Pads / Traces

1 Choose [View]  [Load Pads /

Traces] on the menu bar.

 Selection of pads / traces is available only

when the gerber data or the background data
are set.
1 For the setting of the gerber data / background
data, 5.8.1 PCB Information ■ Importing
gerber data to PCB image
5.8.1 PCB Information■ Importing background
data to PCB image

Project050801S-32E00

Project050802S-140E00

 Once loading is ended, the background data is

displayed on the PCB image.

The background data can be switched between

‘Show’ and ‘Hide’ as a layer. For layer,
5.8.2 PCB Edit ■ Layer display

Project050802S-141E00

Project050802S-142E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-229

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Reference display

1 Click [View]  [References], and

choose the Desinator or Parts Name
to add to the component image.

Project050802S-98E04

 The selected Desinator/PartsName is

displayed in the component image.

Project050802S-99E02

Page 5-230 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Parts drawing
Parts drawings can be viewed using Part image, Simple outline and True outline.

1 Choose [View] in the menu bar 

[Parts Drawing], and place a check
mark next to any of [Part Image],
[Simple Outline] and [True Outline].
1
 A check mark is placed next to [Part Image] of
[Parts Drawing] on the PCB editor screen on
initial startup.

 Parts are viewed in a way selected by you.

Project050802S-101E03

 View parts using [Simple Outline]

Project050802S-128E00

 View parts using [True Outline]

Project050802S-129E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-231

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Displaying the first pin position

The first pin position of the placement points is displayed. The first pin is determined by the
polarity mark position and lead type, etc. For details, see ‘5.9.4 List for Determination of the
First Pin’.

1 Choose [View]  [First Pin] on the

menu bar.

 The first pin set to the placement points is

displayed in an orange circle.

Project050802S-150E00

2 From the displayed first pin position,

confirm placement point coordinates
and angle.

 The first pin pad is displayed as the layer.

( ‘5.8.2 PCB Edit ■Layer display’)

Project050802S-151E00

Page 5-232 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Dispensing position

1 Choose [View]  [Dispense Position]

on the menu bar.

Project050802S-102E02

 The dispense positions are displayed.

 For the part that the dispense option has

already set, the dispense points are shown as
follows.
Red: Before placement
Blue: After placement

Project050802S-103E02

Project050802S-118E02

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-233

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Origin display

1 Choose [View]  [Origin] on the menu

bar.

Project050802S-100E02

 The origin, X-axis, and Y-axis of the PCB are

displayed.

Project050802S-101E02

Page 5-234 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Status bar display

1 Choose [View]  [Status Bar] on the

menu bar.

Project050802S-102E02

 The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the

<Product Editor> window.

Project050802S-103E02

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-235

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Toolbar display

1 Choose [View]  [Tool Bar] on the

menu bar.

Project050802S-104E02

 The toolbar is displayed on the top of the

<Product Editor> window.

Project050802S-105E02

Page 5-236 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Ruler display

1 Choose [View]  [Rulers] on the

menu bar.

Project050802S-106E02

 The rules are displayed in the PCB image

display area of the <Product Editor> window.

Project050802S-107E02

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-237

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Thumbnail display

1 Choose [View]  [Thumbnail] on the

menu bar.

Project050802S-108E02

 The thumbnail window opens.

Project050802S-109E02

Page 5-238 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Layer display

1 Choose [View]  [Layers] on the

menu bar.

Project050802S-110E02

 The layer window opens.

 You can confirm the placement position and

angular displacement using the layer. For how
to confirm PCB using the layer, see below.
‘5.9.3 Confirming Bonding Position and
Angle using Layer’.

Project050802S-111E02

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-239

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Undefined component list

1 Choose [View]  [Undefined Part

List] on the menu bar.

 The <Undefined Parts List> window opens.

Project050802S-112E02

2 Click [Export List].

 The <Save As> window opens.

 A name specified as ‘<Unknown Part>’ may

appear in the field of ‘Part’. This name appears
because only placement point information is
imported when a placement point that has a
part with an unknown name exists during the
CAD import.

Project050802S-113E02

3 Choose the destination.

4 Type a filename in ‘Fine name.’

5 Click [Save].

3  The <Save As> window closes, and the file is

saved.

Project050802S-114E01 4 5

Page 5-240 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 PCB file information edit

1 Choose [Modify]  [Edit Product] on

the menu bar or [Edit Product] on the
right-click menu displayed when the
mouse cursor is on the PCB.
1  The <Product Information> window opens.

Project050802S-115E00

2 Type a value in ‘Barcode.’

3 Type a comment in ‘Description.’

4

4 Click [OK].
2

Project050802S-116E02
3

 Setting item of the PCB file information

Item Explanation
‘Barcode’ Sets the barcode information that identifies PCBs.
‘Description’ Enter a comment.
The entered comment is displayed in ‘Detail’ on the PCB list.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-241

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.3 Adding Placement Points

You can add and edit placement points on the <Placement Properties> window.
You can also add them from the right-click menu on PCB.

 Adding placement points (menu bar)

1 Choose [Modify]  [Add...] 

[Placement Step] on the menu bar.

 The <Placement Properties> window opens.

Project050803S-01E02 1

2 Set information about the placement

point.

3 Click [OK].

Project050803S-05E05

 Adding placement points (right-click menu)

 To add placement points on the right-clicked

position on PCB, click [Add] → [Placement
Step] on the right-click menu.
While the right-clicked coordinates are
selected, launch the <Edit Placement Points>
window.

Project050803S-06E00

Page 5-242 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① [Placement] tab
Set the placement point information on this tab.

Project050803S-05E05

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-243

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Part/Designator’
‘Part Library’ Part library to which the component to be placed belongs
‘Part’ Name of the component to be placed
‘Designator’ Reference number (circuit number) used for placement point reference.
If 'Designator duplicate check' is enabled, duplicate check of the designator with
other placement points' designator is carried out during setting
‘3.2.3 DGS Setting’
‘Description’ Memo for a placement point (Optional).
(It is not displayed if the PCB editor is opened from the PPD editor or LWS mode)
‘Pattern Data’
‘X’ Placement point X-coordinate of the pattern origin reference
(Rightward: Positive)
‘Y’ Placement point Y-coordinate of the pattern origin reference
(Upward: Positive)
‘Rotation’ Placement angle of the pattern origin reference
(Counterclockwise: Positive)
‘Z’ Height of a placement point. Sets when the height is required.
(Input range: -1 to 0)
‘Glue Rotation’ Angle of dispensing. (Input range: 0 to 360)
(If dispense option is not defined in the part of the placement point, it does not
shown)
Skip Number Skip number from 0 to 9 can be set to a part. Selecting skip numbers which
correspond to the machine, you can skip the parts together. If 0 is selected, no
part skip is performed.
(This function is available only on AM100)
‘Position Data’
Upper: Not allowed to change, calculated position data
‘X’ Placement point X-coordinate of the PCB origin reference (Rightward: Positive)
‘Y’ Placement point Y-coordinate of the PCB origin reference (Upward: Positive)
‘Angle’ Placement angle of the PCB origin reference (Counterclockwise: Positive)
‘Z’ Height of a placement point.
‘Glue Rotation’ Angle of dispensing. (Input range: 0 to 360)
(If dispense option is not defined in the part of the placement point, it does not
shown)
Lower: Allowed to change, actual position data
‘X’ Placement point X-coordinate of the PCB origin reference (Rightward: Positive)
‘Y’ Placement point Y-coordinate of the PCB origin reference (Upward: Positive)
‘Angle’ Placement angle of the PCB origin reference (Counterclockwise: Positive)
‘Z’ Height of a placement point. (Input range: -1 to 0)
‘Glue Rotation’ Angle of dispensing. (Input range: 0 to 360)
(If dispense option is not defined in the part of the placement point, it does not
shown)

 Button
Button Explanation
[Edit Part] Launches the part editor.

Page 5-244 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② [Component Fiducials] tab

The component Fiducials tab sets or deletes the placement point recognition mark.
To define the mark, placement point information must be defined.

Project050803S-05E01

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Component Fiducials’ Sets the component fiducial marks.
‘Pattern Data’
‘X’ Placement point X-coordinate of the pattern origin reference
(Rightward: Positive)
‘Y’ Placement point Y-coordinate of the pattern origin reference
(Upward: Positive)
‘Angle’ Placement angle of the pattern origin reference
(Counterclockwise: Positive)
‘Position Data’
Left: Not allowed to change, calculated position data
‘X’ Placement point X-coordinate of the PCB origin reference
(Rightward: Positive)
‘Y’ Placement point Y-coordinate of the PCB origin reference
(Upward: Positive)
‘Angle’ Placement angle of the PCB origin reference
(Counterclockwise: Positive)
Right: Allowed to change, actual position data
‘X’ Placement point X-coordinate of the PCB origin reference
(Rightward: Positive)
‘Y’ Placement point Y-coordinate of the PCB origin reference
(Upward: Positive)
‘Angle’ Placement angle of the PCB origin reference
(Counterclockwise: Positive)

 Button
Button Explanation
[Edit] Opens the <Mark Editor> window and updates the mark data.
During editing the data, if there is a mark existing in another
offset or other marks used for the same mark template, the
confirmation dialog opens. For details, see the next page.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-245

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 If there are marks using the same template

Among the placement position recognition marks which recognize two points, if the same mark
template is used for the two points, the confirmation dialog for changing to another mark template
opens.

1 Click [Edit] on Pattern Data.

Project050802S-146E00

2 Make settings for editing the data and

click [Apply].

 At this time, if the same template is used, the

confirmation dialog opens.

Project050802S-149E01
2

3 Click [Yes] or [No].

[Yes] : Reflects the changes to other
Project050802S-144E00
marks as well.
[No] : Reflects the changes only to the
3 edit mark

Page 5-246 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 If there are several pattern offsets

If the PCB has several pattern offsets, the confirmation dialog for changing to another offset
opens upon edit.

1 Click [Edit] on Position Data.

Project050802S-147E00

2 Make settings for editing the data and

click [Apply].

 At this time, if the same pattern offsets exist on

the PCB, the confirmation dialog opens.

Project050802S-149E01
2

3 Click [Yes] or [No].

[Yes] : Reflects the changes to other
marks as well.
Project050802S-145E00 [No] : Reflects the changes only to the
edit mark
3

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-247

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

③ Local Area Height

To define the height measurement point, dispensing option must be defined to the component of
placement points.
If PCB has warpage, the dispensing nozzle hits PCB warp during drawing, resulting in damage to
PCBs. For this reason, the height of a given point on the PCB is measured in advance and the
nozzle height is controlled by using that data. The height of the measurement point is set on this
screen.

Project050803S-04E02

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Measure Local Area Height’
‘Measure Local Area Height’ Marks when local area height measurement is used.
‘Correction Mode’ Select the correction mode. There are following three types.
‘Auto’
If the difference in height between measurement points is
0.2 mm or less, the height offset value is mean value, and if
it is 0.2 mm or larger, the height offset value is the maximum
value.
‘Mean’
The height offset value shall be the mean value in height
between measurement points.
‘Max’
The height offset value shall be the maximum value in height
between measurement points.

If the difference in height between measurement points

exceeds the data of “Local height result tolerance”, the
machine stops due to error.
‘Pattern Data’
‘X’ Sets the X coordinate of the height measurement point by the
distance from the pattern origin.
‘Y’ Sets the Y coordinate of the height measurement point by the
distance from the pattern origin.
‘Enable’ Select whether the set height measurement point is actually
used or not. There are the following two types.
‘Yes’: The height measurement point is used.
‘No’: The height measurement point is not used.

Page 5-248 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

Item Explanation
‘Pattern Offset’
‘X’ Pattern offset X-coordinate is displayed.
‘Y’ Pattern offset Y - coordinate is displayed.
‘Override’ Whether to change X and Y - coordinates by a user is
displayed.
‘X’ Pattern offset X-coordinate is displayed.
‘Y’ Pattern offset Y - coordinate is displayed.
‘Enable’ ‘Yes’ or ‘No’ is displayed specified by the pattern data.

④ Insertion Pitch
In an axial tape, because the lead length varies, an insertion hole pitch and offset can be set per
placement point.

Project050803S-07E00

 Setting item
Item Description
Pattern Data
‘Insertion Hole Pitch’ Insertion hole pitch based on the placement point center.
Position Data
‘Override’ Mark the checkbox when the pitch is changed based on the
coordinates after deployment.
‘Insertion Hole Pitch’ Insertion hole interval based on the placement point center.
‘Insertion Hole Pitch Offset’ Offset amount of insertion hole interval.
Sets this if adjustment per placement position is required, and if
no adjustment is required set 0.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-249

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 About display of a placement point with insertion interval set.

A placement point with insertion interval set is displayed on the PCB editor as an insertion position
image under the following conditions. There are the following restrictions to display the placement
point.
 Insertion machine unique information – The lead diameter must be set.
Because an axial tape is treated as an irregular component, only mold shape is selected for the
shape option.

Display example of insertion hole image (Normal component)

Insertion hole interval

Lead diameter

Page 5-250 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.4 Editing Placement Points

Information relating to placement point edit can be set on the <Product Editor> window.

 Hiding/Showing a component

1 Choose the step of the desired

reference number to hide from the
PCB image of the PCB editor.

2 Right-click on the selected part and

choose the [Hide Designator XXXX]
from the right-click menu.

 With the part hidden, execute the step 1 and 2

for the part, the hidden part will be displayed.

Project050804S-01E02

Project050804S-02E02

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-251

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Hiding/Showing a BGA part mold

1 Choose the BGA part that you want to

hide the mold from the PCB image of
the PCB editor.

2 Right-click on the selected part and

choose the [Hide Mold for XXXX] from
the right-click menu.

 With the part mold of BGA hidden, execute the

step 1 and 2 for the part, the hidden mold will
be displayed.

Project050804S-38E01

Project050804S-39E01

Page 5-252 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Switching the selecting component

If other component overlaps with the selected component, click the component by holding down
the [Shift] key. You can switch the selected component from one to the other.

1 Chooe the component to edit the

placement point from the PCB image
of the PCB editor.

2 Point a cursor to the overlapped part

of components and click it by holding
down the [Shift] key.
2

Project050804S-36E01

 Switch the selected component from one to

the other.

Project050804S-37E01

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-253

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Editing placement points

1 Choose the desired component from

the PCB image of the PCB editor.

2 Choose [Modify]  [Edit] 

[Placement XXXX for all Patterns] on
the menu bar, choose (Edit
placement point) on the toolbar, or
2 choose [Placement point (All
patterns)] on the right-click menu.

 The <Placement Properties> window opens.

Project050804S-03E03
1

3 Change the setting as necessary.

4 Click [OK].

 The changes are reflected on the PCB image.

Project050803S-05E05

Page 5-254 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Setting placement point skip

When dispensing data or inspection data exists on a placement point, various skip settings can be
configured.
If you configure skip settings on PCB with this function, the skip settings are automatically
configured when you create the data creation job or add PCB from the data creation job editor.
Therefore, you are not necessary to configure the skip settings for each job.

1 Choose a placement point that you

wanto to configure skp settings.

Project050804S-47E00

2 Right-click on the selected component

and select your desired skip setting
from [Skip Default].

2
Project050804S-48E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-255

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 To display a placement point for which no circuit number is set

1 Click on the pull-down for ‘Part

Library’ in Part/Designator.

1
2 Select the blank at the bottom of the
list.

2
3 Click [OK].

 The part library name and the part name are

displayed as blank.
 A placement point the part name of which is
displayed as blank is called a reserved
placement point.

 Considerations about reserved placement

Project050804S-05E01 points
• Reserved placement points are not displayed
3
in the PCB image and placement point list of
the data creation job editor.
• The machine cannot process reserved
placement points, so the reserved placement
points are deleted by LNB before being
passed to the machine.
• Reserved placement points will be deleted
even if they have been exported to an SD.
• In the order of placement priority, reserved
placement points are also settable.
• The placement point search of the PCB editor
allows for a search by reference number.
• Reserved placement points are not included
in the number of placement points for the
Project050819S-01E00
PCB list / data creation job list / PPD
manager.

 In a PCB image, a reserved placement point is

displayed as a + mark.

Project050819S-02E00

Page 5-256 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Rotating all placement points of the selected component

1 Choose the component of which

placement points are to be rotated
from the PCB image of the PCB editor.

2 Choose ‘Rotation’ on the Placement

tab of the <Placement Properties>
window or [Rotate all placements
using part XXXX] on the right-click
menu displayed over the selected
component to set the rotation angle.
1 <Placement Properties> window: ‘5.8.4
Editing Placement Points’  ‘ Editing
placement points’

Project050804S-09E03

 The selected placement points are rotated at

the specified angle.

Project050804S-10E02

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-257

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Launching the component edit window

1 Choose the desired component from

the PCB image of the PCB editor.

2 Choose [Edit Part] on the Placement

tab of the <Placement Properties>
window, choose [Modify]  [Edit] 
[Part XXXX], or choose [Edit part] on
the right-click menu displayed over the
2 selected component.

 The part editor window opens.

Project050804S-11E03
<Placement Properties> window: ‘5.8.4
1 Editing Placement Points’  ‘ Editing
placement points’

 The part editor window of the selected

component opens.

Part editor: ‘6.5.3 Editing Components’

Project050804S-12E00

Page 5-258 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Overhang amount
If a part overhangs from a board edge, specify its length.
(The specified overhang length is used to position boards in machine)

Note: When H, the distance from the board bottom to an

H overhanging part bottom, is ≧2.0mm, the part edge
face may not be detected properly.
Depending on part shapes or board conditions or other
A
conditions, boards may not be positioned according to
the entered overhang amount. Please check on board
A: Overhang Amount positioning in actual machines.

1 Choose a overhanging part on an

image of PCB in PCB editor.
1

2 Choose [Edit overhang amount] from

the right-click menu on the selected
part.

 The <Overhang amount> window opens.

Project050804S-34E02

3 3 Type a value for overhang amount

from the board edges.

 You can specify overhang amount from the

right or left board edge.

 Input range is 0.000-20.000 for each.

Project050804S-35E00

4 4 Click [OK].

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-259

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Searching for placement points

1 Choose [Edit]  [Find Step(s)] on the

menu bar.

 The <Find Step> window opens.

Project050804S-13E00

2 3 2 Choose whether to search the

component from the part name or
Designator.

4 3 Type a character string according to

the search method specified in step 2.

4 To check the component image on the

PCB editor after searched, mark the
Project050804S-14E02 checkbox.
5

5 Click either of [Find All], [Find

Previous] or [Find Next] to search.

 To check placement point in a PCB one by

one, use ‘Designator Travel.’

Page 5-260 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Selecting all pattern types

1 Choose [Edit]  [Select All] on the

menu bar.

Project050804S-16E00

 Placement points and marks of all pattern

types are selected.

Project050804S-17E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-261

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Selecting pattern steps

1 Choose [Edit]  [Select Pattern

Steps] on the menu bar or [Select All
Pattern Steps] on the right-click menu
displayed over the selected
component.
1

Project050804S-18E00

 Placement points and marks of the selected

pattern types are selected.

Project050804S-19E00

Page 5-262 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Copying components

1 Choose the desired step from the

PCB image of the PCB editor.

2 Choose [Edit]  [Copy] on the menu

bar.
2

Project050804S-20E00

3 Choose [Edit]  [Paste Special] on

the menu bar.

 The <Paste Special> window opens.

Project050804S-21E00

4 Make the setting as necessary.

5
5 Click [OK].

Project050804S-22E01

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-263

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 The copied step is pasted.

Project050804S-23E00

Project050804S-24E01

 Setting item of the special paste

Item Explanation
‘Placements incl. fiducials, lands Pastes placement points including marks and lands.
[AP,CF,LF]’
‘Pattern fiducials [BF]’ Pastes pattern marks.
‘Bad board mark [BB]’ Pastes pattern bad marks.
‘Panel dimensions [PC]’ Pastes PCB dimensions.
‘Panel fiducial [PF]’ Pastes PCB marks.
‘Master bad mark [MB]’ Pastes master bad marks.
‘Do not paste new record’ Not paste copied/cut records if the same records have been
pasted.
‘Replace existing record with Overwrites copied/cut records if the same records have been
new record’ pasted.
‘Rename duplicate designator Pastes copied/cut records with different reference numbers if
and paste new record’ the reference numbers of the copied/cut records have already
been pasted.
‘Paste the records as it is’ Pastes copied/cut records.

Page 5-264 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Cutting components

1 Choose the desired step from the

PCB image of the PCB editor.

2 Choose [Edit]  [Cut] on the menu

bar.
2

Project050804S-25E00 1

3 Choose [Edit]  [Paste Special] on

the menu bar.

 The <Paste Special> window opens.

Project050804S-26E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-265

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

4 Make the setting as necessary.

5 5 Click [OK].

 If 'Designator duplicate check' is set in General

Settings, 'Paste the records as it is' cannot be
used for duplicate avoidance of the designator
with other placement points' designator.
'3.2.3 DGS Setting'
4

Project050804S-24E01

 The cut step is pasted.

Project050804S-27E00

Page 5-266 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Copying from existing component

1 From a PCB image on the PCB editor,

choose an undefined component that
you want to copy.

1 2 Choose [Copy from Existing Part]

from the right-click menu.
2

Project050804S-49E00

3 3 Choose a part library of the copy

5 source.

4
4 To search by part name or part
description, type letters in ‘Search
string.’

5 Click [Search].

 A list of parts that matches the searched letter

in the part library field is shown.
 If you do not want to specify specific letters, all
parts in the part library are shown.
Project050804S-50E00

6 Choose a part of the copy source.

7 Click [OK].

Project050804S-51E00
7

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-267

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 The part data is copied and the part becomes

the defined part.

Project050804S-52E00

Page 5-268 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Editing details

1 Choose [Edit]  [Advanced Edit] on

the menu bar.

 The <Advanced Edit> window opens.

Project050804S-28E02
1

2 Choose the tab that you want to edit

the coordinate data.

Project050804S-32E03

 Selected item
Item Explanation
Pattern Data Displays the pattern coordinates information as a list.
‘5.8.4 Editing Placement Points ■Editing details Pattern
data tab’
Position data Displays the coordinates after deployment information as a list.
‘5.8.4 Editing Placement Points ■Editing details Position
tab after deployment

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-269

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Editing details Pattern data tab

The pattern coordinates list is displayed and you can edit each item.

Project050804S-32E05

 Display item
Item Explanation
Blank If the linking position coordinates are changed, the background
of the row is highlighted in yellow and ‘’ is displayed.
‘X’ Shows X-coordinates
‘Y’ Shows Y-coordinates.
‘Rotation’ Shows the placement angle.
‘Z’ Shows the height of a placement point.
‘Designator’ Shows the reference number.
If 'Designator duplicate check' is enabled, duplicate check of the
designator with other placement points' designator is carried out
during setting
'3.2.3 DGS Setting'
‘Library’ Shows the part library name that the part is registered.
‘Skip Number’ Shows the bonding skip number which is set to parts.
(This function is available only on AM100.)
‘Type’ Shows the type.
‘Part’ Shows the component name.
‘Pattern Type’ Shows the pattern type.
‘Pattern Group’ Shows the pattern group.

 Button
Item Explanation
[Multi-Edit] Edits the selected item.
[Delete] Deletes the selected item.
[Filter] Filters by the desired item.
The filter dialog window opens.
[CSV Output] Outputs the selected item in a CSV file.
[Close] Closes the screen.

Page 5-270 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Multi-editing Pattern data tab

The several selected rows can edit at once.

1 Choose [Pattern Data].

1 2 Choose the desired mark or part data.

Project050804S-29E05 2
3
3 Click [Multi-Edit].

 The <Advanced Multi-Edit> window opens.

4 Edit as necessary.

5 Click [OK].

 The <Advance Multi-Edit > window closes.

 If the selected row in the step 2 is highlighted

in yellow, the <Update pattern data> screen
4 opens.
( ‘5.8.4Editing Placement Points ■
Updating the pattern data’)

Project050804S-30E05 5

 The edit result of marks and parts data is

displayed.

 Coordinates are developed, and the result is

reflected in the [Position Data] tab.

Project050804S-31E05

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-271

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Multi-editing component selection

If several placement points are displaced, they can be edited at once by selecting them on the
PCB.

1 Choose placement points to edit.

Project050804S-45E00

2 Choose [Modify]  [Edit]  [Multi Edit

Placements]  [Pattern Data /
Position Data] on the menu bar.

 The <Advanced Edit> window or the

<Advanced Multi-Edit> window opens.

 If you choose other than placement points,

they are not target for batch edit.
2

Project050804S-44E01

Project050804S-46E00

3 Make the setting as necessary.

‘5.8.4 Editing Placement Points ■

Multi-editing Pattern data tab’

4 Click [OK].

 Changes are reflected to the advanced edit

3 and the <Advanced Multi-Edit> window
closes.

Project050804S-30E05
4

Page 5-272 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Updating the pattern data

When you make changes in the row highlighted in yellow, the update pattern data screen opens.

1 Choose the method of updating the

pattern data.

 The result is displayed in the field below

according to your selection.

1
2 Click [OK].

 The <Update pattern data> window closes.

Project050804S-37E00

 Selecting item
Item Explanation
‘Recalculate Position Data by Deploys changed coordinates and reflects to the position data.
updated Pattern Data’
‘Keep current Position Data Not deploy changed coordinates and not reflect to the position
(Inconsistency remains)’ data.

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Pattern Offset’ Shows the pattern offset coordinates.
‘Record type’ Shows the record type.
‘Current Position Data’ Shows the current position data.
‘New Position Data’ Shows the new position data. Coordinates change depending
on the result of the selected item.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-273

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Filter dialog Pattern data tab

You can filter by item.
The filter dialog appears by clicking [Filter] of the <Advanced Edit> window. This dialog is the
function for items in the detailed screen edit list. (It is not for PCB window).

Project050804S-33E02

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Pattern Offset’ Shows/hides the pattern offset on the detailed edit window.
‘Placement’ Shows/hides placement points on the detailed edit window.
‘Fiducial’ Shows/hides PCB/pattern marks on the detailed edit window.
‘Bad mark’ Shows/hides bad marks on the detailed edit window.
‘Barcode’ Shows/hides barcode on the detailed edit window.
‘Warp’ Shows/hides warpage on the detailed edit window.

Page 5-274 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Editing details Position data tab

The position data list is displayed and you can edit each item.

Project050804S-34E00

 Display items and button operations are as same as the pattern data tab. (Display items of filter
differ) ( ‘5.8.4 Editing Placement Points ■Editing details Pattern data tab’)

 When you change coordinates from the position data, the row is highlighted in yellow. The row
that [Pattern data] tab links is also highlighted in yellow.

1 Change the coordinates of the

position data.

Project050804S-38E00

 The changed row is highlighted in yellow.

Project050804S-39E00

 The pattern data before deployment is also

highlighted in yellow.

Project050804S-40E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-275

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Filter dialog Position data tab

You can filter by item.
The filter dialog appears by clicking [Filter] of the <Advanced Edit> window. This dialog is the
function for items in the detailed screen edit list. (It is not for PCB window).

Project050804S-35E02

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Placement’ Shows/hides placement points on the detailed edit window.
‘Fiducial’ Shows/hides PCB/pattern marks on the detailed edit window.
‘Bad mark’ Shows/hides bad marks on the detailed edit window.
‘Barcode’ Shows/hides barcode on the detailed edit window.
‘Warp’ Shows/hides warpage on the detailed edit window.

Page 5-276 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 CSV output dialog

1 Click [CSV Output].

Project050804S-41E00

2 Set the output destination.

 Clicking displays the <Save as >

window.

Project050804S-36E00

3 Type the filename and click [Save].

 The input filename is saved.

Project050804S-42E00
3 3

4 Choose the output data.

‘Pattern Data’:
Information on the pattern data tab is output in
CSV format.
‘Position Data’:
Information on the position data tab is output in
CSV format.

Project050804S-43E00
4 5 Click [OK].
5  The CSV file is output.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-277

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Output information Output data

Item Explanation
‘Patten data’ Outputs information displayed in the pattern data tab on the
detailed edit window.
‘Position data’ Outputs information displayed in the position data tab on the
detailed edit window.

 Output information
Item Explanation
Blank If the linking position coordinates are changed, ‘’ is output.
‘X’ Shows X-coordinates
‘Y’ Shows Y-coordinates.
‘Rotation’ Shows the placement angle.
‘Z’ Shows the height of a placement point.
‘Designator’ Shows the reference number.
‘Library’ Shows the part library name that the part is registered.
‘Skip Number’ Shows the bonding skip number which is set to parts.
(This function is available only on AM100.)
‘Type’ Shows the type.
‘Part’ Shows the component name.
‘Pattern Type’ Shows the pattern type.
‘Pattern Group’ Shows the pattern group.

Page 5-278 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Output information
Pattern coordinate
,X,Y,Angle,Z,Reference Number,Library,Part,SkipNumber,Type,Pattern Type,Pattern
Group,
,0,0,0,0,PoffSet1,,,,,Pattern Offset,,PT_6,PG1,
,52.8,0.05,0,0,Poffset2,,,,,Pattern Offset,,PT_6,PG1,
,105.62,0.07,0,0,PoffSet3,,,,,Pattern Offset,,PT_6,PG1,
,158.43,0.1,0,0,PoffSet4,,,,,Pattern Offset,,PT_6,PG1,
*,7.53,52,90,0,MP013,APCPartsDB,1005R-B216x125-A,0,,Placement Point,PT_6,PG1,
,27.03,52.66,90,0,MP009,APCPartsDB,1005R-B216x125-B,0,,Placement
Point,PT_6,PG1,
,7.86,18.47,90,0,MP025,APCPartsDB,1608R-B216x125-A,2,,Placement Point,PT_6,PG1,
,9.66,18.47,90,0,MP024,APCPartsDB,1608R-B216x125-A,3,,Placement Point,PT_6,PG1,
,11.46,18.47,90,0,MP023,APCPartsDB,1608R-B216x125-A,4,,Placement
Point,PT_6,PG1,
,29,97.5,0,0,MP001,APCPartsDB,BGA-APC,1,,Placement Point,PT_6,PG1,
,27,5,0,0,,,,,Arbitrary Bad Mark,PT_6,PG1,
,29,10,0,0,,,,,Pattern Warpage Measurement Point,PT_6,PG1,
,29,62,0,0,,,,,Pattern Barcode,PT_6,PG1,
,49,120,0,0,,,,,Pattern Mark,PT_6,PG1,

Coorindates after expansion

,X,Y,Angle,Z,Reference Number,Library,Part,SkipNumber,Type,Pattern Type,Pattern
Group,
,10,115,0,0,,,,,PCB Mark,(PCB),(PCB),
,206,10,0,0,,,,,PCB Mark,(PCB),(PCB),
*,7.53,52.1,90,0,MP013,APCPartsDB,1005R-B216x125-A,0,,Placement Point,PT_6,PG1,
,27.03,52.66,90,0,MP009,APCPartsDB,1005R-B216x125-B,0,,Placement
Point,PT_6,PG1,
,7.86,18.47,90,0,MP025,APCPartsDB,1608R-B216x125-A,2,,Placement Point,PT_6,PG1,
,9.66,18.47,90,0,MP024,APCPartsDB,1608R-B216x125-A,3,,Placement Point,PT_6,PG1,
,11.46,18.47,90,0,MP023,APCPartsDB,1608R-B216x125-A,4,,Placement
Point,PT_6,PG1,
,187.43,97.6,0,0,MP001,APCPartsDB,BGA-APC,1,,Placement Point,PT_6,PG1,
,27,5,0,0,,,,, Master Bad Mark,(PCB),(PCB),
,27,5,0,0,PoffSet1,,,, Arbitrary Bad Mark,PT_6,PG1,
,79.8,5.05,0,0,Poffset2,,,, Arbitrary Bad Mark,PT_6,PG1,
,29,10,0,0,,,,,Pattern Warpage Measurement Point,PT_6,PG1,
,81.8,10.05,0,0,,,,,Pattern Warpage Measurement Point,PT_6,PG1,
,29,62,0,0,,,,, Pattern Barcode,PT_6,PG1,
,81,62,0,0,,,,, Pattern Barcode,PT_6,PG1,
,49,120,0,0,,,,, Pattern Mark,PT_6,PG1,
,101.8,120.05,0,0,,,,, Pattern Mark,PT_6,PG1,

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-279

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.5 Deleting Placement Points

 Deleting the selected step

1 Choose the desired component from

the PCB image of the PCB editor.

2 Choose [Modify]  [Delete]  [All

Step(s)] on the menu bar, choose
[Delete Placement Step] on the
2 right-click menu displayed over the
selected component, or choose
(Delete step) on the toolbar.

 The confirmation dialog opens.

Project050805S-01E00 1

3 Click [Yes].

 The confirmation dialog closes.

Project050805S-02E00
3

4 Check that the selected component is

deleted.

Project050805S-03E00

Page 5-280 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.6 Pattern Type

You can set information about pattern types on the <Pattern Type> window.

 Adding pattern types

1 Choose the side (front/reverse) of the

PCB.

1
Project050806S-01E00

2 Choose [Modify]  [Add]  [Pattern

Type] on the menu bar.

 The <Add Pattern Type> window opens.

2
Project050806S-02E00

3 Make the setting as necessary.

4 Click [OK].

Project050806S-03E00
4

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-281

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Editing pattern types

1 Choose the side (front/reverse) of the

PCB.

1
Project050806S-04E00

2 Choose [Modify]  [Edit]  [Pattern

Type PT1] on the menu bar or [Edit
pattern type] on the right-click menu
displayed over the selected
component.
2
 The <Pattern Type> window opens.
Project050806S-05E00

3 Make the setting as necessary.

4 Click [OK].

Project050806S-06E00
4

Page 5-282 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Deleting pattern types

1 Choose the side (front/reverse) of the

PCB.

1
Project050806S-07E00

2 Choose [Modify]  [Delete]  [Delete

Pattern Type PT1] on the menu bar.

 The confirmation dialog opens.

2
Project050806S-08E00

3 Click [Yes].

Project050806S-09E00
3

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-283

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 [Pattern Type] tab

Set the reference number and comment on this tab.

Project050806S-10E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Designator’ Reference number of the pattern type
‘Comment’ Comments on the pattern type

Page 5-284 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.7 Pattern Offsets

 <Pattern Offsets for Top Side> window
Set offset information of each pattern on this window.
The offset describes the basic pattern arrangement (position and angle) on the PCB.

Project050807S-01E05

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Pattern Type’ Specifies the pattern type.
‘Pattern’ Assigns a unique number to the registered pattern offset.
‘X’ Shows the pattern X-coordinates.
‘Y’ Shows the pattern Y-coordinates.
‘Rotate’ Shows the pattern angle.
‘Designator’ Shows the reference number of the offset.
‘Description’ Shows the comment on the offset.
‘Pattern Group’ Shows the pattern group name.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-285

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Adding offsets
① From the menu bar

1 Choose the pattern type.

 When the pattern type is ‘All Patterns,’ an

offset cannot be added.
1
Project050807S-02E00

2 Choose [Modify]  [Add...]  [Pattern

Offset(s)] on the menu bar.

 The <Add Offset(s) of Type PT1> window

opens.

Project050807S-03E02

3 Make the setting as necessary.

4 Click [OK].

Project050807S-04E01
4

Page 5-286 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② From the <Pattern Offsets for Top Side> window

1 Choose the pattern type to add a

pattern offset.
1
2 Click [Add].

Project050807S-01E05

3 Make the setting as necessary.

4 Click [OK].

Project050807S-06E01
4

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-287

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Editing offsets

1 Choose [Modify]  [Edit]  [Pattern

Offsets] on the menu bar, choose [Edit
pattern offset] on the right-click menu
displayed over the selected
component, or choose the component
from the PCB image and then
(Pattern offset) on the toolbar.
1
 The <Pattern Offsets for Top Side> window
opens.
Project050807S-07E02

2 Choose the desired pattern offset.

3 Click [Edit].
2  The <Edit Offset of Type PT1> window opens.

Project050807S-01E05

4 Make the setting as necessary.

5 Click [OK].

Project050807S-10E01
5

Page 5-288 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Deleting offsets
① From the <Product Editor> window

1 Choose the component to delete the

pattern offset.

2 2 Choose [Modify]  [Delete] 

[Pattern Offset] on the menu bar or
[Delete pattern offset] on the
right-click menu displayed over the
selected component.

 Clicking [Delete] on the <Pattern Offsets for

Top Side> window also enables you to delete
1 the pattern offset.

Project050807S-11E00  The confirmation dialog opens.

3 Click [Yes].

 The confirmation dialog opens.

Project050807S-12E00
3

4 Click [Yes].

Project050807S-13E00

 The selected pattern offset is deleted from the

PCB image.

Project050807S-14E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-289

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② From the <Pattern Offsets for Top Side> window

1
1 Choose the pattern type to delete the
pattern offset.

2
2 Choose the desired pattern offset.

3 Click [Delete].
Project050807S-01E05

3 4
4 Click [Close].

 Moving offset

1 Open the <Pattern Offsets for Top

Side> window and choose the desired
pattern offset to move.

1 2 Click [Rough Edit].

 The <Rough Edit> window opens.

Project050807S-01E05 2

3 The selected pattern offset is

displayed in frame. Drag the frame
with a mouse and decide the location.

 You can also type the coordinates of the

location and click [Move].

4 Click [OK].

3  The <Rough Edit> window closes.

Project050807S-17E00

Page 5-290 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 [Offset] tab
Set the pattern offsets on this tab.

Window for adding offsets

Project050807S-04E01

Window for editing offsets

Project050807S-10E01

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘X’ Pattern X-coordinate
‘Y’ Pattern Y-coordinate
‘Rotation’ Pattern angle
Select among from 0°, 90°, 180°and 270°, or enter a
desired angle from 0° to 360°.
‘Comment’ Comments on the offsets
‘Designator’ Reference number of the offsets

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-291

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Items to be set that are displayed only when addition is selected. (Sections surrounded by frames)
Item Explanation
‘X Count’ Specified when more than one set of offsets is added
collectively in the X direction. Enter the number of patterns to
be added in the X direction.
‘Y Count’ Specified when more than one set of offsets is added
collectively in the Y direction. Enter the number of patterns to
be added in the Y direction.
‘X pitch’ Specified when more than one set of offsets is added
collectively in the X direction. Enter the pitch between patterns
to be added in the X direction.
 This is displayed when the value of 1 or more is input in ‘X
Count’ and ‘Y Count.’
‘Y pitch’ Specified when more than one set of offsets is added
collectively in the Y direction. Enter the pitch between patterns
to be added in the Y direction.
 This is displayed when the value of 1 or more is input in ‘X
Count’ and ‘Y Count.’
‘Pattern Group’ Set a pattern group according to patterns.

 Batch editing of pattern groups

Set the values of the pattern groups in the selected rows at once.

1 Choose desired rows to edit.

2 Choose [Edit Pattern Group] on the

right-click menu.
1 2

Project050807S-18E00

3 Choose the value.

4 Click [OK].
3
Project050807S-19E00 4

Project050807S-20E00

Page 5-292 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.8 Pattern Group

A group is a concept that stands midway between a PCB and a pattern.

The use of pattern group recognition may provide the following merits.
• Recognition time can be reduced.
(If the number of patterns to recognize is large, pattern recognition takes time.)
• High-accuracy correction can be expected.
(For a narrow and long PCB, accuracy may not be stable with PCB recognition only.)
Pattern group recognition is effective with a PCB (e.g. module PCB) that has many patterns as
shown in the figure below.

• Overview of pattern group recognition marks

Recognition operation can be selected with PCB marks, pattern group marks, and pattern marks.
Only one of the three recognition marks can be chosen.
‘7.11.4 Setup of Machine Motion Options’  ‘ Software switch tab’

• Overview of pattern group bad marks

For bad mark recognition operation, you can specify whether to recognize master bad marks,
pattern group bad marks, and pattern bad marks.
When the recognition setting is ON for all three bad marks, a low-order bad mark cannot be
recognized if there is no high-order bad mark.
‘7.11.4 Setup of Machine Motion Options’  ‘ Software switch tab’

 Pattern image and mark positions

First pattern group Second pattern group Third pattern group
recognition mark recognition mark recognition mark
First pattern group bad
Second pattern group Third pattern group bad
mark
bad mark mark

Project050801S-01E00

One of patterns First group Second group Third group

First pattern group recognition mark Second pattern group recognition mark Third pattern group recognition mark

Fig. Example of pattern groups

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-293

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Flow of creating pattern group recognition data

Positional relationships of the pattern image in the previous page (Unit: mm)

(105, 95) (225, 95) (345, 95)

20

(5, 70) 20 (125, 70) (245, 70)

240
120

(10, 10) (130, 10) (250, 10)

(5, 5) (125, 5) (245, 5)
(0, 0)

The following shows the flow of creating data for a pattern group example in the previous page.

1. Setting pattern data Create pattern data to be applied.

Create necessary pattern groups beforehand.

2. Setting a pattern group
For the figure shown above, three pattern groups are required.

Set the data on the <Add Offset(s)> window, and apply the
3. Setting the offset
pattern in the first group.

4. Repeating step 3 for all Create data for all the pattern groups that have been created in
pattern groups step 3, and apply the patterns to the whole PCB.

5. Setting a pattern group If applicable, set a pattern group bad mark.

bad mark This can also be done in step 2.

Page 5-294 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

1. Setting pattern data

1 Arrange placement points for one

pattern by CAD import or adding a
placement point.

Project050808S-02E00

2. Setting a pattern group

1 Choose [Modify]  [Add]  [Pattern

group] on the menu bar.

 The <Set Pattern Groups> window opens.

2 2 Choose the row number ‘1,’ and click

[Edit].

 The <Edit Pattern Group> window opens.

Project050808S-03E00 2

3 Enter the following information, and

click [OK].
‘Group Name’ ‘PG1’
‘Define Fiducial’ Checked
‘Pattern Group Coordinates’
‘Number of Marks’ Choose a 2-point mark.
‘X’, ‘Y’ (5, 5)
(105, 95)
‘Description’ Optional
‘Template’ Use the pull-down
menu to choose.
When there is no
template, create one
using the [New
Template] button.
 You can add or change the recognition mark
definition after pattern data is created.

Project050808S-04E00
3

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-295

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

4 Click [Add].

 The <Edit Pattern Group> window opens.

Project050808S-05E00 4

5 Enter the following information, and

click [OK].
‘Group Name’ ‘PG2’
‘Define Fiducial’ Checked
‘Pattern Group Coordinates’
‘Number of Marks’ Choose a 2-point mark.
‘X’, ‘Y’ (125, 5)
(225, 95)
‘Description’ Optional
‘Template’ Use the pull-down
menu to choose.
When there is no
template, create one
using the [New
Template] button.
 You can add or change the recognition mark
definition after pattern data is created.

Project050808S-06E00
5
6 Add a third group in like manner.
‘Group Name’ ‘PG3’
‘Define Fiducial’ Checked
‘Pattern Group Coordinates’
‘Number of Marks’ Choose a 2-point mark.
‘X’, ‘Y’ (245, 5)
(345, 95)
‘Description’ Optional
‘Template’ Use the pull-down
menu to choose.
When there is no
template, create one
using the [New
Template] button.

 A pattern group is added.

Page 5-296 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

7 Click [Close].

Project050808S-07E00 7

Image of adding a pattern group and pattern group recognition mark

Project050808S-08J00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-297

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

3. Setting the offset

 Setting the first group pattern offset

1 Choose [Modify]  [Add]  [Pattern

offset] on the menu bar.

 The <Add Offset(s)> window opens.

2 Enter the following offset information,

and click [OK].
‘X’ 0
‘Y’ 0
‘Rotation’ 0
‘X Count’ 5
Project050808S-09E00
‘Y Count’ 5
2 ‘Description’ Optional
‘Designator’ Type the reference
number of the created
offset. On the window,
‘OFFSET01-’ is used
as an example.
‘Pattern Group’ ‘PG1’
Use the pull-down
menu to choose.
‘X Pitch’ 20
‘Y Pitch’ 20

 The pattern data is applied with the set offset.

Project050808S-10J00

 If you set ‘0’ for ‘X’ and ‘Y’ and click [OK] on the
<Add Offset(s)> window, the pattern to apply
overlaps with the original pattern. In that case,
the window shown on the left opens.
Click [Add], and then delete the duplicated
pattern following the steps below.

Project050808S-11E00

Page 5-298 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Deleting the duplicated pattern

1 Choose [Modify]  [Add]  [Pattern

offset] on the menu bar.

2
2 Choose the pattern containing the
duplicated X and Y coordinates, and
click [Delete].

Project050807S-01E05

3 Click [Yes].

3
Project050808S-11E03

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-299

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

4. Repeating step 3 for all pattern groups

 Setting the second group pattern offset

1 Choose [Modify]  [Add]  [Pattern

offset] on the menu bar.

 The <Add Offset(s)> window opens.

2 Enter the following offset information,

and click [OK].
‘X’ 120
‘Y’ 0
‘Rotation’ 0
‘X Count’ 5
Project050808S-14E00
2 ‘Y Count’ 5
‘Description’ Optional
‘Designator’ Type the reference
number of the created
offset. On the window,
‘OFFSET02-’ is used
as an example.
‘Pattern Group’ ‘PG2’
Use the pull-down
menu to choose.
‘X Pitch’ 20
‘Y Pitch’ 20

 The pattern data is applied with the set offset.

Project050808S-15J00

Page 5-300 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Setting the third group pattern offset

1 Choose [Modify]  [Add]  [Pattern

offset] on the menu bar.

 The <Add Offset(s)> window opens.

2 Enter the following offset information,

and click [OK].
‘X’ 240
‘Y’ 0
‘Rotation’ 0
‘X Count’ 5
Project050808S-16E00
‘Y Count’ 5
2 ‘Description’ Optional
‘Designator’ Type the reference
number of the created
offset. On the window,
‘OFFSET03-’ is used
as an example.
‘Pattern Group’ ‘PG3’
Use the pull-down
menu to choose.
‘X Pitch’ 20
‘Y Pitch’ 20

 The pattern data is applied with the set offset.

Project050808S-17J00

 You can check which pattern group each

offset data belongs to by choosing [Modify] 
[Add]  [Pattern offset].
If incorrect setting is found, correct it using the
[Edit] button.

Project050808S-01E05

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-301

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Setting a pattern group bad mark

Set this field when there are pattern group bad marks.

1 Choose [Modify]  [Add]  [Pattern

group] on the menu bar.

 The <Set Pattern Groups> window opens.

2 2 Choose the row that shows the name

of the group (PG1) to which bad marks
are set. Then, click [Edit].

 The <Edit Pattern Group> window opens.

3 Choose the [Pattern Group Bad Mark]

Project050808S-19E00 2 tab.

4 Enter the following bad mark

information, and click [OK].
‘Group Name’ ‘PG1’
3 The name of the group
selected on the above
window is displayed.
‘Define Bad Mark’ Checked
‘X’ 5
‘Y’ 70
‘Description’ Optional
‘Template’ Use the pull-down
menu to choose.
When there is no
template, create one
using the [New
Template] button.

Project050808S-20E00
4

Page 5-302 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5 Set the pattern group bad marks of the

second and third groups in like
manner.
Second group (PG2)
‘Group Name’ ‘PG2’
The name of the group
selected on the above
window is displayed.
‘Define Bad Mark’ Checked
‘X’ 125
‘Y’ 70
‘Description’ Optional
‘Template’ Use the pull-down
menu to choose.
Project050808S-21E00 When there is no
template, create one
using the [New
Template] button.

Third group (PG3)

‘Group Name’ ‘PG3’
The name of the group
selected on the above
window is displayed.
‘Define Bad Mark’ Checked
‘X’ 245
‘Y’ 70
‘Description’ Optional
‘Template’ Use the pull-down
menu to choose.
When there is no
template, create one
using the [New
Template] button.

 Data creation is complete.

Project050808S-01J00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-303

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① Pattern group recognition mark tab

You can define the pattern group recognition mark on the pattern group recognition mark tab.

Project050811S-04E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Group Name’ Group name of the pattern group
This is common to recognition mark and bad mark.
‘Define Bad Mark’ Checked when the pattern group recognition mark is used.
‘X’ Sets the X coordinate of the pattern group recognition mark.
‘Y’ Sets the Y coordinate of the pattern group recognition mark.
‘Description’ Enters comments on the pattern group recognition mark.
‘Template’ Template mark used for this pattern group recognition mark.
Template marks created in ‘5.7 Mark Configuration’ can be
selected. Template marks available for view are shown on the
drop-down list.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Number of Marks] Checked when the pattern group recognition mark is used.
[New Template] Displays the template mark creation window.
[Edit Instance] Displays the edit window of the selected pattern group
recognition mark. During editing the data, if there is another
mark using the same mark template, the confirmation dialog
opens. For details, see the next page.

Page 5-304 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 If there are marks using the same template

If the same template is used, the confirmation dialog for changing to another template opens upon
edit.

1 Click [Edit Instance].

1
Project050802S-148E00

2 Make settings for editing the data and

click [Apply].

 At this time, if the same template is used, the

confirmation dialog opens.

Project050802S-149E01
2

3 Click [Yes] or [No].

[Yes] : Reflects the changes to other
marks as well.
Project050802S-144E00
[No] : Reflects the changes only to the
3 edit mark

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-305

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② Pattern group bad mark tab

You can define the pattern group bad mark on the pattern group bad mark tab.

Project050811S-05E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Group name’ Group name of the pattern group
This is common to recognition mark and bad mark.
‘Define Bad Mark’ Checked when the pattern group bad mark is used.
‘X’ Sets the X coordinate of the pattern group bad mark.
‘Y’ Sets the Y coordinate of the pattern group bad mark.
‘Description’ Enters comments on pattern group bad marks.
‘Template’ Template mark used for this pattern group bad mark. Template
marks created in ‘5.7 Mark Configuration’ can be selected.
Template marks available for view are shown on the
drop-down list.

 Button
Button Explanation
[New Template] Displays the template mark creation window.
[Edit Instance] Displays the edit window of the selected pattern group bad
mark.

Page 5-306 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.9 Pattern Outlines

By adding pattern outlines, an outline of a PCB, such as dividable PCB, can be described in line
drawings.

 Adding pattern outlines

1 Choose [Modify]  [Add]  [Pattern

Outline] on the menu bar.

 The <Create Pattern Outline> window opens.

1

Project050808S-01E02

2 Click [OK].

 The <Create Pattern Outline> window closes.

Project050808S-02E00

3 Click the corner positions of the

pattern outline, and write the pattern
outline in line drawings.

 When writing the pattern outline, be sure to

3 3 have the end point connected to the start
point.
If these two points do not meet, writing of the
pattern outline will not be carried out.

3 3
Project050808S-03E00

 The pattern outline image is displayed.

Project050808S-04E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-307

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Deleting pattern outlines

1 Choose [Modify]  [Delete] 

[Pattern Outline] on the menu bar.

 The <Delete Pattern Outline> window opens.

Project050808S-05E02
1

2 Click [Yes].

 The <Delete Pattern Outline> window closes.

Project050808S-06E01
2

 The pattern outline image is deleted.

Project050808S-07E00

Page 5-308 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.10 Obstacle
The PCB, etc., which has the top cover on its top and the bottom carrier on its bottom interferes
nozzles with the cover. This function creates the PCB data for prevention of interference by
creating an obstacle on the PCB.
If the PCB has the top cover as shown below, this function creates the cover as an obstacle.
(Drawing viewed from the top)

Top cover

Bottom carrier

Project050819S-01J00

(Drawing viewed from the side)

PCB Top cover

Project050819S-02J00 Bottom carrier

 Creating obstacles

1 Choose [Modify]  [Add] 

[Obstacle] on the menu bar.

 The <Add Obstacle> window opens.

Project050819S-03E00

2 2 Type an obstacle name

3
3 Type center coordinates of an
4 obstacle.

4 Type an obstacle size.

5 Click [OK].
Project050819S-04E00
5

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-309

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Editing obstacles

1 Choose [Modify]  [Edit] 

[Obstacle] on the menu bar.

 The < Obstacles> window opens.

Project050819S-05E00

2 Choose an obstacle to be edited.

3 Click [Edit].

2  The <Edit Obstacles> window opens.

Project050819S-06E00
3

4 Edit each item.

4
5 Click [OK].

Project050819S-07E00
5

Page 5-310 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Deleting obstacles
1 Choose [Modify]  [Edit] 
[Obstacle] on the menu bar.

 The < Obstacles> window opens.

Project050819S-05E00

2 Choose an obstacle to be deleted

(select all that apply).

2 3 Click [Delete].

Project050819S-06E00
3

4 When the warning message appears,

click [Yes].

Project050819S-08E00
4

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-311

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.11 Order of Placement Priority

 Simple priority
Simple priority is used when components being placed are simply located on the first or last in line.
(e.g: When you want to place a sealed case at the last in line). However, if you need to clearly set
types of components inside the sealed case, such as for component inspection, use relative
priority.
There are three placement orders in component placement: ‘first,’ ‘normal,’ and ‘last.’ Placement
process is optimized in such a way that components categorized in ‘first’ are always placed before
the ones in ‘normal’ or ‘last’ while components categorized in ‘last’ are always placed after the
ones in ‘first’ or ‘normal.’

Project050809S-01E00

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘First’
‘Designator’ Shows the reference number of the components to be placed
first.
‘X’ Shows the X coordinates of the components to be placed first.
‘Y’ Shows the Y coordinates of the components to be placed first.
‘Part Name’ Shows the component names to be placed first.
‘Last’
‘Designator’ Shows the reference number of the components to be placed
last.
‘X’ Shows the X coordinates of the components to be placed last.
‘Y’ Shows the Y coordinates of the components to be placed last.
‘Part Name’ Shows the component names to be placed last.

Page 5-312 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Button
Button Explanation
[Simple Priority] Opens the setup window for the simple priority order.
[Sequential Priority] Opens the setup window for the sequential priority order.
[Relative Priority] Opens the setup window for the relative sequence.
‘First’
[Set First] Sets components to be placed first.
[Set Standard] Sets components to be placed as standard.
‘Last’
[Set Last] Sets components to be placed last.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-313

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Adding simple priority orders

1 Choose [View]  [Order Of

Placement Priority] on the menu bar.

 The placement priority order window opens.

Project050809S-02E02

2 Click [Simple Priority].

3 Choose the component to specify the

2 priority order on the PCB editor.

4 4 Add the selected component to the

3 first/last placement list by dragging
and dropping it or clicking [Set First] /
[Set Last].

4  The image of the selected component is

deleted from the PCB editor and added to the
list.

Project050809S-03E02

Page 5-314 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Editing simple priority orders

1 Choose [View]  [Order Of

Placement Priority] on the menu bar.

 The placement priority order window opens.

 If the PCB editor was saved with the window

opened, this window automatically opens
without choosing [Order Of Placement
Priority].
1

Project050809S-02E02

2 Click [Simple Priority].

3 Choose the desired component from

the PCB editor.
2
 If you will not add a component to the list, go to
step 5.
4
3
4 Add the selected component to the
first/last placement list by dragging
and dropping it or clicking [Set First] /
4 [Set Last].

 The image of the selected component is

Project050809S-05E02 deleted from the PCB editor and added to the
list.

5 Choose a component to delete from

the first/last placement list.

 If you will not delete a component from the list,

do not perform step 6.

5
6 Click [Set Standard], or drag and drop
the selected component from the
6 first/last placement list onto the PCB
editor.

 The image of the selected component is

deleted from the first/last placement list and
displayed on the PCB editor.
Project050809S-06E02

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-315

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Deleting simple priority orders

1 Choose [View]  [Order Of

Placement Priority] on the menu bar.

 The placement priority order window opens.

 If the PCB editor was saved with the window

opened, this window automatically opens
without choosing [Order Of Placement
Priority].
1

Project050809S-02E02

2 2 Click [Simple Priority].

3 Choose all components in the first/last

placement list.

3 4 Click [Set Standard], or drag and drop

the selected components from the
first/last placement list onto the PCB
4 editor.
3
 The images of the selected components are
deleted from the first/last placement list and
displayed on the PCB editor.

Project050809S-08E02

Page 5-316 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Sequential priority
Sequential priority is used when components and nozzles interfere with each other unless you
exactly specify the placement order. (e.g. mounting between narrow adjacent or existing
placement points using the eccentric nozzles).
The placement order is configured for each placement point.
Basically one placement point per turn is set.
The component placement process is optimized in such a way that components are placed in the
order of priority specified in each sequence.

Project050809S-09E00

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Sequences’ Removes the registered sequences.

‘Designator’ Shows the reference number of the component.

‘X’ Shows the component X-coordinates.
‘Y’ Shows the component Y-coordinates.
‘Part Name’ Shows the component name.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-317

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Button
Button Explanation
[Simple Priority] Opens the setup window for the simple priority order.
[Sequential Priority] Opens the setup window for the sequential priority order.
[Relative Priority] Opens the setup window for the relative sequence.
‘Sequences’
[Add] Registers a new sequence.
[Remove] Deletes a sequence.

[Add] Adds components in the sequence.

[Move Up] Moves up the priority order of a component within the
sequence by one.
[Move Down] Moves down the priority order of a component within the
sequence by one.
[Remove] Deletes the component from the sequence.

Page 5-318 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Adding sequential priority orders

1 Choose [View]  [Order Of

Placement Priority] on the menu bar.

 The placement priority order window opens.

Project050809S-02E02

2 Click [Sequential Priority].

Project050809S-11E02

3 Click [Add].

4 Choose the component to specify the

priority order on the PCB editor.

3
4 5 Add the selected component to the list
by dragging and dropping it or clicking
5 [Add].

 The image of the selected component is

deleted from the PCB editor and added to the
list.
Project050809S-12E02

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-319

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

6 Choose the desired component from

the list.

7 Click [Move Up]/[Move Down] to

change the priority order.

 The priority order of the selected component

changes.

6
7

Project050809S-13E02

Page 5-320 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Editing sequential priority orders

1 Choose [View]  [Order Of

Placement Priority] on the menu bar.

 The placement priority order window opens.

 If the PCB editor was saved with the window

opened, this window automatically opens
without choosing [Order Of Placement
1 Priority].

Project050809S-02E02

2 Click [Sequential Priority].

Project050809S-15E02

3 Choose the desired sequence from

the list.

4 Choose the component to add to the

3 sequence from the PCB editor.

 If you will not add a component to the list, go to

4 step 6.
5
5 Add the selected component to the list
by dragging and dropping it or clicking
[Add].
Project050809S-16E02
 The image of the selected component is
deleted from the PCB editor and added to the
list.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-321

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

6 Choose the component to delete from

the sequence from the list.

 If you will not delete a component from the list,

go to step 8.

7 Click [Remove], or drag and drop the

selected component from the list onto
the PCB editor.
6
 The images of the selected components are
deleted from the list and displayed on the PCB
editor.
7

Project050809S-17E02

8 Choose the desired component from

the list.

 If you will not change the priority order, do not

perform step 9.

9 Click [Move Up] / [Move Down] to

change the priority order.

8  The priority order of the selected component

changes.
9

Project050809S-18E02

Page 5-322 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Deleting sequential priority orders

1 Choose [View]  [Order Of

Placement Priority] on the menu bar.

 The placement priority order window opens.

 If the PCB editor was saved with the window

opened, this window automatically opens
without choosing [Order Of Placement
Priority].
1

Project050809S-02E02

2 Click [Sequential Priority].

Project050809S-20E02

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-323

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

3 Choose the desired sequence from

the list.

4 Click [Remove].

3  The confirmation window opens.

4

Project050809S-20E02

5 Click [Yes].

 The selected sequence is deleted from the

sequence list.

Project050809S-22E00
5

Page 5-324 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Relative priority order

Relative sequence is used for PoP placement that a component is placed on a component or a
sealed case is placed after inspecting components being mounted inside the sealed case. Its
correlation is set per placement point. For PoP placement, the data, that an upper component is
placed after the lower one is surely placed, is created. For the sealed case, the production data,
that a component inside the sealed case is inspected before placing the sealed case, is created.
(Simple priority is the simple way to place the sealed case without component inspection.)
The component placement process is optimized in such a way that components specified as
‘Before’ in a sequence are placed before the ones specified as ‘After’ in the same sequence.
Only this placement priority order supports the 3-dimensional placement.

Project050809S-23E00

 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Sequences’ Removes the registered sequences.
‘Before’
‘Designator’ Shows the reference number of the components to be placed
first.
‘X’ Shows the X coordinates of the components to be placed first.
‘Y’ Shows the Y coordinates of the components to be placed first.
‘Part Name’ Shows the component names to be placed first.
‘After’
‘Designator’ Shows the reference number of the components to be placed
later.
‘X’ Shows the X coordinates of the components to be placed later.
‘Y’ Shows the Y coordinates of the components to be placed later.
‘Part Name’ Shows the component names to be placed later.

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘3D Placement’ Checked off when the 3-dimensional placement is carried out.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-325

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Button
Button Explanation
[Simple Priority] Opens the setup window for the simple priority order.
[Sequential Priority] Opens the setup window for the sequential priority order.
[Relative Priority] Opens the setup window for the relative priority order.
‘Sequences’
[Add] Registers a new sequence.
[Remove] Deletes a sequence.
‘Before’
[Set Before] Moves the priority order of a component within the sequence
forward.
[Remove] Deletes the component from the sequence.
‘After’
[Set After] Moves the priority order of a component within the sequence
backward.

Page 5-326 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Adding relative priority orders

1 Choose [View]  [Order Of

Placement Priority] on the menu bar.

Project050809S-02E02

2 Click [Relative Priority].

Project050809S-25E02

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-327

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

3 Click [Add].

4 Choose the component to specify the

priority order on the PCB editor.

3
5 Add the selected component to the
before/after placement list by dragging
5 4 and dropping it or clicking [Set Before]
/ [Set After].

 The image of the selected component is

5 deleted from the PCB editor and added to the
list.
6
Project050809S-26E02

6 Choose ‘3D Placement.’

 Choosing it enables the component placement

at the same coordinates.

 If you will not carry out the 3-dimensional

placement, do not perform step 6.

Page 5-328 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Editing relative priority orders

1 Choose [View]  [Order Of

Placement Priority] on the menu bar.

 The placement priority order window opens.

 If the PCB editor was saved with the window

opened, this window automatically opens
without choosing [Order Of Placement
1 Priority].

Project050809S-02E02

2 Click [Relative Priority].

Project050809S-28E02

3 Choose the desired sequence from

the list.

4 Choose the component to add to the

3 sequence from the PCB editor.

4  If you will not add a component to the list, go to

5 step 6.

5 5 Add the selected component to the

before/after placement list by dragging
Project050809S-29E02
and dropping it or clicking [Set
Before]/[Set After].

 The image of the selected component is

deleted from the PCB editor and added to the
list.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-329

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

6 Choose the component to delete from

the sequence from the before/after
placement list.

 If you will not delete a component from the list,

go to step 8.

7 Click [Remove], or drag and drop the

6 selected component from the before /
after placement list onto the PCB
7 editor.

 The image of the selected component is

deleted from the first/last placement list and
displayed on the PCB editor.
Project050809S-30E02

8 Click ‘3D Placement,’ and change the

setting.

 If you will not change the 3-dimensional

placement setting, do not perform step 8.

8
Project050809S-31E02

Page 5-330 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Deleting relative priority orders

1 Choose [View]  [Order Of

Placement Priority] on the menu bar.

 The placement priority order window opens.

 If the PCB editor was saved with the window

opened, this window automatically opens
without choosing [Order Of Placement
Priority].
1

Project050809S-02E02

2 Click [Relative Priority].

Project050809S-33E02

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-331

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

3 Choose the desired sequence from

the list.

4 Click [Remove].
3  The confirmation window opens.
4

Project050809S-33E0

5 Click [Yes].

 The selected sequence is deleted from the

sequence list.

Project050809S-35E00
5

Page 5-332 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.12 Component Interference Check

 Checking for component interference
You can check for component interference at all the placement points on a PCB.
If component interference is found, correct the interference with the editor.
Interference check is carried out for components within the range of a specific pattern; placement
points crossing over into other patterns, placement points being edited inside the selected pattern,
and placement points of the 3D placement designated by the relative sequence are not subject to
interference check.

Project050810S-01E00

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
Interfered component list
‘Colliding pairs’
‘First’ Displays the reference name of the component that interferes
with the second component on the same row.
When the row on the list is selected, the color of the second
component changes and the first and second components are
enclosed by a red frame.
‘Second’ Displays the reference name of the component that interferes
with the first component on the same row.
The process after the row on the list is selected is the same as
the case of the first component.
‘Pattern Type’ Displays the pattern type of the interfered component.

 Button
Item Explanation
[Retry] Carries out the interference check again and updates the list.
[Close] Closes the interfered component list window.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-333

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① Carrying out the component interference check

1 Choose [Tool]  [Component

Collision Check] on the menu bar.

1  The <Confirmation> window opens.

Project050810S-02E00

2 Click [Yes].

 Component interference check is carried out,

and a list of interfered components is
displayed.

Project050810S-03E00 2

 The progress of component interference

check is displayed.

Project050810S-04E00

 A list of interfered components is displayed.

 When there are no interfered components, the

list is blank.

Project050810S-06E00

Project050810S-01E00

Page 5-334 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② Checking and editing interfered components

1 Choose the desired row on the

interfered component list, and
right-click it.

Project050810S-07E00

 Right-click menu
Item Explanation
[Any components colliding with Encloses the placement point ‘REFxxx (1st placement point)’
REFxxx] and all of its interfered placement points with frames and
zooms in the view in such a manner that all relevant placement
points are displayed.
Frames for the placement point REFxxx and all of its interfered
placement points are displayed in different colors.
[Any components colliding with The same procedure as [Any components colliding with
REFyyy] REFxxx] above is true of the placement point ‘REFyyy (2nd
placement point)’ and all of its interfered placement points.
[Exclude REFxxx from check] Excludes the placement point ‘REFxxx (1st placement point)’
from the component interference check target.
Rows in the interfered component list that contain components
excluded from the check are all grayed out. You cannot modify
the PCB editor image even if the grayed out row is selected.
If the target placement point and its interfered components are
displayed with frames on the PCB editor prior to execution of
this item, the frames will be deleted.
Although the data specified by this item is retained while the
PCB editor is running, it will be reset when the PCB editor
closes.
[Exclude REFyyy from check] The same procedure as [Exclude REFxxx from check] above
is true of the placement point ‘REFyyy (2nd placement point)’
and all of its interfered placement points.
[Exclude Pair from check] The same procedure as [Exclude REFxxx from check] above
is true of the pair of the placement points on the selected row.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-335

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

③ Right-click menu on the grayed out row

1 Choose the desired grayed-out row on

the interfered component list, and
right-click it.

Project050810S-08E00

 Right-click menu
Item Explanation
[Include REFxxx in check] Resets the placement point ‘REFxxx (1st placement point)’ to
the component interference check target.
Grayed out rows in the interfered component list that contain
the placement point ‘REFxxx’ are all reset.
[Include REFyyy in check] The same procedure as [Include REFxxx in check] above is
true of the placement point ‘REFyyy (2nd placement point)’
and all of its interfered placement points.
[Include Pair in check] The same procedure as [Include REFxxx in check] above is
true of the pair of the placement points on the selected row.

Page 5-336 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.13 CAD Rotation

 CAD angle conversion
If 0° of parts defined by CAD that you use is different from 0° of parts of NPM (the shape displayed
on the parts editor), you are required to convert a placement angle to keep it in alignment with 0°
of parts of DGS as you import CAD.
By defining offset amounts (CAD rotation) of 0° of parts of CAD system and 0° of parts of DGS for
each part, a mounting angle can be automatically converted at the time of CAD import.

 CAD angle conversion sample

Difference of
90°

CAD part shape at a NPM part shape at a

0° angle 0° angle

0° mounting angle of Rotate 90 degrees only the mounting angle

CAD of a placement point where a part is
mounted at the time of import.
CAD rotation angle conversion flow is shown below.

Reflect to another PCB or sets confirmation dialog display

1. DGS setting when CAD rotation is changed.
‘3.2.3 DGS Setting ■About CAD rotation’

Select a CAD angle conversion table for the first time around
2. CAD system selection and when creating new CAD macro.
‘5.2 Defining CAD Macro ■Global Rotation tab’

Import CAD. The mounting angle is automatically converted if

3. CAD import the CAD rotation setting is already configured in the selected
Cad conversion table.

With the PCB editor, set the CAD rotation of parts not set in the
CAD rotation angle CAD conversion table. From the next time onward, if imported
4.
conversion table setting by the CAD macro that selects the same CAD system, the
mounting angle will be converted to the angle set here.
For the setting on the PCB editor,
‘5.8.13 CAD Rotation ■CAD Angle Conversion Table
Setting’
For the setting on the part editor,
‘6.5.3 Editing Components ■CAD rotation’.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-337

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

Project050812S-01E02

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Part Name’ Displays the component name.
‘Library’ Displays the library name.
‘Physical Class’ Displays the shape definition. (Box type, lead component, ball component,
irregular component)
‘Functional Class’ Displays the component type.
‘Comment’ Displays the comment on the component.
‘Designator’ Displays the reference number of placement points using the component.
‘L’ Displays the component outer length.
‘W’ Displays the component outer width.
‘T’ Displays the component height.
‘CAD Rotation’ Enters 0° offset of the CAD system and the DGS component.
‘Verified’ Displays the verification condition of a CAD rotation of a part which is
imported using the CAD system.

 Button
Item Explanation
[Edit Part] Starts up the part editor.
[Multi-Edit] Changes CAD rotation and confirmation condition of several
components all at once.
[OK] Closes the CAD rotation angle setting screen.

Page 5-338 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 CAD Angle Conversion Table Setting

The selection of a CAD system is required for CAD angle conversion at the time of CAD import.
5.2 Defining CAD Macro ■Global Rotation tab

1 Choose [Tool]  [CAD Rotation] from

the menu bar.

Project050812S-02E01

2 Compare the mounting angles of

actual PCBs to those displayed on the
PCB editor, and for the CAD Rotation
of a component having a wrong
mounting angle, select the difference
between the wrong moutning angle
2 and the actual moutning angle from
Project050812S-01E01
the drop-down menu, or directly type
an angle.

 If the mounting angle is correct and requires

no change, check the corresponding Verified
check box.

3 Check whether the angle to be rotated

is correct, and then click on [Yes].

 The mounting angles of all the placement

points where parts of revised data are used
Project050812S-03E01 rotate.
3
 After rotation, the Verified check box is
automatically checked.

4 Click [OK].

 Change of CAD rotation is reflected in PCB.

 If you mark the checkbox of “Show

confirmation dialog when CAD rotation is
changed” in DGS Settings tab of General
Project050812S-04E00
settings, the confirmation window opens. For
4 details, see the next page.

 Choose a desired line and click [Edit Part]

starts up the part editor. You can check 0
degree shape of the component.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-339

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Confirmation dialog displayed when CAD rotation is changed

If you mark the checkbox of “Show confirmation dialog when CAD rotation is changed” in DGS
Settings tab of General settings, the confirmation window appears. About DGS setting,
‘3.2.3 DGS Setting ■About CAD rotation’.

① ‘Apply new product only during CAD Import’ is set in DGS Settings
 The list of PCBs which use changed
components is displayed. After clicking [OK],
the placement angle is reflected to the PCB to
be opened, but it is not reflected to PCBs in
the list.

Project050812S-05E00

② ‘Apply exisitng products also’ is set in the DGS Settings

 PCBs to reflect changes are displayed as a
list. After clicking [OK], the placement angle is
reflected to PCBs to be opened and displayed
in the list.

 When changes are reflected in an existing

PCB, the following dialog box appears if any
PCB in the list is being edited.

Parts060603S-40E00

Project050812S-07E00

[Retry] : Updates a placement angle

again.
[Ignore] : Skips to update a placement
angle of the locked PCB.
[Cancel] : Cancels placement angle update.

Page 5-340 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.14 Starting up the Gerber Converter

1 Choose [Tool]  [Gerber Editor] on

the menu bar.

 For details of the gerber converter, see the

operating manual of ‘Gerber Converter’.
1
 The solder data created on the gerber
Project050814S-01E01
converter is displayed on the PCB after the
gerber converter is saved. You can select
either Show / Hide the solder data from
[Solder Data] of the layer. For details of the
layer, see ‘5.8.2 PCB Edit  Layer display'.

5.8.15 Highlight the Expanded Placements

1 Choose [View]  [Highlight Expanded

Placements] on the menu bar.

 The point (the point changed from the one at

the data creation) that the placement point
1 teaching is carried out after data creation, is
shown in yellow frame.

Project050813S-01E01

5.8.16 Starting up the Support Pin

1 Choose [Tool]  [Support Pin Editor]

on the menu bar.

 For details of support pins, see the following

chapter.
( ‘13.2.5 Setting the Support Pins to the
1 PCB Data’ )
Project050814S-01E01

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-341

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.17 Importing PCB Image

 Importing PCB image
You can display actual PCB images which are imported as a reference when measurement points
or placement points are set.

1
2

2
2
Project050816S-01E00

① ‘Switch Screen’
Switches the screen to be displayed.
[DGS] Switches the screen to DGS.
[Board] Switches the screen to PCB images.

② ‘Board Image’
Displays the setting of PCB image loading.
‘File Name’ Displays a file name selected from [･･･].
[･･･] Select a PCB image.
[Load Image] Loads a selected image.
[Delete Image Deletes a set PCB image.
Reference]

 Button
Button Explanation
Increases/decreases the magnification of a PCB image at the
center of the specified position while it is zoomed in or out.
Increases the magnification of a PCB image
Decreases the magnification of a PCB image.
Increases the magnification of a PCB at the center of the
selected placement point.
Adjusts the magnification to display the entire PCB in the current
window size.
[Reset] Delete all + marks checked on the screen.
[OK] Reflects changes and closes the PCB image import.
[Cancel] Discards changes and closes the PCB image import.
[Apply] Reflects changes.

Page 5-342 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

① Startup of PCB image import

1 Choose [Tool]  [Import Board

Image] on the menu bar.

Project050816S-02E00

 The <Import Board Image> screen opens.

Project050816S-03E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-343

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② PCB image selection

1 Click [Board] of ‘Switch Screen’.

 For a PCB which has no PCB image, the

1 guidance to how to load a PCB image is
displayed on the PCB screen.

Project050816S-03E00

2 Click [･･･].

 The <Open> window opens.

Project050816S-04E00
2

3 Choose a PCB image.

 Available extensions for PCB image are as

follows.
3
.bmp, .jpg, .jpeg

4 Click [Open].

Project050816S-05E00
4

Page 5-344 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5 Click [Load Image].

 The image is loaded and the <Image loading>

window opens.

 See operations on the following page for the

<Image Load> screen.
‘13.2.6 Downloading Support Pin Side
Image  Correcting an image file and ④
Cutting an image file’.

Project050816S-06E00
5

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-345

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

③ Displaying a PCB image on the PCB editor

After a PCB image has been imported, a PCB is displayed as full screen on the DGS screen.
On the <PCB image import> screen, you can adjust the display size of a PCB image as the
reference point is set.

1 Click two corners on the PCB.

 + marks appear on the clicked parts.

1

1
Project050816S-03E00

2 Click [Board] of ‘Switch Screen’.

Project050816S-07E00

3 Click two corners on the PCB image.

3
Project050816S-08E00

Page 5-346 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

4 Click [OK].

 The <Image Import> window closes and the

PCB image is displayed transparently on the
PCB image of the PCB editor.

Project050816S-09E00
4

 For Show / Hide of the PCB image, select from

[Board Layer] of the Top Slide Layer List.

 You can confirm the placement position and

angular displacement using the layer. For how
to confirm PCB using the layer, see below.
‘5.9.3 Confirming Bonding Position and
Angle using Layer’.

Project050816S-10E00

5 Check the PCB image and PCB data.

 You can check displacement of marks /

placement points easily from placement point
search or detail editing.
For search and detail editing, see the
followings.
‘5.8.4 Editing Placement Points ■
Searching for placement points and ■Editing
details’

Project050816S-11E00 Project050816S-12E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-347

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

④ Deleting PCB Image

1 Click [Delete Image Reference].

 The deletion confirmation message appears.

Project050816S-13E00
1

2 Click [Yes].

Project050816S-14E00
2

 The PCB image is deleted.

Project050816S-15E00

Page 5-348 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.18 Saving PCB Data

 Saving PCB Data

1 Choose [File]  [Save] on the menu

bar, or click (Save) on the toolbar.

Project050810S-01E00

 Warning dialog
If an error occurs on the PCB data or mark setting during saving the PCB data, a warning dialog
appears.
Warning dialogs have the following four types;
 PCB data
 PCB outline coordinates
 Template mark
 CAD rotation status
 Designator duplication

① PCB data
A warning dialog is displayed if there is PCB data on neither the front nor back sides of PCB.

PCB data warning dialog

Project050817S-02E00

PCB data setting upon warning

Project050817S-03E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-349

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

② PCB outline coordinates

A warning dialog is displayed for marks and parts located outside of the PCB outline.

PCB outline coordinates warning dialog

Project050817S-04E00 Project050817S-05E00

(If there is no PCB data)

PCB setting upon warning

Project050817S-06E00

③ Template mark
If there is no template mark used for a PCB is not on DGS, a warning dialog appears.

Template mark warning dialog

Project050817S-07E00

Mark setting upon warning

Project050817S-08E00

Page 5-350 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

④ CAD rotation status

A warning dialog is displayed if a part that CAD Rotation has been [Not Verified] yet in PCB.

CAD rotation status warning dialog

Project050817S-09E00

CAD rotation setting upon warning

Project050817S-10E00

⑤ Designator duplication
A warning dialog is displayed if there is a part having the same designator on PCB.

Project050817S-12E00

 Hiding / Showing a dialog box

1 Open [View]  [Warning on Save] on

the menu bar and change check mark
to display a warning dialog.

 The warning display upon PCB editor save is

changed.

 Marking the checkbox of 'Do not show again'

on the warning dialog can change to hide from
the next time.

 All items are checked when initially starting up

the PCB editor.
Project050817S-11E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-351

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Printing the PCB data

1 Choose [File]  [Print] on the menu

bar, or click (Print) on the toolbar.

 The <Print> window opens.

1

Project050810S-03E02

2 Make the setting required for printing.

3 Click [OK].
2
 Printing starts with the selected printer.

Project050810S-05E00 3

 Print setup item

Item Explanation
‘Actual size of layout’ Magnifies an image to 100%.
‘Fit to a single page’ Adjusts the image magnification so that the print range is
displayed in one page.

Page 5-352 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Print preview of the PCB data

1 Choose [File]  [Print Preview] on the

menu bar.

 The print preview window of the selected PCB

editor opens.
1

Project050810S-06E02

2 Choose on the toolbar.

2
 Printing starts with the selected printer.

Project050810S-07E00

 Menu
Toolbar Explanation

Starts printing of the PCB image.

Closes the <Print Preview> window and returns to the <Product Editor> window.

Returns to the previous page.

Goes to the next page.

Zooms in the print preview.

Zooms out the print preview.

Displays the print preview for one page.

Displays the print preview for two pages.

Opens the <Print Setup> window.

Adjusts the image magnification so that the print range is displayed in one page.

Magnifies an image to 100%.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-353

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Printer setup

1 Choose [File]  [Print Setup] on the

menu bar.

 The <Printer Setup> window opens.

Project050810S-20E02

2 Make the setting required for printing.

3 Click [OK].
2
 The <Printer Setup> window closes.

Project050810S-21E00 3

 Exiting the PCB editor

1 Choose [File]  [Exit] on the menu

bar, or click [X] at the upper-right
corner of the <Product Editor>
window.

Project050810S-22E03
1

Page 5-354 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.19 Merging the Bottom Side Data

This is the function to convert the PCB data of bottom side to the top side and arrange in the top
side.

Top side Bottom side Top side

1 Choose the [Manipulate]  [Merge

Bottom side to Top side] on the menu
bar.

 The <Panel Side Merge Options> window

opens.

1
Project050816S-00E01

2 Choose the appropriate bonding point

to mirror.

3 Click [OK].

 The <Panel Side Merge Options> window

2 closes and the bottom side data is merged to
the top side data.
In addition to bonding point, pattern
coordinates, pattern bad mark and pattern
Project050816S-01E00
3
barcode are merged.
New pattern type is automatically created on
the top and the bottom side data is merged in
the data.
The bottom side data is deleted.

 How to mirror
Item Explanation
‘Over X axis’ Mirror at X coordinates of the bottom side and merges.
‘Over Y axis’ Mirror at Y coordinates of the bottom side and merges.
‘As it is’ Merges without mirroring coordinate of the bottom side.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-355

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.20 Reserved placement point

A placement point to which no part is assigned is called a reserved placement point.

Coordinates can be retained even to a reference number that has an assigned part in one BOM
but does not have any assigned part in the other
Example)

CAD data BOM data

X Y Angle Reference No. Reference No. Parts name
10 10 0 REF1 ＋ REF1 1005R
11 11 90 REF2 REF2 QFP
12 13 0 REF3

CAD import

DGS PCB data

X Y Angle Reference No. Parts name
10 10 0 REF1 1005R
11 11 90 REF2 QFP
12 13 0 REF3

 Considerations about reserved placement points

 Reserved placement points are not displayed in the PCB image and placement point list of
the data creation job editor.
 Reserved placement points are not displayed on the machine.
 Reserved placement points are not included in the number of placement points for the PCB
list / data creation job list / PPD manager.

Page 5-356 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 The settings for reserved placement points

1 Click on the pull-down for Part Library

in the Part / Designator.

1 2 Select the blank at the bottom of the

list.

2
3 Click [OK].

Project050819S-00E00
3

 The part library name and the part name are

displayed as blank.

Project050819S-01E00

 Any reserved placement point is displayed as

a + mark.

Project050819S-02E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-357

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Display of reserved placement points

1 Go to the PCB editor menu and check

off [View]  [Reserved Placements].

Project050819S-03E00

 A reserved placement point is displayed as a

yellow mark.

Project050819S-04E00

Page 5-358 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.21 Replace Parts by BOM

1 Select from the menu bar [Tool] 

[Replace parts by BOM].

 The <Replace parts by BOM> window opens.

Project050814S-01E01

1
2 Select the CAD Macro you use.

 Only those CAD Macros with the BOMs

defined are displayed.

3 Select the BOM file you use.

2
3
4 4 Select a replace option.
5

Project050820S-01E00
6 5 Select a product side.

6 Click [OK].

 Replace option
Item Description
‘Delete existing placements and Overwrites with a Parts Name defined in BOM. Any reference
import’ number not defined in BOM serves as a reserved placement
point.
‘Merge-Overwrite conflict(s)’ Overwrites with a Parts Name defined in BOM. Any reference
number not defined in BOM remains unchanged as existing
PCB data.
‘Merge-Skip conflict(s)’ Overwrites only reserved placement points with Parts Name
defined in BOM.

 Product side
Item Description
‘Current Side’ Replaces only the side being edited.
‘Both Sides’ Replaces both sides.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-359

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

 Placement points are replaced, and any

reserved placement point is displayed as a +
mark.

 For information on reserved placement points,

see ‘5.8.20 Reserved Placement Point’.

Project050819S-02E00

Page 5-360 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

5.8.22 Scattering LED Components

On the LED display, if LED components having the same illuminance are adjacently located, the
difference in brightness may stand out. To eliminate such conditions, this function enables you to
split specified LED components and scatter them so that they are not adjacently located.

1 Select from the menu bar [Tool] 

[Led Scattering].

 The < Led Scattering> window opens.

Project050819S-09E00 1

2 Select a component to be split /

scattered.

3 Type the number of partitions.

3 2
 The component is split into the number you
2 entered. After it is split, ‘- + number’ is added
to the original name of the component.
Ex.) LED component name: LED_Parts
Number of partitions: 6
In above case, six components of
‘LED_Parts-1’, ‘LED_Parts-2’, ‘LED_Parts-3’,
‘LED_Parts-4’, ‘LED_Parts-5’ and
4 ‘LED_Parts-6’ are newly created by copying
Project050819S-10E0
5 ‘LED_Parts’.

4 Select Scattering Method.

 When ‘Auto’ is selected, placement points of

the specified LED component are
automatically scattered based on the number
of partitions.
 When ‘User Order’ is selected, placement
points are scattered according to the rule set
on the LED component scattering template.
For details, see ‘■ LED component scattering
– User specified.

5 Click [OK].

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-361

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

6 Check an image of the LED scattering

result.

7 Click [OK].

Project050819S-11E00
7

8 Confirm the completion of LED

scattering.

Project050819S-12E00

 LED scattering – User specified

Show the table of specified ‘partitions’ x ‘partitions’. You can create template if you want to.

 Clicking a cell will add ‘1’ to the number in the

cell, and its background color changes.
Ex.)

2 3
Click

Project050819S-13E00

Page 5-362 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.8 Editing PCBs

Item Description
Shuffle Automatically create a template using random numbers.
Import Displays a file selection dialog.
After a file is selected, the template data is imported.
For how to format a file to be imported, see '■Template file format'.
Export Exports the created template.
For how to format a file to be exported, see '■Template file format'.

 Template file format

Format of a template file is a simple text file as below.

Project050819S-14E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-363

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.9 Searching for PCBs

5.9 Searching for PCBs

5.9.1 Search
The PCBs that have been searched for are displayed in the PCB list.

1 Choose PCB in ‘Search.’

2 Choose the search method.

 The following search items are available: [All],

[Product Name], [Part Name], [Creation Date],
1 and [Modification Date].

Project050901S-01E03

3 Click [Go].

 The search starts, and the PCBs searched for

are displayed in the PCB list.

Project050901S-02E05

Page 5-364 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.9 Searching for PCBs

 Search method
Item Explanation
[All] Displays all registered PCBs.
[Product Name] Enters a part of the PCB name. Displays PCBs whose name
includes entered characters.
Clicking enables you to select previous search history.
The search history can be deleted from the text box by
selecting the right-click menu.
[Part Name] Enters a part library and a part of the part name. Displays
PCBs which have the entered part library and part name.
Clicking enables you to select the search history.
The search history can be deleted from the text box by
selecting the right-click menu.
[Creation Date] Specifies ‘From Date’ and ‘To Date’ of the creation date. PCBs
created within the range of ‘From Date’ to ‘To Date’ are
displayed.
[Modification Date] Specifies ‘From Date’ and ‘To Date’ of the update date. PCBs
updated within the range of ‘From Date’ to ‘To Date’ are
displayed.

[Product Name] selected [Part Name] selected [Creation Date] selected [Modification Date] selected

Project050901S-03E02 Project050901S-04E03 Project050901S-05E02 Project050901S-06E02

 Deleting search history

1 Click the text field and select [Clear

History Item]  [Current Selection] or
[All] from the right-click menu.
[Current Deletes the selected search
Selection]: history displayed in the text box.
[All]: Deletes all search history in the
Project050901S-07E00 pull-down menu.

1  Search history can be deleted only when [PCB

name] or [Part name] are selected.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-365

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.9 Searching for PCBs

5.9.2 Label Search

Labels are given to each PCB and used for searching.

 Creating new labels

1 Choose [Label]  [New Label] on the

menu bar or [New Label] on the
right-click menu displayed over the
1 PCB list.

 The <Define New Label> window opens.

Project050902S-01E04

2 Click .

2
Project050902S-02E00

3 Choose a desired color on the pallet

and click [OK].

3
3

Project050902S-03E00

4 Type ‘Label Name’.

 If an already registered label name is entered,

the confirmation dialog box appears.

4
5 Click [OK].
Project050902S-04E00
5

Page 5-366 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.9 Searching for PCBs

 The new label is saved and it is added under

Label.

Project050902S-05E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-367

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.9 Searching for PCBs

 Affixing labels

1 Choose a PCB to affix a label to from

the PCB editor.

2
2 Choose [Label]  [Assign Label] on
1
the menu bar, click on the
toolbar, or choose [New Label] on the
right-click menu displayed over the
PCB list.

 The <Apply Existing Label> window opens.

Project050902S-06E00

3 Choose a label.

4 Click [OK].
3
 The label is affixed to the selected PCB.

Project050902S-06E00
4

Page 5-368 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.9 Searching for PCBs

 Removing labels

1 Choose the PCB from which a label is

removed from the PCB editor.

2 2 Choose [Label]  [Un-Label] on the

1 menu bar.

 The <Un-Label> window opens.

Project050902S-08E00

3 Choose a label.

4 Click [OK].
3
 The confirmation dialog opens.

Project050902S-08E00
4

5 Click [Yes].

 The label is removed from the PCB.

Project050902S-09E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-369

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.9 Searching for PCBs

 Managing labels

1 Choose [Label]  [Label

Management] on the menu bar, or
click on the toolbar.
1
 The <Labels:> window opens.

Project050902S-10E04

2 To change or delete an existing label,

choose a label and then click [Edit] or
[Delete].

2
3 To newly create a label, click [New].
3 2 2

4 Click [OK].

 The <Labels:> window closes.

Project050902S-12E02
4

Page 5-370 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.9 Searching for PCBs

5.9.3 Confirming Bonding Position and Angle using Layer

Using the layer and display function, you can confirm imported PCBs, the placement position of
the PCB data and angle. The following describes the confirmation method by taking an example
of using the solder data layer.

1 Choose [View]  [Layers] on the

menu bar.

 The <Layer List> window opens.

Project050903S-01E00

2 Choose a desired layer to display from

the <Layer List> window.

 The selected layer is displayed on the PCB

image display area.
2

Project050903S-02E00

3 Choose [Edit]  [Find Step(s)] on the

menu bar or use an icon of the screen
display control area to display the
3 3 location where you want to confirm.

 About searching placement points, see

‘5.8.4 Editing Placement Points ■Searching
for placement points’.

Project050903S-03E00

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-371

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.9 Searching for PCBs

4 Confirm the PCB data.

 To check more detailed position, change the

data to be displayed from the display menu.
‘5.8.2 PCB Edit ■Parts drawing, ■
Dispensing position, ■Displaying the first pin
position’

Project050903S-04E00

Project050903S-05E00

Page 5-372 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.9 Searching for PCBs

5.9.4 List for Determination of the First Pin

Determination of the first pin position differs depending on a polarity mark position and number of
leads.

Lead type Polarity mark Polarity mark Lead setting Determination of first pin position
position
Lead Line / Notch A polarity mark One lead is set to the The first pin is set to the lead on
component exists on the same same side as the polarity the side where the polarity mark
side as lead. mark. exists.

More than one lead is set No determination of the first pin is

to the same side as the made.
polarity mark.

There is no polarity More than one lead is set The first pin is set to the rightmost
mark on the same to the left side viewed from lead on the left side (where leads
side as the lead. the polarity mark. have been already set) viewed
from the polarity mark.

Less than one lead is set No determination of the first pin is

to the left side viewed from made.
the polarity mark.

Dot A polarity mark (top / A lead exists on the same The first pin is set to the lead
bottom / left / right side as the polarity mark. located at the center on the side
mark position) exists where the polarity mark exists.
on the same side as
the lead.

There is no polarity More than one lead is set The first pin is set to the rightmost
mark (top / bottom / to the left side viewed from lead on the left side where lead
left / right mark the polarity mark. have been already set.
position) on the
same side as the
lead.

Less than one lead is set No determination of the first pin is

to the left side viewed from made.
the polarity mark.

EJS9AE-MB-05P-25 Page 5-373

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
5.9 Searching for PCBs

Lead type Polarity mark Polarity mark Lead setting Calculation of first pin position
position
Lead Dot A polarity mark (top More than one lead is set The first pin is set to the rightmost
component left / top right / to the left side viewed from lead on the left side (where leads
bottom left / bottom the polarity mark. have been already set) viewed
right) is set to the from the polarity mark.
position adjacent to
both sides that leads
exist.

There is no lead on the left The first pin is set to the leftmost
side but the lead is set on lead on the right side (where
the right side viewed from leads have been already set)
the polarity mark. viewed from the polarity mark.

A polarity mark (top There is no lead on two No determination of the first pin is
left / top right / sides adjacent to the made.
bottom left / bottom polarity mark corner.
right) is set.

Ball component Dot A polarity mark (top More than one ball is set or The first pin is set to the ball
left / top right / there is no ball missing to located on the nearest corner
bottom left / bottom be set. from the polarity mark in ball
right) is set. group.

More than one ball is set or The first pin is set to the ball
ball missing is set. located on the nearest corner
from the polarity mark excluding
the balls that are set as missing
balls.

A polarity mark (top All balls setting. No determination of the first pin is
/bottom / left / right) made.
is set.

Line / Notch All mark position All balls setting. No determination of the first pin is
made.

Page 5-374 EJS9AE-MB-05P-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual

6. COMPONENT DATA EDIT

This chapter describes how to add and edit the part library and component data.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-1

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview

6.1 Overview
Component shapes, supply methods, and machine’s motion parameters are defined in
component data. You can categorize and manage component data using the part library.
You can also display the component data in a list and launch, create, copy, delete, and search the
editor application using Part Manager.

6.1.1 Launching Part Manager

To start Part Manager, click [Part Manager] on the application launcher at the lower left of the
screen.

Parts060101S-01E00

Page 6-2 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview

6.1.2 Part Manager Screen Configuration

1
2
2
2

3
2

5
2

4
2

Parts060102S-01E01

No. Name Explanation

 Menu bar Shows each menu.
 Toolbar Shows icons for each operation.
 Library tree display area Shows parts library as a tree.
Component list search Shows component search items.

area
Component list display Shows a list of component data.

area

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-3

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview

 About library tree display area

Parts060102S-02E00

The parts library has the master parts library and the line parts library which is used in the
production data already output to each line.

 Master parts library

This is used when the production data is created in the data creation job. It is common to each
line.

 Line parts library

The component data that once output as the production data is registered. The data is individually
managed per line and the data in the line parts library is used for the actual production data. The
data modified in the machine or by the LWS/PPD editor is reflected to the line parts library.

Selecting each library displayed under the master parts library displays the component lists
belonging to the library in the component list display area.
Selecting ‘Master parts library’ displays the all components list of the master parts library in the
component list display area.

An actual line is displayed under the line parts library.

Selecting each library under the actual line, the component lists belonging to the library are
displayed in the component list display area.
Selecting the each actual line displays all component lists used in the line are displayed in the
component list display area.

Page 6-4 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview

 Menu (When selecting All Parts Library or Line Parts Library)

Menu bar Toolbar Right-click menu Explanation
[File]
[Open] [Open] Opens the part editor.
[Edit]
Copies the selected component. (Valid only
[Copy] [Copy]
when a single component is selected)
Overwrites the existing component with the
[Paste Data] [Paste Data]
copied component.
Compares from the selected components.
[Compare] － [Compare] (Valid only when several components are
selected)

[Delete Part] [Delete] Deletes the selected component.

[Batch Edit]
Opens the batch edit window. (Valid only when
[Basic]  [Basic]
two or more components are selected)
Sets the tolerance of component size.
[Tolerance]  [Tolerance]
( Recognition option data ‘2.3 Tolerance’)
[Brightness
[Brightness Check Adds bright check option for judging sides of a
Check for 
for flip-flop] component and detects its sides.
flip-flop]
[Center Adds center position check option.
[Center Position
Position  ( Recognition option data ‘4.4.7 Center
Check]
Check] Position Check’)
[Rotation Adds rotation check option. ( Recognition
 [Rotation Check]
Check] option data ‘4.4.6 Rotation Check’)
Add surrounding check option.
[Surrounding [Surrounding
 ( Recognition option data ‘4.4.10 Part
Check] Check]
Surrounding Adhesion Check’)
[Batch Delete]
Deletes the tolerances of component size.
[Tolerance]  [Tolerance]
( Recognition option data ‘2.3 Tolerance’)
[Brightness [Brightness
 Deletes the brightness check option.
Check] Check]
[Center Deletes the center position check option. (
[Center Position
Position  Recognition option data ‘4.4.7 Center Position
Check]
Check] Check’)
Deletes the rotation check option.
[Rotation
 [Rotation Check] ( Recognition option data ‘4.4.6 Rotation
Check]
Check’)
Deletes the surrounding check option.
[Surrounding [Surrounding
 ( Recognition option data ‘4.4.10 Part
Check] Check]
Surrounding Adhesion Check’)
[CM/DT
[CM/DT Machine
Machine  Deletes CM/DT machine-specific information.
Information]
Information]
[CM [CM Reference] Deletes the component shape settings using

Reference] CM reference.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-5

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview

Menu bar Toolbar Right-click menu Explanation

[Batch Delete]
[Inspection
 [Inspection Data] Deletes the inspection data link.
Data]
[Recommended [Recommended Opens the setup window for recommended
value batch  value batch values. (Valid only when two or more
setting] setting] components are selected)
Outputs component data to a file. (Valid only
  [Export]
when a single component is selected)
[Teach Complete]
Sets a teach complete flag for the selected
[Necessary]
  component.
[Not Removes a teach complete flag from the
Necessary] selected component.
Sets/resets an NPI flag for the selected
  [NPI Flag]
component.
[Display]

[Update]  Displays the component list again.

Changes the item or the order to be displayed in

[Choose Details...]  
the component list.

Page 6-6 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview

 Menu (When the master parts library is selected)

Menu bar Toolbar Right-click menu Explanation
[File]

[New Part] [New] Creates a new component.

Newly creates the data using an image

[New by Camera
  captured by the offline camera unit.
Image]
( Operating instruction Offline Camera Unit)
[New creation Newly creates the data using an image
  using a camera captured by the offline camera unit.
image] ( Operating instruction Offline Camera Unit)
Creates new data using the scanned image.
[New by Scan
  ( ‘11 Recognition Data Creation Using
Image]
Scanner’)
Creates data using the scanned image.
[Edit with Scan
  ( ‘11 Recognition Data Creation Using
Image]
Scanner’)
[New Part Library]   Creates a new part library.
[Export]  [Export] Outputs the component data to a file.
[Export All Parts in Outputs data for all components registered in
 
Library] the selected part library to a file.
[CSV Output]   Outputs component data in CSV format.
[Open] [Open] Opens the part editor.
[Edit]

[Copy] [Copy] Copies the selected component.

[Paste New] [Paste New] Creates a new name for the copied component.

Overwrites the existing component with the

[Paste Data] [Paste Data]
copied component.
Compares from the selected components.
[Compare] － [Compare] (Valid only when several components are
selected)
[Rename]  [Rename] Renames the component name.

[Delete Part] [Delete] Deletes the selected component.

[Rename Part
  Renames the part library.
Library]
[Delete Part
  Deletes the part library.
Library]
[Proved]  [Proved] Regards the selected component as verified.
Sets/resets an NPI flag for the selected
  [NPI Flag]
component.
[Teach Complete]
Sets a teach complete flag for the selected
[Necessary]
  component.
[Not Removes a teach complete flag from the
Necessary] selected component.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-7

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview

Menu bar Toolbar Right-click menu Explanation

[Batch edit]
Opens the batch edit window. (Valid only when
[Basic]  [Basic]
two or more components are selected)
Sets the tolerance of component size.
[Tolerance]  [Tolerance]
( Recognition option data ‘2.3 Tolerance’)
[Brightness
[Brightness Check Adds bright check option for judging sides of a
Check for 
for flip-flop] component and detects its sides.
flip-flop]
Adds center position check option.
[Center Position [Center Position
 ( Recognition option data ‘4.4.7 Center
Check] Check]
Position Check’)
Adds rotation check option. ( Recognition
[Rotation Check]  [Rotation Check]
option data ‘4.4.6 Rotation Check’)
Add surrounding check option.
[Surrounding [Surrounding
 ( Recognition option data ‘4.4.10 Part
Check] Check]
Surrounding Adhesion Check’)
[Batch Delete]
Deletes the tolerances of component size.
[Tolerance]  [Tolerance]
( Recognition option data ‘2.3 Tolerance’)
[Brightness [Brightness
 Deletes the brightness check option.
Check] Check]
Deletes the center position check option. (
[Center Position [Center Position
 Recognition option data ‘4.4.7 Center Position
Check] Check]
Check’)
Deletes the rotation check option.
[Rotation Check]  [Rotation Check] ( Recognition option data ‘4.4.6 Rotation
Check’)
Deletes the surrounding check option.
[Surrounding [Surrounding
 ( Recognition option data ‘4.4.10 Part
Check] Check]
Surrounding Adhesion Check’)
[CM/DT Machine [CM/DT Machine
 Deletes CM/DT machine-specific information.
Information] Information]
[Inspection Data]  [Inspection Data] Deletes the inspection data link.
[Recommended Opens the setup window for recommended
[Recommended
 value batch values. (Valid only when two or more
value batch setting]
setting] components are selected)
[Copy Inspection [Copy Inspection Copies the inspection data about selected

Data] Data] parts.
[Paste Inspection [Paste Inspection Overwrites existing parts data with copied

Data] Data] inspection data.
[View]

[Refresh]  Refreshes the component list.

Changes the item or the order to be displayed in

[Choose Details..]  
the component list.

Page 6-8 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview

Menu bar Toolbar Right-click menu Explanation

[Label]
[New Label]  [New Label] Creates a new label.

[Assign Label] [Assign Label] Affixes a label to the selected component.

Removes the label from the selected

[Remove label]  
component.

[Manage label]   Adds/Deletes labels.

[Replacement parts]
[Add Substitute [Add Substitute
 Adds substitute components.
Part] Part]
[Remove
  Deletes substitute components.
Substitute Part]
[Show Substitute
  Displays a substitute component.
Part]
[Import]   Imports a substitute component.
[Export]   Exports a substitute component.
[Import]
Imports component data from the production
[Import Parts]  
data.
Based on copy source data described in a
[Import Mapped
  specified file, copies existing data in DGS to
Parts]
create a component.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-9

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview

 Menu (When selecting any number in Line Parts Library)

Menu bar Toolbar Right-click menu Explanation
[File]
[CSV Output]   Outputs parts data in CSV format.

[Open] [Open] Displays the component editor

[Export]  [Export] Outputs the component data to a file.

[Export All Parts in Outputs data for all components registered in
 
Library] the selected part library to a file.
[Edit]

[Copy] [Copy] Copies the selected component

[Paste [Paste
Overwrites the component to the existing data.
(overwrite)] (overwrite)]

[Paste New] [Paste New] Creates a new name for the copied component.

Compares from the selected components.

[Compare] － [Compare] (Valid only when several components are
selected)
Sets/resets an NPI flag for the selected
－ － [NPI Flag]
component.
[Delete
[Delete] Deletes the selected component
components]
[Teach Complete]
Sets a teach complete flag for the selected
[Necessary]
  component.
[Not Removes a teach complete flag from the
Necessary] selected component.
[Batch edit]
Displays the batch edit window. (Enabled only
[Basic]  [Basic]
when multiple components are selected)
Sets the tolerance component size.
[Tolerance]  [Tolerance]
( Recognition option data ‘2.3 Tolerance’)
[Brightness
[Brightness Check Adds bright check option for judging sides of a
Check for 
for flip-flop] component and detects its sides.
flip-flop]
[Center Adds center position check option.
[Center Position
Position  ( Recognition option data ‘4.4.7 Center
Check]
Check] Position Check’)
[Rotation Adds rotation check option. ( Recognition
 [Rotation Check]
Check] option data ‘4.4.6 Rotation Check’)
Add surrounding check option.
[Surrounding [Surrounding
 ( Recognition option data ‘4.4.10 Part
Check] Check]
Surrounding Adhesion Check’)
[Recommended [Recommended Opens the setup window for recommended
value batch  value batch values. (Valid only when two or more
setting] setting] components are selected)
[Update to Master Updates to the parts data under the same name
 
Part Library] in the master parts library.

Page 6-10 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview

Menu bar Toolbar Right-click menu Explanation

[Bath Delete]
Deletes the tolerances of component size.
[Tolerance]  [Tolerance]
( Recognition option data ‘2.3 Tolerance’)
[Brightness [Brightness
 Deletes the brightness check option.
Check] Check]
[Center Deletes the center position check option.
[Center Position
Position  ( Recognition option data ‘4.4.7 Center
Check]
Check] Position Check’)
Deletes the rotation check option.
[Rotation
 [Rotation Check] ( Recognition option data ‘4.4.6 Rotation
Check]
Check’)
Deletes the surrounding check option.
[Surrounding [Surrounding
 ( Recognition option data ‘4.4.10 Part
Check] Check]
Surrounding Adhesion Check’)
[CM/DT
[CM/DT Machine
Machine  Deletes CM/DT machine-specific information.
Information]
Information]
[Inspection
 [Inspection Data] Deletes the inspection data link.
Data]
[Display]

[Update]  Displays the component list again.

Changes the item or the order to be displayed in

[Choose Details...]  
the component list.
[Replacement parts]
[Add Substitute [Add Substitute
 Adds substitute components.
Part] Part]
[Remove
  Deletes substitute components.
Substitute Part]
[Show Substitute
  Displays a substitute component.
Part]
[Import]   Imports a substitute component.
[Export]   Exports a substitute component.
[Import]
Imports component data from the production
[Import Parts]  
data.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-11

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview
 Display item
Item Explanation
‘Proved’ Flags that identify if the component data is verified/unchecked.
(Displays only in the master component library)
‘Download’ Shows that these are components used in the downloading
production data. (Shows only in the line part library)
: Used in the downloading production data. (Shows in
green)
: Used in the downloading production data. They are
modified after downloaded. (Shows in orange)
To reflect changes, re-download again.
‘Part Name’ Shows the component name.
‘Parts library’ Displays the part library name.
‘CM/DT’ Shows with icon whether the part is enable to use in the
CM/DT machine, or whether it is recognized by CM reference.
‘Description’ Shows the explanations being set.
‘Physical Class’ Shows the component shape.
‘Functional Class’ Shows the component type.
‘L’ Shows the component length.
Component length
‘W’ Shows the component width.
Component width
‘T’ Shows the component height.
Component height
‘Supply Kind’ Shows the component supply type.
‘Creation date’ Shows the date when the component data was created.
‘Update date’ Shows the date when the component data was updated.
‘Dispense’ Shows whether or not to set the dispensing data with icon.
‘Insert’ Shows an icon to indicate whether or not the component is
available on the insertion machine (NPM-VF).
‘REF’ Shows the CM REF number.
‘Supply type’ Shows the supply type of a component.
‘Tape material’ Shows the tape material.
‘Tape width’ Shows the tape width.
‘Tape pitch’ Shows the tape feed pitch.
‘Reel size’ Shows the reel size.
‘Components’ Shows the number of components contained in one
component supply package.
‘Supply angle’ Shows the supply angle.
‘Stop due to pickup error’ Shows the action at the time of pickup error.
‘Pickup Error Setting’ Shows which action you will use, component shortage error
stop or pickup error stop, in the event of a pickup error.
‘Stop due to recog error’ Shows the action at the time of recognition error.
‘Polarity’ Shows whether or not to exist polarity on a component.
‘Nozzle’ Shows the using nozzle type.
‘Vacuum sensor placement Shows whether or not to check placement using the vacuum
check’ sensor.
‘Vacuum sensor pickup check’ Shows whether or not to check pickup using the vacuum
sensor.
‘Pickup gap’ Shows the distance between a component and a nozzle during
pickup.
‘Placement gap’ Shows the distance between bottom side of the component
and the top side of the PCB during placement.
‘Luminosity check’ Shows whether or not to check component luminosity.

Page 6-12 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview

Item Explanation
‘Teach Complete’ Displays an icon to show whether Teach is necessary on the
machine.
: Parts for which Teach became necessary in connection
with editing or other operations as a result of recognition
testing, or parts for which Teach is necessary on the
machine. Or parts that necessity of Teach is unknown.
No icon : Parts for which Teach has been finished on the
machine or the ones for which Teach is unnecessary.
‘Lighting’ Shows a lighting mode.
‘Pickup Speed’ Shows the speed at which components are picked up.
‘Mount Speed’ Shows the speed at which components are placed.
‘Pickup hold time’ Shows the time during which the head is kept lowered for
pickup.
‘Mount hold time’ Shows the time during which the head is kept lowered for
placement.
‘Camera’ Shows a camera used for component recognition.
‘Recog Speed’ Shows a component recognition speed.
‘Recog Height’ Shows the height at which components are recognized.
‘Number of Scans’ Shows the number of scans during component recognition.
‘Placement angle recognition’ Shows whether to recognize components at a placement angle
or not.
‘Automatic Height Measure Shows whether or not to carry out the automatic height
(cushion end sensor)’ measurement in pickup.
‘Automatic Height Measure at Shows whether to automatically measure the height during tape
splicing’ splicing or not.
‘Auto Height Measure (Height Shows whether or not to carry out the automatic height
Sensor)’ measurement in pickup.
‘Height Measure Gap’ Shows the offset for the height at which components are actually
picked up.
‘3D Mount Gap’ Shows the distance between the underside of the upper
component and the lower component during 3D placement.
‘Pickup angle’ Shows a nozzle rotation angle upon pickup.
‘Gang Pickup’ Shows whether to allow or disallow simultaneous pickup.
‘Pickup Position Learning’ Shows whether to learn and automatically adjust the pickup
position or not.
‘Pickup Shift Tolerance’ Shows an acceptable amount of the pickup position
displacement.
‘Pickup before Inspection’ Shows whether to continuously pick up components or not
during placement while the inspection head of the opposite head
inspects components.
‘Mount Load’ Shows a load applied to a component upon mounting.
‘Mount Motion’ Shows the nozzle lowering motion upon mount.
‘Wait Before Mount’ Machine will wait defined milliseconds (0 to 1000) before moving
nozzle down for mounting. This is used for better accuracy.
‘Discard to’ Shows the place where components are ejected.
‘Parts Empty Count’ Shows the number of retries when the pickup error setting is set
to [Parts Empty Stop].
‘Pickup Error Count’ Shows the number of retries when the pickup error setting is set
to [Pickup Error Stop].
‘Recognition Error Count’ Shows the number of retries when the recognition error stop is
set to [Set Count].

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-13

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview

Item Explanation
‘Thickness Measure’ Shows whether to measure the component thickness or not.
‘Thickness Upper Limit’ Shows upper-limit of the component thickness.
‘Thickness Lower Limit’ Shows lower-limit of the component thickness.
‘Thickness Measure Timing’ Shows whether to detect the component tombstoning or not.
‘Advance Feeding’ Shows whether tape is fed before the start of pickup operation.
‘Pickup Position Auto Teach’ Shows whether to automatically adjust the pickup position o not.
‘Pickup Position Auto Teach Shows whether the pickup position auto teach (splicing) is
(splicing)’ performed.
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Shows the feed rate of the feeder.
‘Action After Splice Detection’ Shows an action during splicing detection.
‘Advance Feed Count’ Shows the number of feeds at one time.
‘Eject Height’ Shows the level of the placement surface.
‘Lift Speed’ Shows the speed of the tray lifter.
‘Pull Axis Speed’ Shows the speed at which the tray is pulled out.
‘Tray Position Recognition’ Shows whether the tray position is recognized.
‘Transfer’ Shows whether to carry out a transcript action or not.
‘Transfer Load’ Shows the transcript load when the transcript unit is used.
‘Transfer Height’ Shows its height above the transcript unit during transcription.
‘Squeegee Gap’ Shows the squeegee gap.
‘Transfer Time’ Shows the time during transcript.
‘Transfer Speed’ Shows the speed upon transcript.
‘Transfer Mode’ Shows the transfer order.
‘Pickup Position’ Shows the amount of displacement in X / Y directions from the
normal pickup position and the height of the pickup surface
above the normal pickup position.
‘Tolerance’ Shows the tolerance.
‘Lamp Offset’ Shows the lamp offset value.
‘Brightness Check Count’ Shows the number of brightness checks.
‘Brightness Check Window’ Shows the brightness check value.
‘Center Position Check’ Shows the center position check value.
‘Rotation Check’ Shows the rotation check value.
‘Surrounding Check’ Shows the surrounding check.
‘Shape Code’ Shows the shape code.
‘NPI’ Show the NPI flag.

Page 6-14 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.1 Overview

 Customizing the display item

Selecting [View]  [Choose Details...] or right-clicking on the header and select [Others] can
change items to be displayed or the display order in the component list.

Parts060102S-03E01

Item Explanation
[Move Up] Moves the item to the top of the list.
[Move Down] Moves the item to the bottom of the list.
[Show] Shows the item.
[Hide] Hides the item.
However, ‘Part Name’ cannot be hidden.
[Select All] Shows all items.
[Unselect All] Hides all items except for ‘Part Name’.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-15

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.2 Adding New Part Library

6.2 Adding New Part Library

The component data can be categorized and managed using the part library.

 Defining the new library

3 Choose [File]  [New Part Library] on

the menu bar.

 The <New Part Library> window opens.

Parts060200S-01E05

4 Type a new library name.

 The following characters cannot be used.

% ” space , full-width

2  Complied with the PT200 rule.

Parts060200S-02E00
3 5 Click [OK].

 The new component library is added to the

dropdown menu.

 If ‘Standard Parts’ is selected from the

dropdown menu of the part library, the
standard component data registered in
advance will be displayed.

Page 6-16 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.2 Adding New Part Library

 Deleting the part library

1 Choose [Edit]  [Delete Part Library]

on the menu bar.

 The <Delete Part Library> window opens.

Parts060200S-03E06

2 Choose the desired part library.

3 Click [OK].

 The selected part library is deleted.

Parts060200S-04E00
3

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-17

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.2 Adding New Part Library

 Renaming the part library name

1 Choose [Edit]  [Rename Part

Library] on the menu bar.

 The <Rename Part Library> window opens.

Parts060200S-05E06

2 Choose the desired part library.

3 Type a new part library name.

2

3
4 Click [OK].

 The selected part library is renamed to the

Parts060200S-06E01 new part library name.
4

Page 6-18 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.3 Searching for Components

6.3 Searching for Components

The components that have been searched for are displayed in the component list.

6.3.1 Component Search Method

1 Choose the component library to

search for.

2 Choose the search method.

1

Parts060301S-01E00

3 Click [Go].

 The components searched for are displayed in

the component list.

Parts060102S-01E01

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-19

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.3 Searching for Components

 Search method
Item Explanation
[All] Displays all components registered in the selected part library.
[Part Name] Enters a part of the component name. Components with the
input characters in their names are displayed.
Clicking can be input from the search history.
You can delete the search history from the text box by clicking
the right-click menu.
[Description] Enters a fragment of a description. Components with
description of which includes the characters entered are
displayed.
Clicking can be input from the search history.
You can delete the search history from the text box by clicking
the right-click menu.
[Physical Class] Displays components of the selected shape.
[Functional Class] Displays components of the selected type.
[Product] / [Recipe] Displays components used in the specified PCB (production
data for the line parts library).
[Shape Code] Enters a part of the shape code. Components with the input
characters in their shape code are displayed.
Clicking can be input from the search history.
You can delete the search history from the text box by clicking
the right-click menu.
[Creation Date] Specifies ‘Start date’ and ‘End date’ of the creation date.
Components whose date falls between the specified ‘Start
date’ and ‘End date’ are displayed.
[Update Date] Specifies ‘Start date’ and ‘End date’ of the update date.
Components whose date falls between the specified ‘Start
date’ and ‘End date’ are displayed.
[Custom Query] Advanced search

[Part Name] selected [Description] selected [Physical Class] selected

Parts060301S-03E02 Parts060301S-08E01 Parts060301S-04E01

[Functional Class] selected [Product] selected [Recipe] selected

Parts060301S-05E01 Parts060301S-07E01 Parts060301S-06E01

[Shape Code] selected [Creation Date] selected [Modification Date] Selected

Parts060301S-10E00 Parts060301S-12E00
Parts060301S-11E00

Page 6-20 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.3 Searching for Components

[Custom Query] selected

Parts060302S-05E01

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-21

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.3 Searching for Components

 Deleting search history

1 Click the text field and select [Clear

History Item]  [Current Selection] or
[All] from the right-click menu.
[Current Deletes the selected search
Selection]: history displayed in the text box.
Parts060301S-09E00
[All]: Deletes all search history in the
1 pull-down menu.

 Search history can be deleted only when [Part

name] or [Description] are selected.

Page 6-22 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.3 Searching for Components

6.3.2 Custom Search

 Creating new search conditions

1 Choose [Custom Query].

1 2 Click [New…].

2  The <Custom Part Query Builder> window

opens.

Parts060302S-05E00

3 Type ‘Search Label.’

3 4 Specify ‘Query Condition.’

5 Click [Save] or [Save and Close].

 The search condition is saved.

4

Parts060302S-02E01

5 5

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.3 Searching for Components

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Search Label’ Enters the search condition name.
‘Query Condition’
‘Part Field’ Specifies the search criteria.
‘Operator’ Specifies the search criteria and condition value.
‘Value’ Enters a value according to the search criteria.
‘Logical’ Specifies AND/OR in accordance with other search conditions.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Remove] Clears the selected row.
[Test] Displays the number of searches made under the specified
search condition in the test result area.
[Clear] Clears all search conditions.
[Save] Saves the search condition.
[Save and Close] Saves the search condition and closes the window.
[Close] Closes the window.

 [Test]
Displays the number of searches made under the specified search condition in the test result
area.

1 From the pull-down menu, select a

parts library that you run a query test
on.

 As the parts library on initial startup, a parts

library that was being selected while opening
the custom search is designed to be selected.
2

2 Click [Test].

1
Parts060302S-08E00

 In the testing results area, search results,

obtained under the set query conditions, are
shown.

Parts060302S-09E00

Page 6-24 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.3 Searching for Components

 Editing search conditions

1 Click [Custom Query].

1
2 Choose the desired search condition.
2
3
3 Click [Edit…].

 The <Custom Part Query Builder> window

opens.
Parts060302S-05E00

4 Change the desired item.

5 Click [Save] or [Save and Close].

 The search condition is saved.

4

Parts060302S-04E02

5 5

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-25

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.3 Searching for Components

 Deleting search conditions

6 Choose [Custom Query].

1
7 Choose the desired search condition.
2
3
8 Click [Delete].

 The confirmation dialog opens.

Parts060302S-05E00

9 Click [Yes].

 The search condition is deleted.

Parts060302S-06E01
4

Parts060302S-07E00

Page 6-26 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.3 Searching for Components

6.3.3 Label Search

You can label on a component. Labeled components can be used for a condition of Custom
Query.

 Creating new labels

1 Choose [Label]  [New Label] on the

menu bar or [New Label] on the
1 right-click menu displayed over the
component list.

 The <Define New Label> window opens.

Parts060303S-01E01

2 Click .

2
Parts060303S-02E01

3 Choose your desired color on the

displayed palette and then click [OK].

Parts060303S-13E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-27

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.3 Searching for Components

4 Enter ‘Label Name’.

5 Click [OK].
4
Parts060303S-14E00  The <Define New Label> window closes.
5

 If the label name you entered has already

registered, the following confirmation dialog
appears.

Parts060303S-15E00

[Yes]: Overwrites the name with the set label

color.
[No]: Discards change of the label.

Page 6-28 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.3 Searching for Components

 Affixing labels to components

1 Choose the desired component in the

component list.

2
1
2 Choose [Label]  [Assign Label] on
the menu bar, click (Assign
Label) on the toolbar, or choose
[Assign Label] on the right-click menu
displayed over the selected
component.

 The <Apply Existing Label> window opens.

Parts060303S-04E02

3 Choose a label.

4 Click [OK].
3
 The label is affixed to the selected component.

Parts060303S-06E00
4

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-29

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.3 Searching for Components

 Removing labels from components

1 Choose the desired component in the

component list.

2
1
2 Choose [Label]  [Un-Label] on the
menu bar.

 The <Un-Label> window opens.

Parts060303S-07E02

3 Choose a label.

4 Click [OK].
3
 The confirmation dialog asking whether to
remove the label opens.

Parts060303S-08E00
4

5 Click [Yes].

 The label is removed from the component.

Parts060303S-09E02

Page 6-30 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.3 Searching for Components

 Managing labels
Adds, edits and deletes labels.

1 Choose [Label]  [Label

Management] on the menu bar, or
click (Label Management) on
the toolbar.

 The <Manage Label> window opens.

Parts060303S-10E02
1

2 To change or delete an existing label,

select the label and click [Edit] or
[Delete].

2
3 To newly create a label, click [New].

4 Click [OK].

3 2  The <Manage Label> window closes.

2

Parts060303S-12E01
4

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-31

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

6.4.1 Importing Components from NPM Production data

1 Choose [Import]  [Import Parts] on

the menu bar.

 The <Import Parts> window opens.

1
Parts060400S-01E03

2 Click .

 The <Open> window opens.

2

Parts060400S-02E05

3 Choose the production data to import.

4 Click [Open].

Parts060400S-03E02
4

Page 6-32 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

5 Choose the import destination.

 You can select the Master or Line Parts

Library as the destination.

■ For the Master Parts Library

1. Select Master Parts Library from Select
Master/line.
2. Select ‘The library in the file’ if you want to
specify a parts library within production
data and, if you want to specify any
desired parts library, ‘The following
library’.

■ For the Line Parts Library

1. Select an actual line name from the
pull-down menu of Select Master/line.
2. Check-mark The following library box,
and select a line parts library.
5  Upon selection of the Line Parts
Parts060400S-04E05 Library, the warning message will pop
6 up if you select parts data currently
being downloaded.

Parts060400S-56E00

■ For the Line Parts Library (Multiple Lines)

1. Select Multiple Lines from the pull-down
menu of Select Master/line.
2. Click .
3. Select lines to be imported, and click OK.

Parts060400S-29E00
 If multiple lines are selected, the part
library cannot be specified, and also
‘Except Downloaded Parts’ is not
available.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-33

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

 If you want to assign a label to the part

imported, check-mark the ‘Assign label to
imported parts’ box and then select the
desired label.

6 Click [Import].

 Data will be imported.

7 Click [OK].

Parts060400S-05E01

Page 6-34 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

Parts060400S-68E00

 Part import setting item

Item Explanation
‘Select’(Checkbox) Selects a part to be imported. All parts are selected as default.
‘Part Name’
‘Part Library Name’ Displays the part library name of a part to be imported.
‘Database’ Displays whether the part of the same name has existed in the
database.
‘Import to
‘Select Master/line’ Specifies the import destination.
When specifying a line, Select a destination actual line from the
pull-down menu, check-mark The following library, and then
select a line parts library.
Select ‘Multiple Lines’ from the pull-down menu to select
multiple lines.
‘The library in the file’ Select the location to save the part data to.
‘The following library’ Selecting ‘The following library’ selects the library from the
pull-down menu.
‘When same part already exists’
‘Overwrite all data’ If the same part name has existed in the library, the data is
overwritten and saved.
‘Overwrite nozzle number’ If a part of the same name exists in the same library, the nozzle
number will be overwritten.
‘Overwrite Inspection Data only’ If the same part name has existed in the library, only the
inspection data is overwritten and saved.
‘Do not overwrite’ If the same part name has existed in the library, the part is not
imported.
‘Import Options’
‘Import substitution part group’ Whether to import the substitution part group is specified.
‘Overwrite substitution part Whether to overwrite the data when the substitution part group
group’ is imported is specified.
‘Assign label to imported parts’ Assigns the specified label to the imported part.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-35

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

 Button
Button Explanation
[…] Displays the dialog selecting a file.
[Select All]/[Unselect All] Selects/deselects all checkboxes of the parts to be imported.
[New Label] Newly creates the label.
[Import ] Imports the parts.
[Cancel] Cancels the parts and closes the dialog.

Page 6-36 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

6.4.2 Importing Parts from CM/DT Recipe

1 Choose [Import]  [Import Parts] on

the menu bar.

 The <Import Parts> window opens.

1
Parts060400S-01E03

2 Click .

 The <Open> window opens.

2

Parts060400S-02E05

3 Choose the CM/DT recipe to import.

 If a file does not appear, change the ‘Files of

type’ to ‘All Files’.

3 4 Click [Open].

Parts060400S-48E00
4

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-37

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

5 Make sure if the data of the source file

has been checked on PT 200 and click
[OK].

 If the source file is not normal, the data cannot

be imported properly. Please make sure to
check the data on PT 200.

Parts060400S-28E01  During converting the CM/DT production data,

5 if matters that need to be confirmed arise, a
dialog on the left appears.
 To confirm later, click [CSV Export] to output
the data to a CSV file. Then click [OK] to
continue importing the data.

Parts050602S-09E00

6 Choose the destination.

 For CM/DT production data, only a specified

master parts library can be the destination.
Select a master parts library from ‘The
following library’.

 To assign a label to an imported part, check off

‘Assign label to imported parts’ and choose
the desired label.

7 Click [Import].

 If the CM/DT data is overwritten and imported,

the CM package angle confirmation dialog
appears.
( ‘6.5.3 Editing Components ■Confirmation
6 dialog for supply angle / CM package angle
Parts060400S-49E02
7 change’ for CM package angle confirmation
dialog)

Page 6-38 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

8 Click [OK].

Parts060400S-05E01
8

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-39

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

Parts060400S-67E00

 Part import setting item

Item Explanation
‘Select’(Checkbox) Selects a part to be imported. All parts are selected as default.
‘Part Name’
‘Part Library Name’ Displays the part library name of a part to be imported.
‘Database’ Displays whether the part of the same name has existed in the
database.
‘Import to
‘Select Master/line’ Specifies the import destination.
When specifying a line, Select a destination actual line from the
pull-down menu, check-mark The following library, and then
select a line parts library.
Select ‘Multiple Lines’ from the pull-down menu to select
multiple lines.
‘The library in the file’ Select the location to save the part data to.
‘The following library’ Selecting ‘The following library’ selects the library from the
pull-down menu.
‘When same part already exists’
‘Overwrite CM/DT Data’ If the same part name has existed in the library, only the DM/DT
data is overwritten and saved.
‘Overwrite all parts data’ If the same part name has existed in the library, all parts data is
overwritten and saved in part information in the CM/DT
production data.
 For NPM machine-specific information items which do not
exist in the CM/DT production data, the values for the items
are converted into the fixed values and entered. For the set
values to be converted, see ‘6.4.4 Conversion Data List’.
‘Do not overwrite’ If the same part name has existed in the library, the part is not
imported.

Page 6-40 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

Item Explanation
‘Import Options’
‘Import substitution part group’ Whether to import the substitution part group is specified.
‘Overwrite substitution part Whether to overwrite the data when the substitution part group
group’ is imported is specified.
‘Use CM Reference’ Same recognition that the reference number set by CM does is
performed.
 The reference number (from 51 to 165) with no extended data
is the target. For the reference number with extended data, it
acts as non-specified case.
‘Remove Unused Nozzles’ Delete the nozzles not used in production from the registered
nozzle in the part data during import.
‘NPM Nozzle Selection’
‘Convert to NPM nozzles’ The nozzles registered in the CM/DT data are converted into
the ones which are suitable for NPM and register them. For the
nozzles to be converted, see ‘6.4.4 Conversion Data List.
‘Same as CM/DT nozzles’ The nozzles registered in the CM/DT data are registered as
NPM nozzles without conversion.
‘Both CM/DT nozzles and After the nozzles registered in the CM/DT data are registered as
NPM nozzles’ NPM nozzles without conversion, the registered nozzles are
converted into the nozzles suitable for NPM. And they are also
added. For nozzles to be converted, see ‘6.4.4 Conversion
Data List.
 When the nozzles are additionally registered, CM/DT nozzles
must be registered before the converted nozzles for NPM
(total of 5 nozzles can be added).
‘Assign label to imported parts’ Assigns the specified label to the imported part.

 Button
Button Explanation
[…] Displays the dialog selecting a file.
[Select All]/[Unselect All] Selects/deselects all checkboxes of the parts to be imported.
[New Label] Newly creates the label.
[Import ] Imports the parts.
[Cancel] Cancels the parts and closes the dialog.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-41

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

6.4.3 Importing Components from Export Parts Data

1 Choose [Import]  [Import Parts] on
the menu bar.

 The <Import Parts> window appears.

1
Parts060400S-01E03

2 Click .

 The <Open> window opens.

Parts060400S-02E05

3 Choose a part data (.bak) you want

to import.

3
4 Click [Open].

Parts060400S-38E01

Page 6-42 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

5 Choose the import destination.

 You can select the Master or Line Parts

Library as the destination

■ For the Master Parts Library

1. Select Master Parts Library from Select
Master/line.
2. Select ‘The library in the file’ if you want to
specify a parts library within production
data and, if you want to specify any
desired parts library, ‘The following
library’.
■ For the Line Parts Library
1. Select an actual line name from the
pull-down menu of Select Master/line.
2. Check-mark The following library box, and
select a line parts library.
 Upon selection of the Line Parts Library,
the warning message will pop up if you
5 select parts data currently being
Parts060400S-39E02
downloaded.
6

Parts060400S-56E00

■ For Line Parts Library (Multiple Lines)

1. Select Multiple Lines from the pull-down
menu of Select Master/line.
2. Click .
3. Select lines to be imported and click OK.

Parts060400S-29E00

 If multiple lines are selected, the part

library cannot be specified, and also
[Except Downloaded Parts] is not
available.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-43

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

 If you want to assign a label to the part

imported, check-mark the ‘Assign label to
imported parts’ box and then select the
desired label

6 Click [Import].

 Data will be imported.

7 Click [OK].

Parts060400S-40E00

Page 6-44 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

Parts060400S-04E05

 Part import setting item

Item Explanation
‘Select’(Checkbox) Selects a part to be imported. All parts are selected as default.
‘Part Name’
‘Part Library Name’ Displays the part library name of a part to be imported.
‘Database’ Displays whether the part of the same name has existed in the
database.
‘Import to
‘Select Master/line’ Specifies the import destination.
When specifying a line, Select a destination actual line from the
pull-down menu, check-mark The following library, and then
select a line parts library.
Select ‘Multiple Lines’ from the pull-down menu to select
multiple lines.
‘The library in the file’ Select the location to save the part data to.
‘The following library’ Selecting ‘The following library’ selects the library from the
pull-down menu.
‘When same part already exists’
‘Overwrite all data’ If the same part name has existed in the library, the data is
overwritten and saved.
‘Overwrite nozzle number’ If a part of the same name exists in the same library, the nozzle
number will be overwritten.
‘Overwrite Inspection Data only’ If the same part name has existed in the library, only the
inspection data is overwritten and saved.
‘Do not overwrite’ If the same part name has existed in the library, the part is not
imported.
‘Import Options’
‘Assign label to imported parts’ Assigns the specified label to the imported part.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-45

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

 Button
Button Explanation
[…] Displays the dialog selecting a file.
[Select All]/[Unselect All] Selects/deselects all checkboxes of the parts to be imported.
[New Label] Newly creates the label.
[Import ] Imports the parts.
[Cancel] Cancels the parts and closes the dialog.

Page 6-46 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

6.4.4 Conversion Data List

‘NPM nozzle’ is selected for ‘Registration of nozzle on NPM’, or ‘Add NPM nozzle to CM/DT
nozzle’ is selected for CM/DT nozzle, the nozzles in machine-specific information after import are
converted into the states which are suitable for NPM.
For more details on the specific conversion method, refer to the following lists.

Machine-specific Set value before

Item Set value after conversion
information conversion
Nozzle Selection Nozzle No. 205 Additional selection needed in the absence of 225.
206 Additional selection needed in the absence of 226.
110 Additional selection needed in the absence of 226.
After addition, delete 110.
115 Additional selection needed in the absence of 230.
After addition, delete 115.
120 Additional selection needed in the absence of 235.
After addition, delete 120.
450 Additional selection needed in the absence of 185.
460 Additional selection needed in the absence of 199.
 The items below will be converted to the following values regardless of the set value of the import
source.

Set value
Machine-specific Set value after
Item before
information conversion
conversion
Speed Parameters Pickup / Mount speed Tape material: Paper 100
Pickup / Extension of
Tape material: Paper Standard
placement keeping time
Recognition Reflection Lighting
(Other than
Transmitted
CM Reference: Use
Lighting Lighting-recommended
CM Reference
numbers)
CM Reference: Non-use Reflection Lighting
Part size:
High Speed
0.6±0.05 / 0.3±0.05
Recognition Tape material: Paper
(Part size other than the Auto
The same
above)
value as
Gap Pickup Gap Tape material: Paper 0.000
the import
Tape material: Paper,
Automatic Height Measure source No
emboss (8mm)
Pickup Pickup Offset X 0.000
Pickup Offset Y 0.000
Retry Pickup error setting Component shortage
stop
Recognition Error Stop Set number of times
Validation Vacuum sensor pickup check Yes
Part Thickness
Yes
Measurement
Tape material: Paper 20% of part thickness
Thickness variation
(Should not exceed the
upper-Limit/Lower limit
upper / lower limits)
Lamp Offset Shadow / Direct / BGA Lamp Offset 0
Tape Feeder Drive Speed Tape material: Paper Standard

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-47

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

6.4.5 Copying / Importing Parts from a File

Component names of copy source and destination are written to Excel and reading the data in the
Excel file, several parts are imported/copied to the part library at a time.

The available files types for copy / import command are as follows.
Excel 97-2003 Workbook (.xls), Excel Workbook (.xlsx), Excel Macro-Enabled Workbook
(.xlsm), Excel Binary Workbook (.xlsb), CSV (comma delimited) (.csv)

As an example, the following describes how to read an Excel file (.xlsx) and copy / import it into
the part library on DGS.

Excel file (SampleFile.xlsx)

Parts060400S-57E01

 Part library before copy / import

Part library name Part name
Standard Parts 0402C
Standard Parts 0603R
Standard Parts 1005R

Parts written in the ‘PartsName’ column exist as Standard Parts in the part library. Parts named
‘Sample’ do not exist yet.

 Part library after copy / import

Part library name Part name
Standard Parts 0402C
Copy
Standard Parts 0603R
Copy
Standard Parts 1005R
Copy
Sample 0402C-1

Sample 0603R-1

Sample 1005R-1

Copy the part data in ‘Standard Parts’ library and the parts written in the ‘CopyParts’ column in
Excel file is created as ‘Sample’ library.

Page 6-48 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

1 Select from the menu bar [Import] 

[Import Mapped Parts].

 The <Import Mapped Parts> window appears.

Parts060400S-01E03
1

2 Click .

 The <Open File> window appears.

2

Parts060400S-49E01

3 Select a file from which to import

components.

 In this case, SampleFile.xlsx is selected as an

3 example.

4 Click [Open].

Parts060400S-50E01
4

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-49

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

5 Select a sheet to import.

 For an Excel file where there are multiple

sheets, the window for selecting a sheet is
5 displayed.

6 6 Click [OK].

Parts060400S-51E00

7 Check off ‘Source File has Header

Row’ if the file contains a header.

7
Parts060400S-58E01

 When ‘Source File has Header Row’ is selected

 The first column in the read file is specified as

the column name.

Parts060400S-59E01

Parts060400S-57E01

8 Select a column of the copy

destination as ‘Part Name/Number
8 Column’ and select a column of copy
source as ‘Description / Source Part
Column’.
Parts060400S-60E01

Parts060400S-57E01

Page 6-50 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

9 Select ‘Part name copy destination’.

 Set the component name shown in the Source

Part Column to the Part Description or Part
Shape Code.

Parts060400S-66E00

10 Select ‘Destination Library’.

Parts060400S-61E01 10  [Library is in source file column]

Select from Excel
[Create all parts in library]
Select the DGS master component library

Parts060400S-57E01

11 Select ‘Part Data Source’.

 In this case, select ‘Search all libraries for part

11 name matching 'description'. Use a part name
Parts060400S-62E00
to search in all libraries and copy the matched
data.

12 Click [View] in ‘Operation Preview’

and confirm that the right columns and
library have been selected.
12
 In this case, three parts exist in the import file,
and three copy source parts exist in the
Parts060400S-63E00
master part library.

13 Click [Import].

Parts060400S-64E00

13

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-51

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

 If there are multiple copy source parts at the time of import

14 From the ‘Part Library Name’

pull-down menu, select a library used
for a copy source, and click [OK].

14

Parts060400S-54E00 14

 If there are multiple pieces of data in the library column of the file being imported

14 Click [Yes] / [No].

[Yes] : Continues to import and creates
the part library in the selected
library column.

[No] : Interrupts import and returns to the

copy import screen.
Parts060400S-55E00

14

15 Click [OK].

Parts060400S-53E01
15

Page 6-52 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

 The ‘Sample’ library is created as the part

names written in the Excel file. These parts
are copied from the ‘Standard Parts’ library.

Parts060400S-65E00

Part library name Part name

Standard Parts 0402C
Copy
Standard Parts 0603R
Copy
Standard Parts 1005R
Copy
Sample 0402C-1

Sample 0603R-1

Sample 1005R-1

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-53

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

Parts060400S-49E00

 Import Mapped Parts setting item

Item Explanation
‘Source File’
‘Source File has Header Row’ Reads a header which is the top of the file. The read header
(Checkbox) information is displayed as ‘Part Name/Number Column’,
‘Description / Source Part Column’, ‘Library is in source file
column’.
 With this checkbox unchecked, directly specify a row name.
‘Part Name/Number Column’ Specifies a data row which includes a part name to be imported.
The data in this row will be an imported part name.
 Checking ‘Source File has Header Row’ allows you to specify
from the read header information.
‘Description / Source Part Specifies part description of an imported part and a data row
Column’ indicating copy source. The part data in DGS which matches
the data information in this row will be the part data of an
imported part.
 Checking ‘Source File has Header Row’ allows you to specify
from the read header information.
‘Destination Library’
‘Library is in source file column’ Specifies the part library of an import destination from a row in
the import file. If you specify a row with no header, import to the
library as default (import).
 Checking ‘Source File has Header Row’ allows you to specify
from the read header information.

Page 6-54 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

Item Explanation
‘Destination Library’
‘Create all parts in library’ Specifies the part library of the import destination by selecting
from the DGS master part library or directly typing the library
name.
 Characters as below cannot be entered for a library name.
% “ ‘ , space
‘Part Data Source’
‘Import Description Only’ Specifies the part library of the import destination by selecting
from the DGS master part library or directly typing the library
name.
 Characters as below cannot be entered for a library name.
% “ ‘ , space
‘Search all libraries for part In all master parts in DGS, searches data of the row selected by
name matching ‘description’’ ‘Description / Source Part Column’ and copies the matched
part.
 Unmatched parts are created as undefined parts.
‘Search for part name matching In the specified master part library, searches data of the row
‘description’ only in library’ selected by ‘Description / Source Part Column’ and copies the
matched part.
 Unmatched parts are created as undefined parts.
‘Duplicates’
‘Skip if already exists’ In case that the same part exists in the part library of an import
destination, it is not imported.
‘Overwrite if already exists’ In case that the same part exists in the part library of an import
destination, it is overwritten and imported.
‘Operation Preview’
‘Parts in Source File’ Displays a list of parts existing in the data specified by ‘Part
Name/Number Column’.
‘Descriptions with Match’ In part data of a copy source, displays a list of matched parts.
‘Descriptions without Match’ In part data of a copy source, displays a list of unmatched parts.
‘Descriptions with Ambiguous In part data of a copy source, displays a list of parts existing in
Match’ the several part library.
‘Duplicates’ In parts imported from a file, displays a list of parts which have
already existed in the import destination library.

 Button
Item Explanation
[Import] Imports a mapped part.
[Exit] Exits import and closes the dialog box.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-55

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

6.4.6 Exporting Selected Parts

1 Choose the desired components from

the component list.

Parts060400S-15E01

2 Choose [Export] on the right-click

menu displayed over the selected
components.

 The filename selection window opens.

Parts060400S-16E03

3 Click .

 The <Save As> window opens.

Parts060400S-17E01

Page 6-56 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

4 Type a filename, and click [Save].

 The typed filename is set.

Parts060400S-19E00 4 4

5 Click [OK].

 The confirmation window opens.

Parts060400S-20E01 5

6 Click [OK].

Parts060400S-05E02

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-57

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

6.4.7 Exporting Parts in the Displayed Page

1 Choose [File]  [Export] on the menu

bar.

 The filename selection window opens.

1  If there are too many components over several
pages, only the record currently shown is
exported. You need to display the target page
to export the data.

Parts060400S-22E03

2 Click .

 The <Save As> window opens.

Parts060400S-23E02

3 Type a filename, and click [Save].

 The typed filename is set.

Parts060400S-25E00 3 3

Page 6-58 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

4 Click [OK].

 The confirmation window opens.

Parts060400S-26E01 4

5 Click [OK].

Parts060400S-27E01
5

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-59

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

6.4.8 Exporting All Selected Parts

1 Choose a desired Master Parts

Library / Line Parts Library to be
exported.

 If you export all parts in the library, you do not

need to change the number of records.

1
Parts060400S-42E00

2 Click [File]  [Export All Parts From

Library] on the menu bar.

 The <Export Parts Data> window appears.

Parts060400S-43E00

3 Click .

 The <Save As> window appears.

Parts060400S-44E00

Page 6-60 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

4 Type a file name to be saved and click

[Save].

 The entered file name is set.

Parts060400S-45E00 4 4

5 Click [OK].

 The confirmation window opens.

Parts060400S-46E00
5

6 Click [OK].

Parts060400S-47E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-61

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

6.4.9 Updating Parts Data from the Line Part Library to the Master
Part Library
By using the parts data in the line parts library, the master parts library can be updated.
Depending on the item you choose, updates can be performed per line, per parts library within a
line, or per part.

 For updates per line

1 From the library tree view area, select

a line, and click on [Update to Master
Part Library] in the right-click menu.

 The <Update to Master Part Library> window

opens.

Parts060400S-32E01

2 Choose a part to update using the

radio button.

 A part that is being displayed on the parts

editor screen is grayed out and cannot be
updated. After closing the parts editor screen,
you may update the part again.

Parts060400S-34E01

Page 6-62 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

3 Click [Yes].

 The update progress dialogue box appears.

Parts060400S-30E00

Parts060400S-35E00

4 The update completion dialogue box

appears. Click on [OK].

 A library and part in the master parts library

that are of the same name will be overwritten
with the part data, or the part data will be
added.
Parts060400S-36E00
4

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-63

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data

 For updates per parts library within a line

1 From the library tree view area, select

a library in a line, and click on [Update
to Master Part Library] in the right click
menu.

 The <Update to Master Part Library> window

opens. As for the remainder of the update
procedure, follow the same steps as shown in
‘■For updates per line’ to update data.
1

Parts060400S-33E01

 For updates per part

1 Choose a part and click on [Update to

Master Part Library] in the right click
menu.

 The <Update to Master Part Library> window

opens. As for the reminder of the update
procedure, follow the same steps as shown in
‘■ For updates per line’ to update data.

 Only when multiple parts are selected, the

1 <Update to Master Part Library> window
opens. The screen does not appear when a
single selection is made.

Parts060400S-31E01

Page 6-64 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

6.5 Adding New Components

 Adding new components
1 Click on the toolbar, choose
[File]  [Create New] on the menu
bar, or choose [Create New] on the
right-click menu displayed over the
Parts060600S-01E01 component list.
1
 The <New Part> window opens.

2 Choose the part library.

2 3 Type a component name.

3  The following characters cannot be used.
4 % , ” ‘ full-width

4 Type a component type.

5
 Clicking on the right displays the
component type image.
Parts060600S-03E00
6  For details about component types: ‘6.5.2
Component Type Images’

 The component shape will be set

automatically when the component type is
selected. There are four shapes as follows.
• [Rectangular Chip]
• [Lead Chip]
• [Ball Chip]
• [Irregular Shaped Chip]

5 Type the component outside

dimensions (length, width, and
height).

 The input range is as follows

Length: 0.01 to 1000
Width: 0.01 to 1000
Height: 0.01 to 100

 For component dimensions and nozzle

arrangement of AM100, ‘P 6-1-7-4 in the
AM100 Operation Procedure’.

6 Click [OK].

Parts060600S-05E03  The component edit window opens.

 For details about editing components:
‘6.5.3 Editing Components’

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-65

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Creating recognition data (Creating new data using scanned images)

1 Choose [New by Scan Image] on the

menu bar.

 The <New by Scan Image> window opens.

Parts060600S-06E01

2 Choose the part library, and type a

component name.

2
2 3 Click [OK].

 The <Recognition Data Creation> window

opens.

 For details of the <Recognition Data Creation>

window: ‘11 Recognition Data Creation
Using Scanner’

Parts060600S-07E00
3

Parts060600S-08E00

Page 6-66 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Creating recognition data (Creating data using scanned images)

1 Choose [Edit with Scanner Image] on

the right-click menu displayed over the
component list.

 The <Recognition Data Creation> window

opens.

 For details of the <Recognition Data Creation>

window: ‘11 Recognition Data Creation
Using Scanner’

1
Parts060600S-09E03

Parts060600S-10E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-67

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

6.5.1 Creating New Components

Basic information of components to be added can be set on the <New Part> window.

Parts060601S-01E03

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Part Library’ Part library to which the component belongs
‘Part Name’ Parts name
‘Functional Class’ Component type
‘Physical Class’ Component shape. This is automatically specified when the
component type is selected. There are four shapes as follows.
• [Rectangular Chip]
• [Lead Chip]
• [Ball Chip]
• [Irregular Shaped Chip]
‘Overall Dimension’ Shows the component dimensions of length, width, and height.
 For component dimensions and nozzle arrangement of AM100, ‘AM100 Operation in
6-1-7-4’

 Button
Button Explanation
[…] Displays the <Functional class images> window.
‘6.5.2 Component Type Images’
[OK] Creates a new component under the specified setting and
displays the part editor window.
[Cancel] Cancels the creation of a new component.

Page 6-68 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

6.5.2 Component Type Images

Component types can be selected using the <Functional class images> window. To select the
component type, click the image of the desired component.

Parts060602S-01E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-69

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

6.5.3 Editing Components

Component shapes, supply methods, and machine-specific information can be set on the
component edit window.
5
6 1

Parts060603S-01E10
3 4

No. Name Explanation

1 Component information Sets a component type and polarity, etc.
2 Component shape information Sets a component outer shape and shape definition, etc.
3 Feeder information Sets a supply method for a component.
4 Machine-specific information Sets machine-specific information on a NPM, CM/DT or
insertion machine basis.
5 Detailed settings Sets recognition options or dispensing options to a
component.
6 Component menu Sets the CAD/package rotation of a component and
saves the parts editor.

Page 6-70 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

① Component information
The component information configuration is as follows.

Parts060603S-02E04

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘General Part Information’
‘Description’ Comments on the component (Optional). ” (double-quote) is
not available.
‘Polarity’ Flag indicating whether the component is polarized. When
polarized, a polarity mark is displayed on the component
image.
‘Polarity Mark Style’ A graphic form used in drawing a polarity mark image. There
are three types as follows.
• [LINE]
• [DOT]
• [NOTCH]
‘Polarity Position’ Position indicating a polarity mark
‘Functional Class’ Component type
‘Rank Component’ Flag indicating whether it is rank component or not.
‘Skip Optimization’ If placement is not performed by the machine set on DGS, skip
optimization flag is set in advance. (Setting is enabled only for
master component)
• [Yes] : Do not optimize to the machine during optimization.
• [No] : Optimize to the machine during optimization.
This is used as an initial value when jog is created on the data
creation jog editor. 'Skip optimization' cannot be set by
opening the part editor from the data creation jog editor.
If the data is directly edited on the data creation job editor,
seethe following.
‘7.4 Feeder Arrangement Pane  Setting skip
optimization’
‘MSD Level’ Sets a MSD level of a component (level showing risk due to
humidity during reflow).
There are nine types as follows.
・0 : No humidity control
・1 : Level 1(indefinite period)
・2 : Level 2 (1 year)
・2a: Level 2a (4 weeks)
・3: Level 3 (168 hours)
・4: Level 4 (72 hours)
・5: Level 5 (48 hours）
・5a: Level 5a (24 hours)
・6 : Level 6 (Baking process is required)

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-71

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

② Component shape information

The component shape information configuration is as follows.

a
Parts060503S-40E02

Parts060603S-03E02

 Items to be set (Common)

Item Explanation
Component shape information
‘Physical Class’ Component shape. There are four shapes as follows.
• [Rectangular Chip]
• [Lead Chip]
• [Ball Chip]
• [Irregular Shaped Chip]
‘Shape Code’ Set the component shape code.
"(Double quotes) are not available.
‘Cylindrical Part’ Check this off when the component shape is cylindrical.
<Example>
Cylindrical resistor, Grass tube diode, Cylindrical capacitor
‘Use CM Reference’ Mark the checkbox when recognition process corresponding to
the CM reference number is carried out without using
automatic decision. Marking the checkbox changes the
window as the one in the figure on the right.
 The reference number (from 51 to 165) with no extended
data is the target. The part that the extended data is required
must be configured as normal settings.
‘Dimensions’ Set the maximum outline dimensions of a part. Set L
(horizontal length), W (vertical length) and T (height) of a part.
 For component dimensions and nozzle arrangement of
AM100, ‘AM100 Operation in 6-1-7-4’.

 When CM reference number is used

Item Explanation
‘REF’ CM reference number is displayed. Select as an explanation
written on the right. Clicking […] enables to select from the list.
 Reference number (from 51 to 165) with no extended data can
be set.
‘L’ / ‘W’ Part dimensions are displayed defined by CM.
 Definition of width and length is varies depending on REF. Set
as a reference of the part definition drawing ‘a’.
‘Ref Ang’ Choose the supplied angle from 0 / 90 / 180 / -90 degree.
 For the part orientation, refer to the part definition drawing ‘a’.

Page 6-72 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Items to be set (Box-type component)

Item Explanation
Component shape information
‘Electrode position’ Position of the component electrodes. There are three types as follows.
• [Side 1 / 3] : Arrange electrodes to upper and lower sides of a part
• [Side 2 / 4] : Arrange electrodes to right and left sides of a part
• [None]
‘Symmetry’ When 'Symmetry' is set to 'ON', the same value is set to another size of
the selected electrode position.
‘Electrode Length’ Length of the component electrodes. Depending on setting of ‘Electrode
position’ and ‘Symmetry,’ the side that can be edited changes.
‘Electrode Width’ Width of the component electrodes. Depending on setting of ‘Electrode
position’ and ‘Symmetry,’ the side that can be edited changes.

Parts060603S-04E03

 Items to be set (Lead components)

Item Explanation
Component shape information
‘Symmetry’ When this is checked off, the same value is applied to the specified side.
There are three types as follows.
• [4 Way]
• [Side 1 / 3] : Arrange electrodes to upper and lower sides of a part
• [Side 2 / 4] : Arrange electrodes to right and left sides of a part
‘Body Size’ Part body size. Only ‘Side 1’ (horizontal direction) and ‘Side 2’ (vertical
direction) are editable.
‘Lead Count’ Number of leads on each side of the component. If there is no lead on
the sides, set 0.
‘Lead Pitch’ Distance between the center of one lead and the center of the adjacent
lead

When tolerance of lead pitch has already set and if you change lead
pitch, a confirmation dialog appears, asking whether you want to keep
the ratio (lead pitch before change to the tolerance of lead pitch).

Parts060503S-15E00

‘Lead Length’ Length of the lead from the component body to the point where it
touches the PCB
‘Lead Width’ Width of the lead attaching the component body

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-73

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060603S-05E03

 Items to be set (Ball type)

Item Explanation
Component shape information
‘Symmetry’ When ‘Symmetry’ is turned ON, the same value is set to X and
Y. This is used to reduce the number of items to be entered.
‘Ball Count’ Number of balls on component lines and columns
‘Ball Count’ Number of balls on component lines and columns
‘Ball Pitch’ Distance between the center of one ball and the center of the
adjacent ball
‘Ball Diameter’ Ball diameter

 If a ball type is selected as the component shape, an icon is displayed on the right side.
This indicates that the component shape is defined by seeing from above.

Page 6-74 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060603S-06E03

 Items to be set (Oddly-shaped component)

Item Explanation
Component shape information
‘Overall Size’ Maximum outside dimensions of the component.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-75

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Confirmation dialog when the shape data is edited

Among components with the CM extension data set, if the shape data of a lead component or ball
grid array are edited, a confirmation dialog appears to maintain the consistency with the CM
extension data.

 Changes you made are displayed in the

confirmation dialog.
To automatically reflect the changes to the
extension data, mark the checkbox of 'Update
above values automatically.’
About the CM extension data refer to
‘6.5.7 CM Extension Data Edit.

Parts060603S-62E00

Items that are automatically reflected are as follows:

Location Reflected CM extension data
‘Lead Component –Lead Count’ QFP extension data – Plan Pins (1 to 4 sides)
(Set the values for actual pins while taking missing leads into
account.)

‘Lead Component – Lead Pitch’ QFP extension data – Pin Pitch (1 to 4 sides) *1

‘Ball Grid Array – Ball Count’ BGA extension data – Row Count/Col Count *1

‘Ball Grid Array - Pitch’ BGA extension data – Ball Pitch (X) / Ball Pitch (Y) *1

‘Ball Grid Array - Diameter’ BGA extension data – Ball Diameter*1

*1 You cannot reflect the value that exceeds the settable range in the CM extension data.

Page 6-76 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

③ Feeder information
The feeder information configuration is as follows.

Parts060603S-07E02

 Items to be set (Common)

Item Explanation
‘Supply Information’
‘Supply Type’ Component supply method. There are five types as follows.
• [Tape]
When components are supplied by a paper, an embossed
tape or an adhesive tape
• [Stick]
When components are supplied on stick feeders
• [Tray]
When components are supplied on tray feeders
• [Bulk]
When components are supplied on bulk feeders
• [Custom]
When components are supplied on custom feeders

 Items to be set (Tape)

Item Explanation
‘Supply Information’
‘Tape Kind’ Sets among from a paper, an embossed tape or an adhesive
tape
‘Tape Width’ Tape width
‘Tape Pitch’ Tape feed pitch
‘Reel Size’ Reel size. There are three types as follows.
• [Large (330 mm)]
• [Small (180 mm)]
‘Parts Per Reel’ Number of components per reel

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-77

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components
 Items to be set (Tape) continued from the previous page
Item Explanation
‘Supply Information’
‘Supply Direction’ When the style of packing (supply orientation) of substitute
components is different from that of standard components,
type the differential. This saves the time of changing the
placement angle.
 Since the style of packing becomes different from the
0-degree definition, changing this setting often is not
desirable. Unless substitute components are used, change
the placement angle instead of this setting.
‘5.8.3 Adding Placement Points’
 For a component that CM/DT machine-specific information
is set, the supply direction differs between NPM and CM/DT.
Therefore, the confirmation dialog appears.
Edit the package angle from CM/DT machine-specific
information.
( ‘6.5.3 Editing Components  ■Confirmation dialog for
supply angle /CM package angle change’ for confirmation
dialog upon change and ‘6.5.6 CM Package Angle Edit’)
for editing package angle.

Parts060603S-59E00

Parts060603S-08E06

 Items to be set (Stick)

Item Explanation
‘Supply Information’
‘Part Count’ The number of parts contained in a stick.
‘Supply Direction’ Sets the supply direction. ( ■Items to be set (Tape) ‘Supply
Direction’)
‘Vibratory Stick Feeder’
‘1 Lane/3 Lane Vibratory Stick Sets the 1 lane vibratory stick feeder and 3 lane vibratory stick
Feeder’’ feeder to enable.
‘Stick Width’ Sets the stick width.
‘Stick Height’ Sets the stick height.
Wire Drive Stick Feeder
‘Wire Drive Stick Feeder (S) ’ Sets the wire drive stick feeder (S) to enable.
When installed in place, it occupies two slots.
‘Wire Drive Stick Feeder (L) ’ Sets the wire drive stick feeder (L) to enable.
When installed in place, it occupies four slots.
‘Wire Drive Stick Feeder (LL) ’ Sets the wire drive stick feeder (LL) to enable.
When installed in place, it occupies six slots.

Page 6-78 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Button (Displayed only for stick supply)

Item Explanation
[Feeder manufactured by another Displays the selection screen for feeder manufactured by another
company] company. The feeder manufactured by another company allows you
to set more than one feeders. Up to 10 feeders (total of normal stick
feeders and feeders manufactured by another company) can be set

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-79

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060603S-09E00

 Items to be set (Tray)

Item Explanation
‘Supply Information’
‘Tray Size’ Tray sizes X and Y (Input range: 0.01 to 335)
‘Tray Height’ Tray height (Input range: 0.01 to 99.00)
‘Part Count’ Number of components X and Y (Input range: 1 to 99)
‘First Pickup Position’ X- and Y-coordinates of the component position to be picked
up first
‘Last Pickup Position’ X- and Y-coordinates of the component position to be picked
up last. This can be calculated from the component pitch.
‘Pickup height’ Height from the bottom of the tray to the highest part of the
component (Input range: 2.00 to 99.00)
‘Pitch’ Pitch between components. This is calculated from the first
and last pickup positions. (Not changeable here)
‘Supply Direction’ When the style of packing (supply orientation) of substitute
components is different from that of standard components,
type the differential. This saves the time of changing the
placement angle.
 Since the style of packing becomes different from the
0-degree definition, changing this setting often is not
desirable. Unless substitute components are used, change
the placement angle instead of this setting.
‘5.8.3 Adding Placement Points’
 For a component that CM/DT machine-specific information
is set, the supply direction differs between NPM and CM/DT.
Therefore, the confirmation dialog appears.
Edit the package angle from CM/DT machine-specific
information.
( ‘6.5.3 Editing Components  ■Confirmation dialog for
supply angle /CM package angle change’ for confirmation
dialog upon change and ‘6.5.6 CM Package Angle Edit’)
for editing package angle.

 Button (Only with the tray supply)

Button Explanation
[Last Pickup Calculation] Displays the calculation window for the last pickup position.
[Tray Missing Position] Displays the tray component missing setting screen.

Page 6-80 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060503S-08E02

 Items to be set (Bulk)

Item Explanation
‘Supply Information’
‘Part Count’ The number of parts contained in a bulk supply package.
‘Supply Direction’ Sets a supply direction. ( ■Items to be set (Tape) ‘Supply
Direction’)

Parts060503S-14E00

 Items to be set (Radial tape)

Item Explanation
‘Supply Information’
‘Hole Pitch’ The spacing between feed holes in radial tape.

‘Part Position’ The position, as seen from above, of the part relative to the
radial tape.

Between Holes Above Hole

‘Part Count’ The number of parts contained in a radial supply package.
‘Supply Direction’ Sets a supply direction. ( ■Items to be set (Tape) ‘Supply
Direction’)

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-81

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060503S-17E00

 Setting item (Axial tape)

Item Description
‘Feeder information’
‘Tape width’ Tape width. There are four types as follows.
・[26mm]
・[52mm]
・[63mm]
・[73mm]
‘Tape pitch’ Tape feed pitch. There are two types as follows.
・[5mm]
・[10mm]

Parts060503S-09E02

 Items to be set (Custom)

Item Explanation
‘Supply Information’
‘List of Custom Feeders’ Choose a custom feeder from the custom feeder list.
‘Part Count’ The number of parts contained in a part supply package.
‘Supply Direction’ Sets a supply direction. ( ■Items to be set (Tape) ‘Supply
Direction’)

Page 6-82 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Setting the ejection destination when the supply type is set to ‘Tray’

1 Choose ‘Tray’ under ‘Supply Type’ in

‘Supply Information.’

 The confirmation dialog asking whether to

change the ejection destination to ‘NG Tray’
opens.
1

Parts060603S-57E01

2 Click [Yes] or [No].

 [Yes] : Changes ‘Discard to’ of ‘Part Rejection’

in ‘Machine Specific Information’ to ‘NG Tray.’

 [No] : Maintains the information on ‘Discard to’

of ‘Part Rejection’ in ‘Machine Specific
Information’ as it is.

 When ‘Do not ask again’ is checked off, the

choice made on this confirmation dialog is
Parts060603S-09E02 2 stored and will automatically be applied from
the next time without opening the confirmation
dialog.

 You can open the dialog again by choosing

‘Supply Type’ with the [Ctrl] key being held
down.

Parts060603S-09E03

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-83

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Schematic diagram of the first and the last pickup position on a tray

Tray draw-out direction

First pickup position

Last pickup position

 Calculating the last pickup position

The last pickup position can be calculated by inputting the component pitch on the <Last Pickup
Position Calculation> window.

1 Input the component pitch in the X-

and Y-directions.

 Since ‘First Pickup Position’ and ‘Count’ use

the data from the component edit window, you
1 do not need to set them.

2
Parts060603S-10E00
3
2 Click [Calculate].

 The calculated last pickup position is

displayed.

3 Click [OK].

 The last pickup position is reflected on the

component edit window.

Page 6-84 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Specifying component missing on the tray

On the <Tray missing position> screen, you specify a position where there is no component using
the tray component arrangement image.

1 Specify an arrangement pattern of a

tray.

 If a component exists in the start column 1 and

start raw 1, set [Checker 1 (0,0)], and if there is
no component in that position, set [Checker 2
2 3 (0,0)].

1
2 Specify a component existence or
non-existence position.

Parts060603S-60E00
3 Click [Set As Missing] or [Set As
Existing].
4
 When you specify the position as the
component non-existence, click [Set As
Missing], and when you specify it as the
component existence, click [Set As Existing].

 Double-clicking a component will set as

missing.

 If you want to specify the multiple positions,

drag and drop the area and click [Set As
Missing] or [Set As Existing].

4 Click [OK].

 The settings are confirmed.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-85

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

④ Machine-specific information
Information relating to the machine operations can be set in the machine-specific information
area.

Parts060603S-11E09

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Nozzle Selection’
‘Nozzle Ref’ Set the nozzle type to be used. You can set up to five types.

Page 6-86 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Speed Parameters’
‘Pickup Speed’ Component pickup speed
Specify it with the percentage to the maximum speed. The
selectable options are 100 (standard), 80, 60, 40, and 20.
‘Mount Speed’ Component placement speed
Specify it with the percentage to the maximum speed. The
selectable options are 100 (standard), 80, 60, 40, and 20.
‘Pickup hold time’ Time during which the head is kept lowered for pickup. There
are three types as follows.
• [Standard]
• [2X]
• [4X]
‘Mount hold time’ Time during which the head is kept lowered for placement.
There are three types as follows.
• [Standard]
• [2X]
• [4X]
‘Theta Axis Speed’ Set theta sxis dpeed for NPM-DX or later machines from the
following four options.
• [Auto]
• [Fast Speed]
• [Medium Speed]
• [Slow Speed]

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-87

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Recognition’
‘Camera’ Camera used for component recognition. There are three
types as follows.
• [2D Camera]
This is selectable for NPM and AM100 and used to preform
part recognition with a 2D camera.
• [3D Camera]
This is selectable for the NPM and AM100 equipped with a
3D camera, and used to perform part recognition in three
dimensions.
• [2D/3D Auto Select]
Specify if you want to perform part recognition in three
dimensions only during using the multi recognition camera
type 3. The camera used for part recognition is automatically
selected from among the camera types installed on the
production line. The following shows the installed camera
types and the camera type that can be automatically
selected.
Camera type at the time
Installed camera
No. of part recognition
type on line
2D camera 3D camera
3D camera (1)
1 (Multi recognition X ○
camera type 3)
3D camera (2)
(Except for Multi
2 ○ X
recognition Camera
type 3)
3 2D camera X(3) X

1 Where there is at least one machine equipped with a

multi recognition camera type 3 on the production line.
2 Where on the production line, there is no machine
equipped with a multi recognition camera but a
machine equipped with any 3D camera other than the
multi recognition camera type 3.
3 When the machines on the production line are
equipped with 2D cameras only, no 2D camera is
selected automatically.
Set ‘Camera’ to [2D Camera] again.
‘Lighting’ Lighting mode used for component recognition. There are four
types as follows.
• [Shadow Lighting]
• [Direct Lighting]
• [BGA Lighting]
• [PIP Lighting]
Normally, [Direct Lighting] is used. To recognize narrow-pitch
leads, such as BGA and QFP, choose [BGA Lighting]. (Side
Lighting option is required.)
To recognize insertion leads, choose [PIP Lighting]. (PIP
Lighting option is required.)
If you desire the outline recognition e.g. because of the
unstable lead image, choose [Shadow Lighting].

Page 6-88 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Recognition Speed’ Component recognition speed. There are four types as follows.
• [Auto]
• [High Speed]
• [Medium Speed]
• [Low Speed]
Normally, [Auto] is used. When [Auto] is selected, the machine
selects a proper speed from the component geometry. Instead of
the machine’s auto selection, you can also specify the desired
speed, which is not recommended.
‘Recog Height’ Height at which components are recognized
‘Number of Scans’ The number of scans during component recognition. There are
two types as follows.
• [Auto] :
When the size of a component exceeds 45 mm × 45 mm
(45mm or more in both L and W), the component is split into
upper and lower sections and a split scan is performed.
• [Single scan] :
Even when the size of a component exceeds 45mm × 45 mm,
a normal scan is performed.
‘Placement angle Set whether to recognize components at a mount angle.
recognition’ • [Yes]
• [No]
Selecting [Yes] increases accuracy, but may affect the tact time.
Even if [No] is selected, the machine may recognize some
components at a mount angle based on automatic judgment.
‘Gap’
‘Pickup Gap’ Set a push-in depth of a component during pickup. (Nozzle height
in component pickup)
When 0 is set, a component is picked up at the height where the
nozzle is in contact with the component surface. With the positive
(+) direction, a component is picked up at the height where it is
pushed into a tape and tray. With the negative (-) direction, a
component is picked up at the height where a nozzle does not
touch it.
‘Mount Gap’ Set a push-in depth of a component during pickup. (Nozzle height
in component placement)
When 0 is set, a component is placed at the height where it
touches the PCB. With the positive (+) direction, a component is
placed at the height where it is pushed into the PCB. With the
negative (-) direction, a component is placed at the height where it
does not touch the PCB.
‘Automatic Height Set whether to carry out the automatic height measurement in
Measure (cushion end pickup. The following 2 types are available.
sensor)’ • [No]
• [Yes]
When the pickup surface is unstable (soft), set it to [No].
‘Automatic Height Set whether to carry out the Automatic Height Measure at
Measure at splicing’ splicing. There are 2 types as shown below.
• [No]
• [Yes]
‘Auto Height Measure Set whether to carry out the automatic height measurement in
(Height sensor)’ pickup. The following 2 types are available.
• [No]
• [Yes]

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-89

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Height Measure Gap’ Input the actual pickup height offset against the pickup height
measurement value.
When 0 is set, a component is picked up at the height where the
nozzle is in contact with the component surface. With the positive
(+) direction, a component is picked up at the height where it is
pushed into a tape and tray. With the negative (-) direction, a
component is picked up at the height where a nozzle does not
touch it.
‘3D Mount Gap’ Set a push-in depth of a component when 3D is mounted. (Nozzle
height during component placement)
When 0 is set, a component is mounted at the height where the
mounted component is in contact with the bottom side’s
component. With the positive (+) direction, a component is
mounted at the height where it is pushed into the bottom side’s
component. With the negative (-) direction, it is mounted at the
height where it does not touch the bottom side's component.

Page 6-90 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060603S-12E11

Item Explanation
‘Pickup’
‘Pickup Offset X’ Offset in the X-direction from a normal pickup position.
Overall dimensions L/2 ＞ 5.0: -overall dimensions L/2 to
overall dimensions L/2
overall dimensions L/2 ≦ 5.0: -5.0 to 5.0
‘Pickup Offset Y’ Offset in the Y-direction from a normal pickup position.
overall dimensions W/2 ＞ 5.0: - overall dimensions W/2 to
overall dimensions W/2
overall dimensions W/2 ≦ 5.0: -5.0 ~ 5.0
‘Pickup Angle’ Nozzle rotation angle in pickup
‘Gang Pickup’ Sets whether to perform simultaneous pickup. There are two
types as follows.
• [Allow]
• [Not Allow]
‘Pickup Motion (Down)’ Sets the nozzle descending motion during pickup. There are
two types as follows.
・[1 step]
・[2 steps」
‘2 Step Pickup Motion Height Sets this if you want to start a 2-step down motion earlier than
Offset (Down)’ a regular motion when 2-step down pickup motion is
performed.
‘Pickup Motion (Up)’ Sets the nozzle ascending motion during pickup. There are
two types as follows.
・[1 step]
・[2 steps]

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-91

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Pickup’
‘2 Step Pickup Motion Height Sets this if you want to start a 2-step up motion earlier than a
Offset (Up)’ regular motion when 2-step down pickup motion is performed.
‘Pickup Position Learning’ Set whether to learn and automatically adjust the pickup
position.
 This is valid when a nozzle whose pickup position learning
function is set ON in nozzle library setting is used for
placement.
‘Pickup Shift Tolerance’ Acceptable amount of the pickup position displacement
‘Pickup before Inspection’ Set whether to continuously pick up components or not during
placement while the inspection head of the opposite head
inspects components.
Yes: Picks up before inspection has completed.
No: Picks up after inspection has completed.
It prevents components from discarding in case the
inspection result becomes NG.

Page 6-92 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Mount’
‘Mount Load’ Load applied to a component in placement
‘2 Step Motion (Down)’ Set the nozzle lowering motion in placement. There are two
types as follows.
• [1 step]
• [2 step]
(Since a nozzle of the 2-nozzle general-purpose head lowers
by two steps, this will be ignored for it.)
‘2 Step Motion Height Offset Set this if you want to start 2 Step Motion earlier than the
(Down)’ regular motion when using it for placement.
Setting this with 2 Step Motion Speed (Down) can control the
load applied to a part during placement.
'2 Step Motion Speed (Down)' Set the descending speed of the 2nd step slower or faster than
the regular motion when 2 step-motion is set in placement.
'Mount Motion (Up)' Set the nozzle ascending motion in placement. There are two
types as follows.
• [1 step]
• [2 step]
'2 Step Motion Height Set this to start 2 Step Motion earlier than the regular motion
Offset(Up)' when using it for placement. Setting this with 2 Step Motion
Speed (Up) can control the load applied to a part during
mounting.
'2 Step Motion Speed (Up)' Set the ascending speed of the 1st step slower or faster than a
regular motion when 2 step-motion is performed in placement.
‘Wait Before Mount’ Machine will wait defined milliseconds (0 to 1000) before
moving nozzle down for mounting. This is used for better
accuracy.
‘Blow Time Setting’ Set whether to use customized blow time after placement. The
following 2 types are available.
・[Auto]
・[Specify Blow Time]
If [Auto] is selected, machine uses default blow time (=20 ms).
If [Specify Blow Time] is selected, machine use the value
defined in “Blow Time”.
‘Blow Time’ This value is used when [Specify Blow Time] is selected in
“Blow Time Setting”.
Use shorter value to avoid placement shift in case there is no
enough holding force.
‘Part Rejection’
‘Discard to’ Set the place where components are ejected. There are three
types as follows.
• [Dust Box]
• [NG ejection conveyor]
• [NG Tray]
‘Retry’
‘Pickup Error Setting’ Select how machine will act in case of pickup error. There are
two types as follows.
• [Parts Empty Stop]
• [Pickup Error Stop]
 On NPM machines, it is shown as [Pickup Error Stop]. Items
correspond the following settings.
Parts Empty Stop: Parts Empty
Pickup Error Stop: 1 (Stop immediately)

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-93

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Retry’
‘Parts Empty Count’ Set the retry count when ‘Pickup Error Setting’ is set to [Parts
Empty Stop] from the following options.
• [Use machine setting]
• [1] to [30]
 For NPM, this is not used. Perform [Use machine setting]
regardless of the setting.
‘Pickup Error Count’ Set the retry count when ‘Pickup Error Setting’ is set to [Pickup
Error Stop] from the following options.
• [Stop immediately]
• [2] to [5]
 For NPM, this is not used. Perform [Stop immediately]
regardless of the setting.
‘Recognition Error Stop’ Set whether to retry after recognition error from the following
two options.
• [Set Count]
• [Stop Immediate]
 Items on NPM machine screen corresponds as follows.
Set Count : 3
Stop immediately : 1
‘Recognition Error Count’ Set the number of retry when recognition error stop is set to
[Set count]. Select a number from;
• [1] to [3]
 Retry count setting is valid only for AM100. For other
machines, set retry count on the machine.
‘Validation’
‘Vacuum Sensor Mount Set to check whether to be mounted by the vacuum sensor.
Check’
‘Vacuum Sensor Pickup Set to check whether to be picked up by the vacuum sensor.
Check’
‘Part Thickness Set whether to measure the component thickness. (The
Measurement’ component thickness measuring sensor is optional.)
‘Thickness Variation Upper-limit of the component thickness
Upper-Limit’
‘Thickness Variation Lower-limit of the component thickness
Lower-Limit’
‘Thickness Measure’ Select the timing when component thickness measure will
happen. There are two types as follows.
• [First pickup]
The measurement will happen when the part is picked up
first time.
• [Every turn]
The measurement will happen on every turn.
‘Lamp Offset’
‘Shadow Lamp Offset’ Offset of a shadow lamp
‘Direct Lamp Offset’ Offset of a direct lamp
‘BGA Lamp Offset’ Offset of a BGA lamp
‘PIP Lamp Offset’ Offset of a PIP lamp

Page 6-94 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060603S-13E04

Item Explanation
‘Tape’
‘Advance Feeding’ Set whether to forward the tape before pickup starts. The
following 2 types are available.
• [No]
• [Yes]
‘Pickup Position Auto Teach’ Set whether to adjust the pickup position automatically. The
following 2 types are available.
• [No]
• [Yes]
‘Pickup Position Auto Teach Set whether to carry out the Pickup Position Auto Teach at
(splicing)’ splicing. There are 2 types as shown below.
• [No]
• [Yes]
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Set the feeding speed. There are four types as follows.
• [Standard (Fast)]
• [Fast]
• [Medium Speed]
• [Slow Speed]
‘Action After Splice Detection’ Set action during splicing detection. The following 2 types are
available.
• [Advance Feed]
• [Pick & Ignore Error]
‘Advance Feed Count’ Set the number of advance feed.
0 to 300
‘Part Height Detail’
‘Pickup Offset Z’ Enter the height on the pickup surface. When the pickup
surface is lower than the component surface, enter a positive
value.
0 to Part Size T
‘Eject Height’ Enter the height of placement surface. When the placement
surface overhangs from the component surface, enter a
positive value.
0 to 21

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-95

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Flux’
‘Transfer’ Set whether to carry out transfer.
• [No]
• [Yes]
‘Transfer Load’ Transferring load when using the transfer unit
0.5 to 28.0 N (28-N load head)
0.5 to 50.0 N (50-N load head)
0.5 to 8.0 N (8-N load head)
The transfer loads (all of the above) do not apply to the
8-nozzle head.
Standard: 2.5 N (28-N and 50-N load heads)
: 1.7 N (8-N load head)
‘Transfer Height’ Set the distance from the bottom of the part to the surface of a
transfer material during transfer the material. Negative value
(-) is the height to push into the transfer material. Positive
value (+) is a height which does not contact with the material.
-1.0 to 1.0
‘Squeegee Gap’ Squeegee gap: 0.015 to 0.9 mm
‘Transfer Time’ Transfer time: 0 to 990 ms
‘Transfer Speed’ Speed at transferring: 1 to 100 (Maximum speed of 100)
Valid values: 100 (Default), 80, 60, 40, 20
This is available only for the up-and-down movement of the
Z-axis in transferring.
‘Transfer Mode’ Set the transfer order. The following 3 types are available.
• [Transfer  Recognition]
• [Recognition  Transfer]
• [Recognition  Transfer  Recognition]

Parts060603S-55E03

Item Explanation
‘Stick Feeder’
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Set the feeding speed of the stick feeder. There are three types
as follows.
• [Standard (Fast)]
• [Medium Speed]
• [Slow Speed]

Page 6-96 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060603S-14E02

Item Explanation
‘Tray’
‘Lift Speed’ Set the tray lifter speed. There are three types as follows.
• [Low Speed]
• [Medium Speed]
• [High Speed]
‘Pull Axis Speed’ Set the tray drawing speed. There are three types as follows.
• [Low Speed]
• [Medium Speed]
• [High Speed]
‘Tray Position Recognition’ Set whether to recognize the tray position.

Parts060603S-21E00

Item Explanation
‘Custom feeder’
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Sets the feed speed for a custom feeder. There are three types
as follows.
• [Low]
• [Middle]
• [Standard]

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-97

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Machine-specific information (CM/DT models)

Information relating to the machine operations (CM/DT models) can be set in the
machine-specific information area.
(When the checkbox on the right of ‘Show’ is checked off, the setup data of CM/DT are also valid.)

Parts060603S-15E06

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Nozzle Selection’
‘Nozzle Ref’ Set the nozzle type to be used. You can set up to five types.

Page 6-98 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Chip Data’
‘Chip Size L’ Chip size of X 1
‘Chip Size W’ Chip size of Y 1
‘Chip Size T’ Chip size of Z
‘Chip Size MAX L’ The maximum chip size of X 1
‘Chip Size MAX W’ The maximum chip size of Y 1
‘Chip Kind’ Set the following chip types.
1. Fixed Resistor 2. Capacitor
3. Cylinder Resistor 4. Cylinder Capacitor
5. Tantalum Capacitor 6. Aluminum Electrolytic
Capacitor
7. Chip Inductor 8. Trimmer Capacitor
9. Semi-fixed 10. Coil
Potentiometer
11. Photocoupler 12. Switch
13. Film Capacitor 14. Mini Tr
15. Tr 16. Mini Power Tr
17. Diode 18. SOP
19. QFP 20. Connector
21. Resistor Network 22. Filter
23. Oscillator 24. Glass Tube Diode
25. FET 26. SOJ
27. PLCC 28. BGA
29. Transformer
50. Others
‘Package Angle’ Style-of-packing angle of components: -180 to 180 degrees
‘6.5.6 CM Package Angle Edit’
‘Extended Data’ Starts up the CM extension data edit screen.
‘6.5.7 CM Extension Data Edit’
‘Speed Parameters’
‘Pickup Speed’ Component pickup speed
Specify it with the percentage to the maximum speed. The
selectable options are 100 (standard), 80, 60, 40, and 20.
‘Mount Speed’ Component placement speed
Specify it with the percentage to the maximum speed. The
selectable options are 100 (standard), 80, 60, 40, and 20.
‘Pickup hold time’ Time during which the head is kept lowered for pickup. There
are three types as follows.
• [Standard]
• [Twofold]
• [Fourfold]
‘Mount hold time’ Time during which the head is kept lowered for placement.
There are three types as follows.
• [Standard]
• [Twofold]
• [Fourfold]

1: The definition of Chip Sizes L /W varies according to the chip recognition reference
number. For details, refer to the following.
‘6.5.3 Editing Components  ②Component shape information  ■When CM
reference number is used’ or ‘5.2.10 Edit Chip Information’ in the programming
manual (common to PT200 / PS200)

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-99

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Recognition’
‘Recognition Speed’ Component recognition speed. There are four types as
follows.
• [Auto]
• [High Speed]
• [Medium Speed]
• [Low Speed]
Normally, [Auto] is used. When [Auto] is selected, the machine
selects a proper speed from the component geometry. Instead
of the machine’s auto selection, you can also specify the
desired speed, which is not recommended.
‘Recog Height’ Height at which components are recognized
‘Chip Recognition’ Reference No.: 0 to 255
‘Lead Float Check’ Set whether to check the lead float.
‘Laser Recognition’ IC type for laser recognition: 0 to 20
‘Lead Float Limit’ Lead float tolerance
‘1st Laser Scanning Position’ Laser scanning position of the top side: 0 to 1.0
‘2nd Laser Scanning Position’ Laser scanning position of the right side: 0 to 1.0
‘3rd Laser Scanning Position’ Laser scanning position of the bottom side: 0 to 1.0
‘4th Laser Scanning Position’ Laser scanning position of the left side: 0 to 1.0
‘Recognize by Mount’ Sets whether to recognize a part by mount angle or not.
• [Yes]
• [No]
If [Yes] is selected, accuracy increases but tact time may
decrease. Even if [No] is selected, some parts may
automatically be judged by the machine to recognize by mount
angle.
‘Gap’
‘Pickup Gap’ Distance between a component and a nozzle in pickup.
(Nozzle height in component pickup)
When 0 is set, a component is picked up at its surface. With
the positive (+) direction, a component is picked up at the
height where it is pushed into a tape and tray. With the
negative () direction, a component is picked up at the height
where a nozzle does not touch it.
‘Mount Gap’ Distance between the component underside and PCB surface.
(Nozzle height in component placement)
When 0 is set, a component is placed at the height where it
touches the PCB. With the positive () direction, a component
is placed at the height where it is pushed into the PCB. With
the negative () direction, a component is placed at the height
where it does not touch the PCB.
‘Automatic Height Measure Set whether to carry out the automatic height measurement in
(cushion end sensor)’ pickup. The following 2 types are available.
• [No]
• [Yes]
When the pickup surface is unstable (soft), set it to [No].
‘Height Measure Gap’ Input the actual pickup height offset against the pickup height
measurement value.

Page 6-100 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060603S-16E06

Item Explanation
‘Pickup’
‘Pickup Offset X’ X-direction displacement amount from the normal pickup
position. -5.0 to 5.0
‘Pickup Offset Y’ Y-direction displacement amount from the normal pickup
position. -5.0 to 5.0
‘Pickup Angle’ Nozzle rotation angle in pickup
‘Mount’
‘Mount Load’ Load applied to a component in placement
‘Retry’
‘Pickup Error Stop’ Set whether to retry after Pickup error. There are two types as
follows.
• [Use machine setting]
• [Immediate Stop]

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-101

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Validation’
‘Vacuum Sensor Check’ Set whether to check the vacuum sensor.
(For high-speed head)
‘Vacuum Sensor Check’ Set whether to check the vacuum sensor.
(For multi-functional head)
‘Part Thickness Set whether to measure the component thickness. (The
Measurement’ component thickness measuring sensor is optional.)
‘Thickness Tolerance’ Component thickness measurement tolerance
‘Detect Standing’ Set whether to detect the component tombstoning.
(The component thickness measuring sensor is required for
detecting component tombstoning. The component thickness
measuring sensor is optional.)
‘Lamp Offset’
‘Shadow Lamp Offset’ Offset of a shadow lamp
‘Direct Lamp Offset’ Offset of a direct lamp
‘BGA Lamp Offset’ Offset of a BGA lamp
‘Flip Chip 1 Lamp Offset’ Offset of a flip-chip 1 lamp
‘Flip Chip 2 Lamp Offset’ Offset of a flip-chip 2 lamp
‘Reserve Lamp Offset’ Offset of a reserve lamp

Page 6-102 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060603S-17E03

Item Explanation
‘Tape’
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Set the feeding speed. There are four types as follows.
• [Standard (Fast)]
• [Fast]
• [Medium Speed]
• [Slow Speed]
‘Part Height Detail’
‘Pickup Offset Z’ Enter the height on the pickup surface. If the pickup surface is
formed in a recess shape from the part surface, enter a
positive value.
0 to chip size T
‘Eject Height’ Enter the height on the placement surface. If the placement
surface protrudes from the part surface, enter a positive value.
0 to 21
‘Flux’
‘Transfer’ Set whether to carry out transfer.
‘Transfer Load’ Transferring load when using the transfer unit
0.5 to 28.0 N (28-N load head)
0.5 to 50.0 N (50-N load head)
0.5 to 8.0 N (8-N load head)
The transfer loads (all of the above) do not apply to the
8-nozzle head.
Standard: 2.5 N (28-N and 50-N load heads)
: 1.7 N (8-N load head)
‘Transfer Height’ The height from transfer unit during transcription. Negative
value (-) is the height to press into the transfer unit. Positive
value (+) is a height which does not contact with the unit.
-1.0 to 1.0
‘Squeegee Gap’ Squeegee gap: 0.015 to 0.9 mm
‘Transfer Time’ Transfer time: 0 to 990 ms
‘Transfer Speed’ Speed at transferring: 1 to 100 (Maximum speed of 100)
Valid values: 100 (Default), 80, 60, 40, 20
This is available only for the up-and-down movement of the
Z-axis in transferring.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-103

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060603S-55E03

Item Explanation
‘Stick ’
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Set the feeding speed of the stick feeder. There are three types
as follows.
• [Standard (Fast)]
• [Medium Speed]
• [Slow Speed]

Page 6-104 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060603S-14E02

Item Explanation
‘Tray’
‘Lift Speed’ Set the tray lifter speed. There are three types as follows.
• [Low Speed]
• [Medium Speed]
• [High Speed]
‘Pull Axis Speed’ Set the tray drawing speed. There are three types as follows.
• [Low Speed]
• [Medium Speed]
• [High Speed]
‘Tray Position Recognition’ Set whether to recognize the tray position.

Parts060603S-21E00

Item Explanation
‘Custom feeder’
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Sets the feed speed for a custom feeder. There are three types
as follows.
• [Low]
• [Middle]
• [Standard]

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-105

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Machine-specific information (Insertion machine)

Information relating to operations of the machine (insertion machine) can be set in the
machine-specific information area. (When the checkbox on the right of ‘Show’ is checked off, the
setup data of the insertion machine is also valid.)
 The machine-specific information will be used for the insertion machine only. So the components,
set for the insertion machine, cannot be used for NPM or CM/DT.

Parts060603S-18E01

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Tool’
‘Kind’ Selects the type of the tool to be used.
There are four types as follows:
• [Body Chuck]
• [Lead Chuck]
• [Nozzle]
• [Swing Nozzle]
‘Tool Number’ Sets the type of the tool to be used.
Nozzle: 1001 to 9999
Body chuck: 10001 (Without adapter), 10002 to 10999 (With
adapter)
Lead chuck: 11001 (Standard), 11002 to 11999 (Special)
Swing nozzle: 12001 (Standard), 12002 to 12999 (Special)

Page 6-106 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Body Chuck’
‘Body Chuck Width Control’ Makes the body chuck width control setting.
• [Standard]
Adjusts the body chuck width to the overall component size.
• [Width]
Adjusts the body chuck width to the set width.
‘Body Chuck Width’ Sets the width for the body chuck to hold a component.
‘Body Chuck Gap Enter the value of the distance to extend if you want to set the
body chuck width larger than the one in a normal action when a
component is removed.
When 0 is set, the width is the same as in a normal action.
‘Body Chuck Depth Control’ Makes the body chuck depth control setting.
• [Standard]
Automatically calculate the height at which a component is
held.
• [Width]
Adjusts the holding depth to the set body chuck depth.
‘Body Chuck Depth’ Sets the height at which the body chuck holds a component.
‘Body Chuck Strength’ Sets the load that is applied on the claws when the body chuck
holds a component.
‘Swing Nozzle’
‘Swing Action’ Sets swing nozzle operation.
There are two types as follows:
• [No]
• [Yes]
‘Speed Parameters’
‘Pickup Speed’ Component pickup speed
Specify it with the percentage to the maximum speed. The
selectable options are 100 (standard), 80, 60, 40, and 20.
‘Mount Speed’ Component placement speed
Specify it with the percentage to the maximum speed. The
selectable options are 100 (standard), 80, 60, 40, and 20.
‘Pickup hold time’ Time during which the head is kept lowered for pickup. There
are three types as follows.
• [Standard]
• [2X]
• [4X]
‘Mount hold time’ Time during which the head is kept lowered for placement.
There are three types as follows.
• [Standard]
• [2X]
• [4X]

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-107

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Recognition’
‘Lighting’ Lighting mode used for component recognition. There are four
types as follows.
• [Shadow Lighting]
• [Direct Lighting]
• [BGA Lighting]
• [PIP Lighting]
Normally, [Direct Lighting] is used. To recognize narrow-pitch
leads, such as BGA and QFP, choose [BGA Lighting]. (Side
Lighting option is required.)
To recognize insertion leads, choose [PIP Lighting]. (PIP
Lighting option is required.)
If you desire the outline recognition e.g. because of the unstable
lead image, choose [Shadow Lighting].
‘Recognition Speed’ Component recognition speed. There are four types as follows.
• [Auto]
• [High Speed]
• [Medium Speed]
• [Low Speed]
Normally, [Auto] is used. When [Auto] is selected, the machine
selects a proper speed from the component geometry. Instead
of the machine’s auto selection, you can also specify the desired
speed, which is not recommended.
‘Recog Height’ Height at which components are recognized
‘Gap’
‘Pickup Gap’ Set a push-in depth of a component during pickup. (Nozzle
height in component pickup)
When 0 is set, a component is picked up at the height where the
nozzle is in contact with the component surface. With the
positive (+) direction, a component is picked up at the height
where it is pushed into a tape and tray. With the negative (-)
direction, a component is picked up at the height where a nozzle
does not touch it.
‘Mount Gap’ Set a push-in depth of a component during pickup. (Nozzle
height in component placement)
When 0 is set, a component is placed at the height where it
touches the PCB. With the positive (+) direction, a component is
placed at the height where it is pushed into the PCB. With the
negative (-) direction, a component is placed at the height where
it does not touch the PCB.
‘Automatic Height Measure Set whether to carry out the automatic height measurement in
(cushion end sensor)’ pickup. The following 2 types are available.
• [No]
• [Yes]
When the pickup surface is unstable (soft), set it to [No].
‘Automatic Height Measure at Set whether to carry out the Automatic Height Measure at
splicing’ splicing. There are 2 types as shown below.
• [No]
• [Yes]

Page 6-108 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Height Measure Gap’ Input the actual pickup height offset against the pickup height
measurement value.
When 0 is set, a component is picked up at the height where the
nozzle is in contact with the component surface. With the
positive (+) direction, a component is picked up at the height
where it is pushed into a tape and tray. With the negative (-)
direction, a component is picked up at the height where a nozzle
does not touch it.
‘3D Mount Gap’ Set a push-in depth of a component when 3D is mounted.
(Nozzle height during component placement)
When 0 is set, a component is mounted at the height where the
mounted component is in contact with the bottom side’s
component. With the positive (+) direction, a component is
mounted at the height where it is pushed into the bottom side’s
component. With the negative (-) direction, it is mounted at the
height where it does not touch the bottom side's component.
‘Pickup’
‘Pickup Offset X’ Offset in the X-direction from a normal pickup position.
Overall dimensions L/2 ＞ 5.0: -overall dimensions L/2 to overall
dimensions L/2
overall dimensions L/2 ≦ 5.0: -5.0 to 5.0
‘Pickup Offset Y’ Offset in the Y-direction from a normal pickup position.
overall dimensions W/2 ＞ 5.0: - overall dimensions W/2 to
overall dimensions W/2
overall dimensions W/2 ≦ 5.0: -5.0 ~ 5.0
‘Pickup Angle’ Nozzle rotation angle in pickup
‘Gang Pickup’ Sets whether to perform simultaneous pickup. There are two
types as follows.
• [Allow]
• [Not Allow]
‘Pickup Motion (Down)’ Sets the nozzle descending motion during pickup. There are two
types as follows.
・[1 step]
・[2 steps」
‘2 Step Pickup Motion Height Sets this if you want to start a 2-step down motion earlier than a
Offset (Down)’ regular motion when 2-step down pickup motion is performed.
‘Pickup Motion (Up)’ Sets the nozzle ascending motion during pickup. There are two
types as follows.
・[1 step]
・[2 steps]
‘2 Step Pickup Motion Height Sets this if you want to start a 2-step up motion earlier than a
Offset (Up)’ regular motion when 2-step down pickup motion is performed.
‘Pickup Position Learning’ Set whether to learn and automatically adjust the pickup
position.
 This is valid when a nozzle whose pickup position learning
function is set ON in nozzle library setting is used for
placement.
‘Pickup Shift Tolerance’ Acceptable amount of the pickup position displacement

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-109

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060603S-19E01

Item Explanation
‘Mount’
‘Mount Load’ Load applied to a component in placement
‘Mount Motion’ Set the nozzle lowering motion in placement. There are two
types as follows.
• [1 step]
• [2 step]
(Since a nozzle of the 2-nozzle general-purpose head lowers by
two steps, this will be ignored for it.)
‘2 Step Motion Start Height Set this to start 2 Step Motion earlier than a regular motion when
Offset’ using it for placement. Tact time will be worse, but the load on
the parts during placement will be reduced.
‘Wait Before Mount’ Machine will wait defined milliseconds (0 to 1000) before moving
nozzle down for mounting. This is used for better accuracy.
‘Insert Load’ Set the insert load that is required for injection after the lowering
of the head for placement (the standard load until the head is
lowered for placement)
‘Push After Insertion’ Set whether a component is pushed into using the pusher after it
is inserted. If the pushing action generates a negative impact on
the component or unstable component position, select [No].
‘Part Rejection’
‘Discard to’ Set the place where components are ejected. There are three
types as follows.
• [Dust Box]
• [NG ejection conveyor]
• [NG Tray]

Page 6-110 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Retry’
‘Pickup Error Setting’ Select how machine will act in case of pickup error. There are
two types as follows.
• [Parts Empty Stop]
• [Pickup Error Stop]
 On NPM machines, it is shown as [Pickup Error Stop]. Items
correspond the following settings.
Parts Empty Stop: Parts Empty
Pickup Error Stop: 1 (Stop immediately)
‘Parts Empty Stop’ Set the retry count when ‘Pickup Error Setting’ is set to [Parts
Empty Stop] from the following options.
• [Use machine setting]
• [1] to [30]
‘Pickup Error Stop’ Set the retry count when ‘Pickup Error Setting’ is set to [Pickup
Error Stop] from the following options.
• [Stop immediately]
• [2] to [5]
‘Recognition Error Stop’ Set whether to retry after recognition error from the following two
options.
• [Set Count]
• [Stop Immediate]
 Items on NPM machine screen corresponds as follows.
Set Count : 3
Stop immediately : 1
‘Recognition Error Count’ Set the number of retry when recognition error stop is set to [Set
count]. Select a number from;
• [1] to [3]
 Retry count setting is valid only for AM100. For other
machines, set retry count on the machine.
‘Validation’
‘Vacuum Sensor Mount Check’ Set to check whether to be mounted by the vacuum sensor.
‘Vacuum Sensor Pickup Check’ Set to check whether to be picked up by the vacuum sensor.
‘Part Thickness Measurement’ Set whether to measure the component thickness. (The
component thickness measuring sensor is optional.)
‘Thickness Variation Upper-limit of the component thickness
Upper-Limit’
‘Thickness Variation Lower-limit of the component thickness
Lower-Limit’
‘Thickness Measure’ Select the timing when component thickness measure will
happen. There are two types as follows.
• [First pickup]
The measurement will happen when the part is picked up first
time.
• [Every turn]
The measurement will happen on every turn.
‘Insertion Check’ Set whether insertion detection is performed or not. If
component detection is unstable because component shape
variations are too large or a shape is specific, select [No].
‘Lamp Offset’
‘Shadow Lamp Offset’ Offset of a shadow lamp
‘Direct Lamp Offset’ Offset of a direct lamp
‘BGA Lamp Offset’ Offset of a BGA lamp
‘PIP Lamp Offset’ Offset of a PIP lamp

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-111

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Parts060603S-20E00

Item Explanation
‘Tape’
‘Advance Feeding’ Set whether to forward the tape before pickup starts. The
following 2 types are available.
• [No]
• [Yes]
‘Pickup Position Auto Teach’ Set whether to adjust the pickup position automatically. The
following 2 types are available.
• [No]
• [Yes]
‘Pickup Position Auto Teach Set whether to carry out the Pickup Position Auto Teach at
(splicing)’ splicing. There are 2 types as shown below.
• [No]
• [Yes]
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Set the feeding speed. There are four types as follows.
• [Standard (Fast)]
• [Fast]
• [Medium Speed]
• [Slow Speed]
‘Action After Splice Detection’ Set action during splicing detection. The following 2 types are
available.
• [Advance Feed]
• [Pick & Ignore Error]
‘Advance Feed Count’ Set the number of advance feed.
0 to 300

Page 6-112 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Tray’
‘Lift Speed’ Set the tray lifter speed. There are three types as follows.
• [Low Speed]
• [Medium Speed]
• [High Speed]
‘Pull Axis Speed’ Set the tray drawing speed. There are three types as follows.
• [Low Speed]
• [Medium Speed]
• [High Speed]
‘Tray Position Recognition’ Set whether to recognize the tray position.
‘Stick Feeder’
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Set the feeding speed of the stick feeder. There are three types
as follows.
• [Standard (Fast)]
• [Medium Speed]
• [Slow Speed]
‘Radial Tape’
‘Advance Feeding’ Set whether to forward the tape before pickup starts. The
following 2 types are available.
• [No]
• [Yes]
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Set the feeding speed of the radial tape feeder. There are three
types as follows.
• [Standard (Fast)]
• [Medium Speed]
• [Slow Speed]
‘Radial Reference Height’ Set the distance between the feed hole in tape and the contact
surface between the component and PCB.
‘Custom feeder’
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Sets the feed speed for a custom feeder. There are three types
as follows.
• [Low]
• [Middle]
• [Standard]
‘Part Height Detail’
‘Pickup Offset Z’ Enter the height on the pickup surface. When the pickup
surface is lower than the component surface, enter a positive
value.
0 to Part Size T
‘Eject Height’ Enter the height of placement surface. When the placement
surface overhangs from the component surface, enter a
positive value.
0 to 21
‘Maximum Part Height’ Set the total component height from the bottom of the lead to
the top of the component.
‘Body Height’ Set the height, from the PCB surface to the top of the
component, of the component in condition of being inserted.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-113

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Lead’
‘Lead Diameter’ Set the outer diameter of the insertion lead.
‘Lead Pitch’ Set the spacing between the individual insertion leads set in
line and spaced equally.
‘Lead Count’ Set the number of the individual leads set in line and spaced
equally.
‘Clinch’
‘Clinch’ Set anvil unit operation.
There are three types as follows:
• [No]: No operation.
• [Clinch]: Cutting or bending of a lead under PCB.
• [PCB Support]: Supports PCB from below. No cutting or
bending of a lead.
‘Clinch Angle’ Set the tilt angle of the anvil unit with reference to the angle of
the insertion head.
‘Outer Lead Distance’ Set the spacing between the two outermost leads.
For the machine with anvil unit, these leads are cut or bent.
‘Insertion Detection Level’ Set the insertion detection level in the range of 0 to 7if clinching
leads. Set it to a lower value when the leads are soft, and,
when the leads are hard, to a higher value.

Page 6-114 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Browsing help
In machine specific information, you can browse the effective range or descriptions of the value
from Help.

1 From ‘Machine Specific Information’,

choose a desired item for checking
help.

 Help can be browse on both NPM and CM/DT.

Parts060603S-42E00
1

2 Click (Help) or choose [View] 

[Help] on the menu bar.

 Description of the selected item is displayed.

2  To exit, unmark the checkmark of [Help] under

[View] or click on the help window.
Parts060603S-43E01

Parts060603S-44E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-115

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Nozzle check
Nozzle information relating to a component is set.

Parts060603S-20E02

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Part Size’
‘X’ Displays the top/bottom size of the component outside
dimensions.
‘Y’ Displays the right/left size of the component outside
dimensions.
‘Nozzle Information’
‘Nozzle Library’ Displays the nozzles registered in the nozzle library.
‘Selected Nozzles’ Displays the nozzles selected from the nozzle library.
‘Size’
‘X’ Shows the nozzle width.
‘Y’ Shows the nozzle height.
‘Pickup Information’
‘Offset X’ Sets the offset (pickup position X) in X-direction from the
component center.
‘Offset Y’ Sets the offset (pickup position Y) in Y-direction from the
component center.
‘Angle’ Sets the pickup angle.

Page 6-116 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Button
Button Explanation
‘Nozzle Information’
Right arrow Designates the nozzle selected in ‘Nozzle Library’ as
candidates.
Left arrow Releases the selected nozzle.

Up arrow Moves up the order of the candidate for nozzles.

Down arrow Moves down the order of the candidate for nozzles.
‘Pickup Information’
[Redraw] Refreshes the image of the pickup position.
[OK] Saves the data and exits the nozzle check.
[Cancel] Exits the nozzle check without saving the data.

 Right-click menu (Pickup information)

Item Explanation
[Copy] Copies the selected value.
[Cut] Cuts the selected value.
[Paste] Pastes the copied/cut value.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-117

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Setting of nozzle information relating to components

1 Click the nozzle check on the

right side of ‘Nozzle Selection’ under
‘Machine Specific Information.’

 The nozzle configuration window opens.

1

Parts060603S-25E07

2 Choose a candidate for nozzles in

‘Nozzle Library,’ and click the right
arrow .

 An image of the selected nozzle is displayed

2 on the component image. If the nozzle is not
registered during installation, the nozzle tip
2 outline dimensions are displayed as square.

 To release the selected nozzle, choose it and

click the left arrow .

 To change the candidate order of the selected

nozzle, choose it and click the up arrow or
down arrow .

Parts060603S-27E01

Page 6-118 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

3 Choose the nozzle to set the pickup

information in Selected Nozzles.

 The image of the pickup position is displayed.

3
4 Set ‘Offset X,’ ‘Offset Y,’ and ‘Angle’
under ‘Pickup Information,’ and click
[Redraw].

 The image of the pickup position is refreshed.

5 Click [OK].

4  The data is saved, and the nozzle check

4 window closes.
Parts060603S-32E02

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-119

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Confirmation dialog for supply angle /CM package angle change

When the package angle of supply angle /CM machine-specific information is changed or the
parts data having CM machine-specific information is imported, the following window appears.

① Confirmation dialog for supply angle change

 An angle before change is shown on the left
and the one after change is shown on the
right. When the package angle is
automatically edited, mark the checkbox of
‘Update CM/DT Package Angle automatically’.
‘6.5.3 Editing Components 
④ Machine-specific information 
■ Machine-specific information (CM/DT
models)’

 For batch editing, you cannot select automatic

update.

Parts060603S-42E01

② Confirmation dialog for CM package angle change

 As same as supply angle change, an angle
before change is shown on the left and the one
after change is shown on the right. When the
supply angle is automatically edited, mark the
checkbox of ‘Update Supply Direction
automatically’. By referring to the supply
image, edit the supply angle.
‘6.5.3 Editing Components  ③ Feeder
information’

 If the supply type of components is other than

a tape or a tray, editing is not necessary.

 For batch editing, you cannot select automatic

update.
Parts060603S-43E01

③ Confirmation dialog for component import

 This window appears if the CM/DT package
angle is updated while the CM/DT data is
overwritten and imported. When the supply
angle is automatically edited, mark
checkboxes of ‘Select’ in the parts list.
‘6.4 Importing/Exporting Component Data’

 The import result can be exported into a CSV

file by pressing the [Export] button.

 Details of the import result and export are

described in the next page.
Parts060603S-44E01

Page 6-120 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Exporting the component import result

Change of the CM/DT package angle updated by importing components is exported per
component into a CSV file.

1 Click [Export].

Parts060603S-44E01
1

2 Choose a location to be exported.

2 3 Type a filename.

4 Click [Save].

 The CSV file can be output from ‘Format’ on

the CM package update warning dialog
window.
Refer the file after import and check the
package angle of the overwritten components.
3 ‘6.5.3 Editing Components  ③ Feeder
Parts060603S-45E00 Information’.
4
 If the supply type of components is other than
a tape or a tray, editing is not necessary.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-121

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

⑤ Advanced
Set the detailed information relating to components.
For setup details, refer to Recognition Option Data.

Parts060603S-33E04

 Detailed setup menu

Toolbar
Menu item Default After Explanation
edit
Set the tolerance of component size.
[Tolerance...] Recognition Option Data ‘2.3 Tolerance’

Set the lead type/lead sidewall form of box-shaped components, lead

[Lead type / Ground
components, and ball components.
Plane...] (Display will not be
Recognition Option Data ‘2.4 Lead Type / Ground Plane’
changed.)
[Offset Check for Dense Set the inspection for adjacent components.
Mounting...] Recognition Option Data ‘2.5 Offset Check for Dense Mounting ’
Set head camera recognition of a part.
[Head Camera Recognition
― ― Recognition Option Data ‘6.13 Head Camera Recognition
Option(s)...]
Option’
Set the component brightness check.
[Brightness Check...] Recognition Option Data ‘2.6 Brightness Check’

Set the missing lead of lead components.

[Missing Pins...] Recognition Option Data ‘2.7 Missing Pins’

Set the missing ball of ball components.

[Missing Balls...] Recognition Option Data ‘2.8 Missing Balls’

Set the all-ball recognition.

[All Ball Detection...] Recognition Option Data ‘2.9 All-Ball Detection’

Set the component shape

[Shape Options...] Recognition Option Data ‘3 Shape Options’

Set the component recognition method.

[Vision Options...] Recognition Option Data ‘4 Recognition Options’

Link inspection data.

[Inspection Data] ‘6.5.4 Inspection Data’

Page 6-122 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Toolbar
Menu item Default After Explanation
edit
Set the dispensing option data.
[Dispense Options]
‘6.5.5 Dispensing Option Data’

Set a substitute component.

[Substitute Part]
‘6.8 Setting Substitute Components’
Set a first pin position.
[First Pin...] ― ―
‘6.5.8 Setting First Pin’
Sets support pins to a component.
[Support Pin] ― ―
‘6.5.9 Support Pin’

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-123

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

⑥ Component menu
Export and import the rotation setting or supply information as well as save and exit the part
editor.

Parts060603S-34E03

Item Explanation
[Rotate Package] Sets up the rotation of a package.
[CAD Rotation] Sets CAD rotation. For CAD rotation, ‘5.8.13 CAD Rotation’.
[Export Supply Information] Exports feeder information of a part.
[Export Supply Information] Imports feeder information of a part.
[Save]
Saves parts data. (The same as on the toolbar.)
[Exit] Exits the parts editor. (The same as in the right upper part
of the parts editor.)

 If Lighting is not appropriate to the nozzle or reference when data is saved, a warning message is
displayed. See ‘6.11 Lighting recognition check list’ for more information on the warning
message.

Page 6-124 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Rotate package

1 Choose an angle you wish to rotate.

2 Click on [Rotate].
2

1
Parts060603S-35E01

 The part that has rotated is shown. (The left

figure shows the case where ‘90’ is selected)

 The angle selected for the rotate package will

not be converted to a placement angle. Upon
completion of the rotate package, recheck the
PCB.
When you change the placement angle of
components, see ‘5.8.3 Adding
Placement Points’.

Parts060603S-36E01

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-125

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 CAD rotation
Sets placement angle when the PCB is imported per a CAD system.

1 Select an angle from the drop-down

list or directly type it.

2 Click [OK].

Parts060603S-37E01 2

3 Save the part editor.

 CAD rotation is reflected to the part.

 If you mark the checkbox of "Show

confirmation dialog when CAD rotation is
changed" in DGS Settings tab of General
settings, the confirmation window appears.
3 For details, see the next page. About DGS
Parts060603S-38E00 setting, ‘3.2.3 DGS Setting ■About CAD
rotation’.

 If CAD rotation is changed from the PCB editor

while the part editor opens, the following
dialog opens and the change of CAD rotation
on the part editor will be cleared. Even though
the change of CAD rotation is cleared, other
changes are saved.

Parts060603S-45E00

Page 6-126 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Confirmation dialog when CAD rotation is changed

If you mark the checkbox of "Show confirmation dialog when CAD rotation is changed" in DGS
Settings tab of General settings, the confirmation window appears. About DGS setting,
‘3.2.3 DGS Setting ■About CAD rotation’.

① ‘Apply new product only during CAD Import’ is set in DGS Settings
 The list of PCBs which use changed
components is displayed. Even though
changes are reflected to the components, the
changes are not reflected to the placement
angle of PCB in the list. For editing and
confirming each PCB, ‘5.8.13 CAD
Rotation ■CAD Angle Conversion Table
Setting’.

Parts060603S-39E00

② ‘Apply exisitng products also’ is set in the DGS Settings

 PCBs to reflect changes are displayed as a
list. After clicking [OK], the placement angle is
reflected to PCBs to be opened and displayed
in the list.

 When changes are reflected to an existing

PCB, if PCBs in the list are edited, the
following dialog box appears.

Parts060603S-40E00

Parts060603S-41E00

[Retry] : Updates a placement angle

again.
[Ignore] : Skips to update a placement
angle of the locked PCB.
[Cancel] : Cancels placement angle update.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-127

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Exporting supply information

Export Supply Information allows you to change the feeder type and save supply information in a
file as source data when changing supply information.

1 Select [Export Supply Information]

Parts menu.

Parts060603S-46E00

2 Click of Export to.

 The <Save As> window opens.

Parts060603S-47E00
2

3 Choose the export location.

3
4 Type a filename.

5 Click [Save].

 The <Save As> window closes and the

entered filename is displayed.
4
Parts060603S-48E00
5

6 Click [OK].

 The supply information file (*.Sup) is exported.

Parts060603S-49E00
6

Page 6-128 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Importing supply information

Supply information import allows you to load a desired supply information file of a part by
changing the feeder type per mount condition. This will enable restore supply information or omit
setting a supply type to be changed.

1 Choose [Import Supply Information]

from Parts menu.

1
Parts060603S-50E00

2 Click of import from.

 The <Open> window opens.

Parts060603S-51E00 2

3 Choose a location of a supply

information file.
3

4 4 Choose desired a supply information

file (*.Sup) to be imported.

5 Click [Open].

Parts060603S-52E00  The <Open> window closes and the entered

5 file name is displayed.

6 Click [OK].

Parts060603S-53E00
6

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-129

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Import is executed and supply information is

imported to the part.

Parts060603S-54E00

Page 6-130 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

6.5.4 Inspection Data Link

Set inspection data for component data.
 The use of the automatic generation function of the inspection editor, rather than this function, is
recommended to add inspection data as a new entry.
( ‘1.2. Flow of Production Data Edit’ in the 2D inspection editor manual)

 How to set an inspection data link

1 Click either [Advanced] in the menu

bar  [Inspection Data] or
(Inspection Data) in the tool bar.

 The <Link Inspection Data> window opens.

Parts060504S-07E02
1

2 Choose a template for inspection

data.

 The selected inspection data is shown in the

description box.
2
 Choose an inspection data template close to
the component data. (Details can be edited
using the inspection editor.)

3 Click [Link].

Parts060504S-08E00
3  The confirmation box appears, with the
dialogue indicating that Inspection data
successfully linked for the part.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-131

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

4 Click [OK].

 The dialogue ends, and you will go back to the

Part Editor screen.

Parts060504S-09E00

 When <Link Inspection Data> screen is

redisplayed, ‘check options’ will be set up.

Parts060504S-10E00

Page 6-132 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

6.5.5 Dispensing Option Data

Set dispensing options for components requiring dispensing.

 Adding a new dispensing option

1 Choose [Advanced]  [Dispensing

Option] on the menu bar, or click

1 (Dispensing option) on the

toolbar.

 The <Dispense Option> window opens.

Parts060503S-54E03

2 Check off ‘Dispense.’

3 Set each item.

2

4 Click [Apply] or [OK].

 Clicking [OK] closes the <Dispense Option>

window.

 To add more options, click [Add Condition]

and repeat steps 3 and 4.

Parts060503S-02E02
4

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-133

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Dispensing option
Set dispensing options for each component.

Parts060503S-02E03

 Items to be set
Item Explanation
‘Dispense Nozzle Shape’
‘Nozzle No’ Choose a nozzle to use.
‘Dispense Condition’
‘Head Up Position’ Head rising height after dispensing (0 mm to 30 mm)
‘Dispense Period’ Set the dispensing time.
‘Dispense Timing Control’ With ON displayed, lowering/rising is carried out in two steps.
For details, see ‘4.3.3 Option Configuration’  ‘
Dispensing timing control.’
‘Dispense Height’ Set the dispensing height. (0.001 mm to 30.0 mm)
 Settable within the head rising height range
This can be set only when the dispensing timing control is ON.
‘Waiting time at bottom dead Time to wait at the bottom dead point during dispensing
point in dispensing’ (0.000s to 9.999s)
This can be set only when the dispensing timing control is ON.
‘Waiting time after rising Time to wait after rising during dispensing (0.000s to 9.999s)
during dispensing’ This can be set only when the dispensing timing control is ON.
‘Head stop position’ Distance between the nozzle and PCB surface in dispensing
(Nozzle height in dispensing) (-0.100 mm to 3.000 mm)
When 0 is set, dispensing is carried out at the height that the
nozzle touches the PCB surface. With the positive value (+),
dispensing is carried out at the height where the nozzle does
not touch the PCB surface. With the negative value (-),
dispensing is carried out at the height where the nozzle pushes
into the PCB.

Page 6-134 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Item Explanation
‘Dispense Condition’
‘Dispense Type’ Select the dispensing timing.
• Before placement
• After placement
‘Dispensing up speed (1st Rising speed in dispensing
step)’ Specify it in percentage against the maximum speed.
The choices are 100, 80, 60, 40, and 20 with the standard
value of 100.
‘Dispensing up speed (2nd Rising speed in dispensing
step)’ This can be used when the dispensing timing control is ON.
Specify it in percentage against the maximum speed.
The choices are 100, 80, 60, 40, and 20 with the standard
value of 100.
‘Dispensing down speed (1st Lowering speed in dispensing
step)’ Specify it in percentage against the maximum speed.
The choices are 100, 80, 60, 40, and 20 with the standard
value of 100.
‘Dispensing down speed (2nd Lowering speed in dispensing
step)’ This can be used when the dispensing timing control is ON.
Specify it in percentage against the maximum speed.
The choices are 100, 80, 60, 40, and 20 with the standard
value of 100.
‘Discharge after dispensing’ When this is set to ON, discharge is performed after
dispensing to a component. When a series of dispensing is
performed, discharge is performed after a series of dispensing
is finished.
‘Drawing data’
‘Drawing’ Set the drawing data.
‘Multiple Dispense Data’
‘Multiple Dispensing’ Set the multiple dispensing data.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-135

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Setting drawing data

1 Choose ON in the ‘Drawing’ box.

2 Click the setting button of the drawing

data.

 The <Drawing Data> window opens.

Parts060503S-05E02

3 Type each item in the drawing data.

 For details of each item, see the table of ‘■

Setting item of the drawing data’ described
later.

Parts060503S-06E00

Page 6-136 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

① For entering the drawing position data manually

4 Click [Add].

4
Parts060503S-07E00

5 Enter X-coordinate, Y-Coordinate and

Drawing Pattern (Dot, Move, Line).

 Draw on the image in orange color.

Clicking [Trace] displays the image of
dispensing drawing with movie.

 To add more drawing position data, click

[Add], and execute the step 5.
(Up to 100 data can be set.)

5  Positions to add line are as follows.

Add line Select the first line and click
before the [Add].
first line
Add line in Select before and after lines to
Parts060503S-08E00 the middle add line (click with holding
down the [Shift] key) and click
6 [Add].
Add line Select the last line and click
after the [Add].
last line

6 Click [OK].

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-137

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

② For entering the drawing position data by selecting the draw type

4 Click [Draw Type].

5 Choose the Draw Route Type (Cross

or Spiral).
4
 For details of the screen, see the table of ‘■
Setting item of the drawing type’ described
later.

6 Choose the drawing type in the Detail.

Parts060503S-07E00

5 7 Enter the size (a, b, c) of the selected

drawing type. (Unit: mm)

8 Click [OK].

 The drawing position data of the selected

drawing type is automatically entered.

 If there is existing drawing position data, it is

added to the next line.

 If there are more than 100 drawing position

data upon addition, a following confirmation
6 dialog opens. To add the halfway drawing
data, select [Yes], and to edit it, select [No].

7
Parts060503S-09E01

Parts060503S-16E00

9 Click [OK].

Parts060503S-10E00 9

Page 6-138 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Setting item of the drawing data

Item Explanation
‘Drawing Data’
‘Drawing Speed’ The draw speed is set. ( 0.01 mm/s to 99.99 mm/s )
‘Waiting Time’ The waiting time (the time from moving XY beam and the time
to lower the nozzle). ( 0.00 s to 9.99 s )
Set this in the case of curving the drawing shape.
‘Drawing Stop Period’ The drawing stop time (downtime when drawing direction
changes) is set. ( 0.00 s to 9.99 s )
Set this in the case of curving the drawing shape when the
direction changes.
‘Suck Back Period’ The sack back time (the time to return the material to the
nozzle by reversely rotating the nozzle after drawing ends) is
set. ( 0.00 s to 9.99 s )
Set this in the case of the drawing shape being unsterilized
after drawing ends.
‘Up Wait Time’ The waiting time for raising (the time to raise nozzle after
drawing) is set. ( 0.00 s to 9.99 s )
Set this in the case of the drawing shape being unsterilized
after drawing ends.
 This is the time after suck back is complete.
‘Up Standby Position’ The standby position for raising (the position where drawing is
completed and the nozzle moves to the next drawing action) is
set. ( 2.500 mm to 25.000 mm)
 You can also set in the ‘Head Raise Position’ in the
dispensing option.
‘Standby Time’ The standby time (the time that drawing action is complete and
the nozzle moves to the next drawing action) is set. ( 0.00 s to
9.99 s )
‘Discharge’ Whether dummy dispensing is performed or not is set. ( On /
Off )
‘Comment’ Enter comments. (Up to 8 characters)
‘Drawing Position Data’
‘Drawing Number’ The order for drawing is displayed. ( 1 to 100 )
‘X-Coordinate’ The drawing X coordinate of which the component center is to
be 0 is set.
( -100.000 mm to 100.000 mm )
‘Y-Coordinate’ The drawing Y coordinate of which the component center shall
be 0 is set.
( -100.000 mm to 100.000 mm )
‘Drawing Pattern’ The drawing pattern is selected (Point, Move, Straight)

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-139

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

Setting item of the drawing type

■ Cross type drawing type
Item Explanation
‘Detail’
‘Drawing Type’ Select the drawing type.
• Cross type

‘a’ Dimensions (a) of the selected drawing type are set.

0.01mm to (double of larger size of either X or Y of the
component size) mm
‘b’ Dimensions (b) of the selected drawing type are set.
0.01mm to (double of larger size of either X or Y of the
component size) mm

■ Spiral type drawing type

Item Explanation
‘Detail’
‘Drawing Type’ Select the drawing type.
• Spiral type

‘a’ Dimensions (a) of the selected drawing type are set.

0.01mm to (double of component size X) mm
‘b’ Dimensions (b) of the selected drawing type are set.
0.01mm to (double of component size Y) mm
‘c’ Dimensions (c) of the selected drawing type are set.
0.01mm to (smaller one of either a or b) mm

Page 6-140 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

■ Oval, arc type drawing types

Item Explanation
‘Detail’
‘Drawing Type’ Select the drawing type.

• Oval type • Arc type

b
b
End
Start
a a

Y Y

Part X Part X
Center Center

‘a’ Dimensions (a) of the selected drawing type are set.

0.01mm to (double of component size Y) mm
‘b’ Dimensions (b) of the selected drawing type are set.
0.01mm to (double of component size X) mm
‘X’ Sets the distance (X) from the part center to the center of the
drawing type.
- (Part size X) mm to (Part size X) mm
‘Y’ Sets the distance (Y) from the part center to the center of the
drawing type.
- (Part size Y) mm to (Part size Y) mm
‘Start angle’ Sets the start angle when drawing oval / arc.
0° to 360°
‘End angle’ Sets the end angle when drawing arc . (arc only)
• Arc: 0° to 360°
‘Top’ Sets the number of straight lines used for drawing oval / arc. By
increasing the number of points, you can draw smoothly, but
more drawing position data will be necessary.
3 to 99

 Supplementary
 Cross type :
It is used for fall prevention of the backside of large components after reflow.

 Spiral type :
It is used for fall prevention of the backside of the large components after reflow and heat
release for a transistor, etc.

 Oval type :
It is used for oval type components.

 Arc type:
It is used for four corners of a component or dispensing of fan-shaped component.

The amount of dispensing is different between the cross type and the spiral type. The larger
amount of dispensing can be expected more to release more heat.
Multiple points dispensing can be expected to have the same effect as well. Since it is required
to dispense as little material as possible while drawing, if the component can be fixed by a
small amount of material, multiple points dispensing is more effective.
The less dispensing amount will be expected to have a faster tact time.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-141

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Setting the multipoint dispensing data

1 Set ‘Multiple Dispensing’ ON.

2 Click the multipoint dispensing data

setup button.

 The <Multi Dispense Data> window opens.

1
2

Parts060503S-11E01

3 Click [Add].

4 Enter the X and Y coordinates and the

angle.

 The drawing image set to the multipoint

dispensing image is drawn.

 The drawing images shown in the multipoint

dispensing image are displayed as follows.
(Multipoint dispensing data in an unselected
state)
3 If the dispensing type is before placement:
Parts060503S-03E00
Red
If the dispensing type is after placement:
Blue
(The multipoint dispensing data in a currently
selected state)
Displays in pink

 To add more conditions, click [Add] and repeat

steps 3 and 4.

5 Click [OK].

Parts060503S-04E00

Page 6-142 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Multipoint dispensing data setting item

Item Explanation
‘Drawing Number’ Shows the dispensing order.
‘X-Coordinate’ Dispensing X-coordinate with the component center set as 0
‘Y-Coordinate’ Dispensing Y-coordinate with the component center set as 0
‘Angle’ Sets the dispensing angle.

 Coordinates and angle image

Example of coordinate and angle image

Before placement
Dispensing nozzle shape: 4 points
Dispensing type:
Before placement (Red) (*1)
X-coordinate: -3.000
Y-coordinate: -3.000
Angle: 30.00

After placement
Dispensing nozzle shape: 3 points
Dispensing type:
Parts060503S-12E00
After placement (Blue) (*1)
X-coordinate: 3.000
Y-coordinate: 3.000
Angle: -30.00

*1: If both types are displayed in pink if they

are being selected in the multi
dispense data list.

About coordiante
+ shall be ( 0, 0 ).

About the setting of the number of points

for the multipoint dispensing data.
Up to 100 points can be set for the multipoint
dispensing data.

Parts060503S-13E00

About angle
Rotates counter clock-wise in +.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-143

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Flow of dispensing data setup

The flow of creating data used in dispensing operation is as follows.
Suppose initial settings, such as for the library, are complete (if not, see ‘4.3.3 Option
Configuration’  ‘ Dispensing condition data default’), the procedure for adding dispensing data
using the production data with the set placement points is shown below.

Check the PCB data to add dispensing data using the data creation
1. Checking the PCB data
job editor.

2. Adding dispensing Set presence/absence of the dispensing data in the component

functions / Setting the data edit.
data When dispensing setting is enabled, set the dispensing condition.

3. Checking dispensing Check the placement points to carry out dispensing using the data
points / Setting the creation job editor.
dispensing skip This should be set before dispensing skip is executed.

4. Setting the dispensing

condition Set the dispensing condition.

5. Optimization / Outputting
the production data

1. Checking the PCB data

1 Display the desired job on the data

creation job editor, and click [Product].

2 Double-click the desired component

to add the dispensing data. (Or,
right-click on the desired component,
1 and choose [Edit Part xxx].)

 The part editor window opens.

Project060504S-04E00

Page 6-144 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

2. Adding dispensing functions / Setting the data

1 Choose [Advanced]  [Dispensing

Option] on the menu bar, or click

1 (Dispensing option) on the

toolbar.

 The <Dispense Option> window opens.

Parts060603S-54E03

2 Check off ‘Dispense.’

2
3 Set each item.

 See ‘6.5.5 Dispensing Option Data’ to set the

dispensing condition.

4 Click [Apply] or [OK].

 Clicking [OK] closes the <Dispense Option>

window.

Parts060503S-02E03

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-145

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

5 Check that the dispensing option

display is enabled ( ), and then
5
click (Save).

Parts060603S-54E03

3. Checking dispensing points / Setting the dispensing skip

1 Choose [Dispense] under ‘Machine.’

 Placement points to dispense are shown in

light yellow, dispense points (before
1 placement) are shown in red and dispense
points (after placement) are shown in blue. Ｐ
Placement points except for the above are
shown in light gray.

Project070603S-01E03

2 Confirm the components to be

dispensed.

 To set the component dispensing skip, see

‘7.7.3 Skipping Component Dispensing.’

Project070603S-02E03 Project050802S-119E02

Page 6-146 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

4. Setting the dispensing condition

1 Choose [Dispense Condition] from

‘Settings’ on the project bar or [Edit] 
[Dispense Condition] on the menu bar.

 See ‘7.11.7 Dispensing Option Data’ for

setting.

Product071007S-01E00 1 2 Carry out optimization.

 Carry out optimization, seeing ‘7.12.1

Optimization.’

3 Output the production data.

 Output the production data, seeing

‘7.12.3 Production Data Output (Output to
Folder).’

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-147

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

6.5.6 CM Package Angle Edit

Edits package angle of a CM component.

1 Choose ‘CM/DT’ in ‘Machine Specific

Information’.

1
2 Click of ‘Package Angle’ or directly
type the value in the package angle
field.
2 2  If is clicked, the <Package Angle> window
opens.

 If the package angle is directly typed, go to

step 4.

Parts060506S-25E01

3 Choose a desired angle and click

[OK].

 The <CM/DT Package Angle Change>

window opens.

 A display image displayed on the <Package

Angle> window varies depending on the chip
type.
3

3
Parts060506S-26E01

4 Click [OK].

 Check if the changed package angle and

supply angle are correct. (Only when the
supply methods are tape/tray component only)

The package angle also can be set by directly

typing the value. (within -180 to 180°).

Parts060506S-27E00

Page 6-148 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

6.5.7 CM Extension Data Edit

Edits extended data on components for CM.

1 Choose ‘CM/DT’ in ‘Machine Specific

Information’.

1
2 Click on Extended Data.

 The <CM extension data edit> window opens.

Parts060506S-01E02

3 Edit any data, and click [Save] and,

[Close].
3  In the CM extension data edit, the settable
items differ according to the value for the chip
recognition reference number.

Parts060506S-02E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-149

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 QFP Extension
When any of the following values is set to the chip recognition reference number, the CM
extension data edit screen used for QFP components will be displayed.
Chip recognition reference No.: 116 to 199, 231

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Parts060506S-04E00

Parts060506S-03E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Lead float check’ Sets whether to run lead float checks.
2 ‘IC type for laser Selects the shape of a chip used for laser recognition.
recognition’ • Standard Chip (Detect by tropic plane)
• Standard Chip (Detect by absolute value)
• Standard Chip (Detect by tropic line + tropic plane)
• P - QFP
3 ‘Lead float Max’ Lead float allowance.
4 ‘Lead bent tolerance’ Pin bending allowance.
5 ‘Load’ A load that acts on a component being placed.
6 ‘Pin Pitch’ A pitch between pins.
7 ‘Scan Pos’ A scanning position used in laser recognition.
8 ‘Plan pins’ The number of pins that are planned to be placed. The missing
pin pattern figure of plan pins is shown after entry.
9 ‘ActualPins’ The number of pins obtained by subtracting the number of
missing pins specified in the missing pin pattern figure from the
number of plan pins.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Standard] Sets the value for Load when the CM extension data editor
starts.

Page 6-150 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 BGA Extension
When any of the following values is set to the chip recognition reference number, the CM
extension data edit screen used for BGA components will be displayed.
Chip recognition reference No.: 201 to 207, 237 to 240

1 2

3
4
5

Parts060506S-05E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘RowCount’ The number of balls per row or column in a ball configuration.
‘ColCount’
2 ‘Ball pitch’ A pitch between balls.
3 ‘Ball diameter’ The diameter of balls.
4 ‘Ball diameter limit’ Changes the ball diameter allowance.
5 ‘Load’ A load that acts on a component being placed.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Standard] Sets the value for Load when the CM extension data editor
starts.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-151

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 FC Extension
When any of the following values is set to the chip recognition reference number, the CM
extension data edit screen used for FC components will be displayed.
Chip recognition reference No.: 222

Parts060506S-06E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Load’ A load that acts on a component being placed.
2 Bump coordinates Sets the position and diameter of bumps.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Standard] Sets the value for Load when the CM extension data editor
starts.

Page 6-152 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Combination Type
When any of the following values is set to the chip recognition reference number, the CM
extension data edit screen used for combination type components will be displayed.
Chip recognition reference No.: 241 to 247

2 4

Parts060506S-07E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 Shape recognition A type, electrode or brightness check is selected for the shape to
specification box be added and recognized.
• Rectangle addition
• Electrode addition
• Lead group addition
• Line addition
• Corner addition
• Circle addition
• Ball group addition
• Insert lead group addition
• Insert lead group 2 addition
• Brightness check
2 ‘Added shape list’ A list of added shapes to be recognized.
3 ‘Load’ A load that acts on a component being placed.
4 Preview screen Displays component images.

 Button
Button Explanation
[ADD] Adds the shape type, electrode or brightness selected.
[EDIT] Edits the set value of the item selected.
[DELETE] Deletes the selected item from the list.
[COPY] Copies the item selected and adds it to the list.
[Standard] Sets the value for Load when the CM extension data editor
starts.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-153

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 3D CT Extension
When any of the following values is set to the chip recognition reference number, the CM
extension data edit screen used for 3D CT components will be displayed.
Chip recognition reference No.: 234

 [Basic settings] tab

4
2

Parts060506S-08E00

Lead type: when clicking [Figure] Lead tip section: when clicking [Figure]

Parts060506S-09E00 Parts060506S-10E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Chip information’ Displays chip information.
2 ‘Number of virtual leads’ The number of leads to be virtually placed.
3 ‘Lead shape’ Defines the shape of electrodes/leads.
4 Preview screen Displays component images. Clicking on a lead on the preview
screen allows you to change the status of the lead to Missing
lead or Noise.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Figure] Selects a lead type/lead tip section from among the figures
shown.

Page 6-154 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 [Basic changed] tab

Parts060506S-11E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 Lead shape Configures basic settings on a per-side basis. Remove the
check mark from the ‘The lead shape on all sides is made the
same’ before you configure the settings.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-155

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 [Add shape] tab

Parts060506S-12E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Missing lead setting’ Clears the shape with missing lead/noise on a per-side basis.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Clear Side1] Clears the status of the leads on the lower side.
[Clear Side2] Clears the status of the leads on the left side.
[Clear Side3] Clears the status of the leads on the upper side.
[Clear Side4] Clears the status of the leads on the right side.

Page 6-156 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 [Other settings] tab

Parts060506S-13E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Tolerance of lead width’ Inputs a lead width tolerance. Or you may set it to [Strict] or
[Rough].
2 ‘Tolerance of lead bended’ Inputs a lead bend tolerance. Or you may set it to [Strict] or
[Rough].
3 ‘Tolerance of coplanarity’ Inputs a lead float (lift) tolerance. Or you may set it to [Strict] or
[Rough].
4 ‘Mounting load’ A load that acts on a component being placed.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Strict] Sets a low tolerance value and performs a tightened inspection.
[Rough] Sets a high tolerance value and performs a reduced inspection.
[Option function list reference and Opens the option function list tab and adds an option(s)
setting] selected.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-157

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 The window displayed when [Option function list reference and setting] is pressed

Parts060506S-14E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Registered option function’ Displays the list of options defined or option functions added
using other tabs.
2 ‘Option function list’ Displays the list of settable options.

 Button
Button Explanation
[EDIT] Edits the set value of the registered option being selected.
[DELETE] Deletes the registered option being selected.
[COPY] Copies the value of the registered option being selected and
adds it to the list.
[Addition of function when being Adds the option selected from the option function list.
selected it] • Resize processing window
• lead tip position compensation
• Orientation estimation, lead
• Adjust lead detecting point
• Lead detecting window width
• 3D complanarity check
• Mounting position offset
• Chip size tolerance
• Tolerance for orientation
• Tolerance for center position
• Brightness check
• Clipping level, 3D sensor
• Controlling 3D sensor
[EXIT] Closes the option function tab and returns to the other settings
tab.

Page 6-158 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 3D BGA Extension
When any of the following values is set to the chip recognition reference number, the CM
extension data edit screen used for 3D BGA components will be displayed.
Chip recognition reference No.: 235

 [Basic settings] tab

2 4

Parts060506S-15E00

Ball type: when pressing [Figure] Ball tip section: when pressing [Figure]

Parts060506S-16E00 Parts060506S-17E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Chip information’ Displays chip information.
2 ‘Ball shape’ Sets the lead of the ball shape.
3 ‘Ball array’ Sets the pitch and number of ball arrays.
4 Preview screen Displays a component image. Clicking on a ball on the screen
allows you to change the status of the ball shape to the Real ball
or Missing ball.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Figure] Selects a lead type/lead tip section from among the figures
shown.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-159

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 [Array details] tab

Parts060506S-18E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Array details setting’ Configures the settings of the ball array pattern, ball, etc.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Staggered (1, 1) exist] Ball array patterns are arranged in a staggered configuration.
Use it in the case where there exists a ball whose start row and
column are 1 and 1, respectively.
[Staggered (1, 1) non] Ball array patterns are arranged without using a staggered
configuration. Use it in the case where there exist no balls
whose start row and column are 1 and 1, respectively.
[Clear missing ball] Clears the missing ball set to the ball array.
[Selected is set] Sets a ball in a place that you have selected on the preview
screen.
[Selected is clear] Changes the status of the ball set in a place that you have
selected on the preview screen to the Missing ball.

Page 6-160 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 [Other settings] tab

1
2
3

Parts060506S-19E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Tolerance of ball pitch’ Besides entering a ball pitch tolerance, you can also select
either [Strict] or [Rough] to initiate automatic setup.
2 ‘Tolerance of coplanarity’ Besides entering a ball float (lift) tolerance, you can also select
either [Strict] or [Rough] to initiate automatic setup.
3 ‘Mounting load’ A load that acts on a component being placed.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Strict] Sets a low tolerance value and performs a tightened inspection.
[Rough] Sets a high tolerance and performs a reduced inspection.
[Option function list reference and Opens the option function list tab and adds an option(s) selected
setting] to the list.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-161

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 The screen displayed when [Option function list reference and setting] is pressed

Parts060506S-20E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Registered option function’ Displays the list of options defined or option functions added
using other tabs.
2 ‘Option function list’ Displays the list of settable options.

 Button
Button Explanation
[EDIT] Edits the set value for the registered option being selected.
[DELETE] Deletes the registered option being selected.
[COPY] Copies the value for the registered option being selected and
adds it to the list.
[Addition of function when being Adds the option selected from the option function list.
selected it] • Resize processing window
• Ball height detecting point fix
• Mounting position offset
• Chip size tolerance
• Tolerance for orientation
• Tolerance for center position
• Brightness check
• Clipping level, 3D sensor
• Controlling 3D sensor
[Exit] Closes the option function tab and returns to the other settings
tab.

Page 6-162 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 3D CT Extension
When any of the following values is set to the chip recognition reference number, the CM
extension data edit screen used for 3D CT components will be displayed.
Chip recognition No.: 236

 [Basic settings] tab

Parts060506S-21E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Chip information’ Displays chip information.
2 Shape recognition Adds the selected shape to be recognized.
specification box • Ball addition
• Lead group addition
• Ball group addition
• Insert lead group addition
• Rectangle addition
• Circle addition
• Corner addition
• Random ball 10 addition
3 ‘Added shape list’ A list of additional shapes to be recognized.

 Button
Button Explanation
[ADD] Adds a selected shape to be recognized.
[EDIT] Edits the set value for a selected item.
[DELETE] Deletes a selected item from the list.
[COPY] Copies a selected item and adds the item to the list.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-163

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 [Detect Pos settings] tab

Parts060506S-22E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Added detection area’ Displays the list of added detection areas.
2 Height detection area setup Configures the settings for selected or added detection areas.
window

 Button
Button Explanation
[ADD] Adds a detection area to the list.
[DELETE] Deletes a detection area selected.
[COPY] Copies a detection area selected and copies the area to the list.

Page 6-164 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 [Other settings] tab

Parts060506S-23E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Tolerance of lead bended Enters a lead bend tolerance (ball pitch), or automatically sets it
(ball pitch)’ to [Strict] or [Rough].
2 ‘Tolerance of coplanarity’ Enters a tolerance used in coplanarity inspections, or
automatically sets it to [Strict] or [Rough].
3 ‘Mounting load’ A load that acts on a component being placed.

 Button
Button Explanation
[Strict] Sets a low tolerance value and performs a tightened inspection.
[Rough] Sets a high tolerance value and performs a tightened inspection.
[Option function list reference and Opens the option function list tab and adds an option selected.
setting]

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-165

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 The screen displayed when [Option function list reference and setting] is pressed

Parts060506S-24E00

 Set item
No. Name Explanation
1 ‘Registered option function’ Displays the list of the option functions set or added using other
tabs.
2 ‘Option function list’ Displays the list of settable options.

 Button
Button Explanation
[EDIT] Edits the set value of the registered option being selected.
[DELETE] Deletes the registered option being selected.
[COPY] Copies the value of the registered option being selected and
adds it to the list.
[Addition of function when being Adds the option selected from the option function list.
selected it] • Specify number of total balls
• Resize processing window
• Center correction
• Mounting position offset
• Tolerance for orientation
• Tolerance for center position
• Brightness check
• Clipping level, 3D sensor
• Controlling 3D sensor
[EXIT] Closes the option function tab and returns to the other setting
stab.

Page 6-166 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

 Confirmation dialog when the CM extension data is edited

If the shape data of the QFP or BGA extension data are edited on the CM extension window,
A confirmation dialog appears to maintain the consistency with the CM extension data.

 Changes you made are displayed in the

confirmation dialog.
To automatically reflect the changes to shape
data, mark the checkbox of 'Update above
values automatically’. About the shape data,
refer to ‘6.5.3 Editing Components ②
Component shape information’.

Parts060603S-63E00

Items that are automatically reflected are as follows:

Location Reflected shape data
QFP extension data – Plan Pins (1 to 4 sides) Lead Component –Lead Count

QFP extension data – Pin Pitch（1 to 4 sides) Lead Component – Lead Pitch

QFP extension data – Missing pin pattern Advance – Missing leads *2

BGA extension data - Row Count/Col Count Ball Grid Array – Ball Count

BGA extension data - Ball Pitch (X) / Ball Pitch (Y) Ball Grid Array - Pitch *1

BGA extension data - Ball Diameter Ball Grid Array - Diameter

*1 You cannot reflect the value that exceeds the settable range in the shape data.
*2 For missing leads, refer to ‘2.7 Missing leads’ in the recognition option data.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-167

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

6.5.8 Setting First Pin

Sets the first pin position to a component. There are two ways to set the first pin position; you can
automatically detect the pin position or manually select it.

1 Click [Advanced] → [First Pin...] on

the menu bar.

 The <First pin> window opens.

Parts060508S-01E00

2 Choose either “Calculate first pin

position automatically” or “Specify first
pin position” in First pin position.

3 When you choose "Calculate first pin

2 position automatically”, click the [OK]
button.

 The set first pin position is displayed in the

orange marker .

 When "Calculate first pin position

automatically" is selected, the first pin position
Parts060508S-02E00 is calculated based on the polarity mark
3 position and pin type. If it cannot automatically
be calculated, it does not display.
For details, refer to ‘5.9.4 List for
Determination of the First Pin’.

Page 6-168 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

4 To manually specify the first pin

position, double-click on a pin of a
component image.

 The first pin can be set to a lead group, ball

4 group or insertion lead group.
It cannot be set to other shape option.

 The selected pin position coordinates are set

to the first pin.

 If your selected coordinates are not settable,

“Error: Invalid Pin Position" appears.

Parts060508S-03E00

5
Parts060508S-05E00

5 Click the [OK] button.

 The first pin is set to the component.

If the first pin position is not shown on the
component image, select [View]→[First Pin...]
on the menu bar.

Parts060508S-04E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-169

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

6.5.9 Support Pin

Pins are individually set to a component which needs support pins during placement such as a
connector component.

1 Click [Advanced]→[Support Pin] on

the menu bar.

 The <Support Pin> window opens.

Parts060509S-01E00

2 Right-click on the PCB and choose

[Add Support Pin] from the right-click
menu or click the [Add] button.

 When you click [Add Support Pin] on PCB, a

support pin is added to the position where you
right-clicked. To use the [Add] button, it is
2 added to the center of the placement point.

 Up to five support pins can be set per

component.

 You can enlarge the component image using

the [ + ] button or shrink it using the [ - ] button.

Parts060509S-02E00
2

Page 6-170 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.5 Adding New Components

3 To delete the support pin, select the

pin from the coordinate list and click
the [Delete] button.

4 Click the [OK] button to close the

support pin window.

 The <Support Pin> window closes.

3  The support pins set to the component are

registered to the PCB editor upon addition as
placement points to PCB
‘13.2.5 Support Pin Setting for the PCB
Data'.

Parts060509S-03E00
4

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-171

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.6 Copying Components

6.6 Copying Components

The existing component data can be copied using this window.

6.6.1 Copying and Creating New Component Data

1 Choose the desired component.

Then, choose [Edit]  [Copy] on the
menu bar, click (Copy) on the
1 2 toolbar, or choose [Copy] on the
right-click menu displayed over the
selected component.
1
Parts060701S-01E02

2 Choose [Edit]  [Paste New] on the

menu bar, click (Paste New) on
the toolbar, or choose [Paste New] on
the right-click menu displayed over the
component list.

 The <Assign new part name> window opens.

3 Type a name for the copied and

pasted component.

 The following characters cannot be used for a

part name.
3 % , ” ‘ full-width

4 Click [OK].

 The copied component data are added in a

component list.

Parts060701S-04E01
4

Page 6-172 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.6 Copying Components

6.6.2 Copying and Pasting to Existing Component Data

1 Choose the desired component.

Then, choose [Edit]  [Copy] on the
menu bar, click (Copy) on the
1 2 toolbar, or choose [Copy] on the
right-click menu displayed over the
selected component.
1
Parts060702S-01E02

2 Choose the destination component.

Then, choose [Edit]  [Paste Data] on
the menu bar, click (Paste Data)
on the toolbar, or choose [Paste Data]
on the right-click menu displayed over
the selected component.

 The confirmation window for the paste

component data opens.

3 Click [Yes].

 If you unmark the checkbox of ‘Overwrite

nozzle number’, the nozzle number will not be
overwritten.
Parts060702S-04E02
 If you unmark the checkbox of ‘Overwrite
3 description’, the description will not be
overwritten.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-173

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.6 Copying Components

6.6.3 Copy Inspection Data

1 After selecting a part that you wish to
copy, choose [Edit]  [Copy
Inspection Data] from the menu bar, or
after right-clicking on a part that you
1 wish to copy, choose [Copy Inspection
Data] from the right click menu.
1

Parts060703S-01E02

2 Choose a target part and then select

[Edit]  [Paste Inspection Data] from
the menu bar, or select [Paste
Inspection Data] from the right click
menu.

 The paste inspection data confirmation box

2 2 appears.

Parts060703S-02E02

3 Click [Yes] to confirm the message.

 Existing inspection data will be overwritten

with the inspection data.

Parts060703S-03E00

4 Upon completion of the paste, the

message box appears. Click [OK].

Parts060703S-04E00

Page 6-174 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Component edit method

1 Choose the desired component from

the component list.

2 2 Choose [File]  [Open] on the menu

bar, click (Open) on the toolbar,
1 or choose [Open] on the right-click
menu displayed over the selected
Parts060702S-01E02
component.

 The part editor window opens.

3 Correct the data.

 For details about component edit: ‘6.5.3

4 Editing Components’

 The following update mark is displayed on the

edited fields.

Parts060800S-04E00
Parts060800S-03E06
3 3
4 Choose [Parts]  [Save] on the menu
bar, or click (Save) on the
toolbar.

 The corrected component is saved.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-175

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Renaming the part name

1 Choose the desired component from

the component list.

2 Choose [Edit]  [Rename] on the

menu bar or [Rename] on the
right-click menu displayed over the
2 selected component.

 The <Rename Part> window opens.

Parts060800S-05E06

3 Type a component name.

 The following characters cannot be used for a

part name.
% , ” ‘ full-width

3
4 Click [OK].

4  The renamed component is displayed in the

Parts060800S-06E02
component list.

Parts060800S-07E00

Page 6-176 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Deleting components

1 Choose the desired component from

the component list.
2
 Upon selection of the Line Parts Library, the
1 warning message will pop up if you select
parts data currently being downloaded or the
one used in the production data.

Parts060800S-08E01

Parts060800S-63E00

2 Choose [Edit]  [Delete Part] on the

Parts060800S-10E00

3 menu bar, click (Delete Part) on

the toolbar, or choose [Delete Part] on
the right-click menu displayed over the
selected component.

 The confirmation window for component

deletion opens.

3 Click [Yes].

 The selected component is deleted from the

component list.

Parts060800S-11E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-177

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Verified flags

1 Choose the desired component from

the component list.

2 Choose [Edit]  [Proved] on the

menu bar or [Proved] on the right-click
menu displayed over the selected
component.

 The confirmation window for verified flag

setting opens.

Parts060800S-12E05

3 Click [Yes].

 The corresponding ‘Proved’ checkbox is

marked.

Parts060800S-13E00

 To uncheck ‘Proved,’ choose a component

with ‘Proved’ checked off.

Parts060800S-14E00

Page 6-178 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Teach complete flags

Teach complete flags are used to identify whether Teach is required for parts.
This flag automatically set to "Recognition confirmation necessary" for a component which has
been ever used for production on the machine.
Normally, the flags are automatically set to parts data while the parts data is edited or imported;
however, the flags can be also set by the following procedure, for example, in the case where you
want to teach the parts already taught on the machine again or where you want to skip teaching
parts of simple shapes.

1 Choose from the parts list a part to

which you set Teach Complete.

2 After right-clicking on the selected

1 part, select [Teach Complete] from the
right click menu and then select either
[Necessary] or [Not necessary].

 The teach flag set confirmation box appears.

2

Parts060800S-36E02

3 Click [OK].

 A teach flag will be set to the part.

Parts060800S-37E00

 For information on the teach flag icon, see ‘■

Display item in 6.1.2 Part Manager Screen
Configuration.

Parts060800S-38E01

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-179

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 NPI Flag
When a new component is used for production, it may be required to check pickup position on the
machine and perform recognition teach. Using the NPI flag allows you to evaluate the checked
components.

1 Choose a component to set NPI flag

1 from the component list.

2 Right-click on the selected component

and choose [NPI Flag] from the
right-click menu.
 The NPI flag setting confirmation window
opens.

Parts060800S-74E00

3 Click [Yes].

 The confirmation window closes.

 The NPI flag is set to the component.

If you selected 'New' for 'Choose Details', it is
shown with ✔icon.
Parts060800S-75E00

 To remove the NPI flag, select the component

again and then choose NPI Flag from the
right-click menu again.

Parts060800S-76E00

Page 6-180 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Batch editing
In batch editing, the following items on the advanced setting menu can be edited as well as editing
machine unique information or component information.
 Tolerance
 Brightness Check for flip-flop
 Center Position Check
 Rotation Check
 Surrounding Check

 Batch Edit - Basic

1 Choose components to be edited at a

time.

 To batch-edit, choose two or more

components.

1  Press and hold the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key while

choosing components consecutively.

Parts060800S-15E03

2 Choose [Edit]  [Batch Edit] 

[Basic] on the menu bar, or right-click
on the selected part and choose
[Batch Edit]  [Basic] from the
right-click menu.

2  The <Batch Editing> window opens.

 Upon selection of the Line Parts Library, the

warning message will pop up if you select
parts data currently being downloaded.

Parts060800S-16E03

Parts060800S-34E01

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-181

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

3 Edit an item you want to change.

 During batch editing, if the setting varies

depending on the selected components, you
cannot edit the items at once.
Batch editing is available only to components
that have the same setting items.

 In case the shape definition is a lead

component, if you change the value of an item
in shape information, the other values besides
changed one in all selected components will
also be changed to the ones shown on the
screen. In such edit mode, the reset button
will be displayed on the bottom right side
Parts060800S-17E07 of the shape information.

4 If you want to reset shape information, click

(available only if the shape definition is a
lead component).

Parts060800S-67E00

5 Click [Yes].

 Returns the changed values back to the

original ones.

Parts060800S-68E00
5

Parts060800S-70E00

Page 6-182 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

6 After changing the values, click .

Parts060800S-69E00

7 Click [OK].

 The changed item is saved, and the

confirmation window closes.

 Upon selection of the Line Parts Library, the

warning message will pop up if you select
parts data currently being downloaded.
Parts060800S-19E02
7

Parts060800S-35E01

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-183

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Intelligent default (For one component)

1 Choose the component to change the

machine-specific information to
default.

1 2 Choose [File]  [Open] on the menu

2
bar, click (Open) on the toolbar,
or choose [Open] on the right-click
menu displayed over the selected
component.

 The part editor window opens.

Parts060800S-20E04

3 Click [Generate Defaults].

 The <Generate Defaults> window opens.

Parts060800S-22E07

4 Choose a model on which you want to

4 generate defaults from among ‘NPM’,
‘CM/DT’ or ‘Both’.

 For model-specific items, refer to ‘■Generate

Defaults Setting Screen’ described later.
6
5
5 Check off items to be set to default.

6 Click [Update].

 The selected items are set to default.

Parts060800S-23E05

Page 6-184 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Intelligent default (For two or more components)

1 Choose the component to change the

machine-specific information to
default.

1 2 Choose [Edit]  [Batch Default] on

the menu bar or [Batch Default] on the
2 right-click menu displayed over the
selected component.

 The <Generate Batch Defaults> window

opens.

3
Parts060800S-24E02
Choose nozzle arrangement when the
recommended value is set.
• ‘Keep Current Values and Add’ :
Keeps the original nozzle setting and add
the recommended nozzle.
• ‘Replace’ :
Overwrites the original nozzle setting
with the recommended nozzle

3
4 Choose Machine type from among
‘NPM’, ‘CM/DT’ or ‘Both’.

5 Click [Detail…].

 The <Target Properties> window opens.

Parts060800S-25E04 4 5

6 Check off the items that you want to

set as default.
7  Clicking [Select All] or [Unselect All] allows you
6 to select or deselect all items at once.

7 Click [OK].

Parts060800S-31E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-185

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

8 Click [Generate].

Parts060800S-25E04

9 Click [OK].

 The selected components are set to default.

Parts060800S-29E00
9

Page 6-186 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Generate Defaults Setting Screen

Generate Defaults are automatically set based on the model and the parts type.
 For [Generate Batch Defaults], the Generate Defaults setting screen will not display.

Parts060800S-30E04

 Set item
To display the items to be set as shown below, select each of the two models ‘NPM’ and ‘CM/DT’
and hold down [Update].

Machine type: NPM Machine type: CM/DT

Machine Data Item Machine Data Item
NPM 1st Nozzle CM/DT 1st Nozzle
NPM 2nd Nozzle CM/DT 2nd Nozzle
NPM 3rd Nozzle CM/DT 3rd Nozzle
NPM 4th Nozzle CM/DT 4th Nozzle
NPM 5th Nozzle CM/DT 5th Nozzle
NPM Mount Load CM/DT Mount Load
NPM Thickness Measure CM/DT Thickness Measure
NPM Automatic Height Measure CM/DT Automatic Height Measure
(cushion end sensor) (cushion end sensor)
NPM Pickup Gap CM/DT Pickup Gap
NPM Mount Gap CM/DT Mount Gap
NPM Mount Speed CM/DT Mount Speed
NPM Pickup Speed CM/DT Pickup Speed
NPM Recognition Speed CM/DT Recognition Speed
NPM Lighting CM/DT Chip Size L
NPM Gang Pickup CM/DT Chip Size W
NPM Thickness Measure Timing CM/DT Chip Size T
NPM Thickness Upper Limit CM/DT Chip Type
NPM Thickness Lower Limit CM/DT Chip Recognition
NPM Mount hold time CM/DT Package Angle
NPM Pickup hold time CM/DT Mount hold time
NPM Feeder Drive Speed CM/DT Pickup hold time
NPM Direct Lamp Offset CM/DT Feeder Drive Speed
NPM BGA Lamp Offset CM/DT Direct Lamp Offset
NPM Shadow Lamp Offset CM/DT BGA Lamp Offset
NPM PIP Lamp Offset CM/DT Shadow Lamp Offset
NPM Pickup Position Auto Teach
NPM Pickup Position Learning

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-187

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

Machine type: Both

Machine Data Item Machine Data Item
NPM 1st Nozzle CM/DT 1st Nozzle
NPM 2nd Nozzle CM/DT 2nd Nozzle
NPM 3rd Nozzle CM/DT 3rd Nozzle
NPM 4th Nozzle CM/DT 4th Nozzle
NPM 5th Nozzle CM/DT 5th Nozzle
NPM Pickup Gap CM/DT Pickup Gap
NPM Mount Gap CM/DT Mount Gap
NPM Mount Load CM/DT Mount Speed
NPM Mount Speed CM/DT Pickup Speed
NPM Pickup Speed CM/DT Recognition Speed
NPM Recognition Speed CM/DT Chip Size L
NPM Lighting CM/DT Chip Size W
NPM Gang Pickup CM/DT Chip Size T
NPM Thickness Measure CM/DT Chip Type
NPM Thickness Measure Timing CM/DT Chip Recognition
NPM Thickness Upper Limit CM/DT Package Angle
NPM Thickness Lower Limit CM/DT Chip Size MAX L
NPM Mount hold time CM/DT Chip Size MAX W
NPM Pickup hold time CM/DT Mount hold time
NPM Feeder Drive Speed CM/DT Pickup hold time
NPM Automatic Height Measure CM/DT Feeder Drive Speed
(cushion end sensor)
NPM Direct Lamp Offset CM/DT Shadow Lamp Offset
NPM BGA Lamp Offset CM/DT Direct Lamp Offset
NPM Shadow Lamp Offset CM/DT BGA Lamp Offset
NPM Pickup Position Auto Teach CM/DT Automatic Height Measure
(cushion end sensor)
NPM Pickup Position Learning CM/DT Thickness Measure
CM/DT Mount Load

NPM: The value is set to machine unique information on only NPM.

CM/DT: The value is set to machine unique information on only CM/DT.

 The second through fifth nozzles are not set depending on the nozzle type.

Page 6-188 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Tolerance (batch setting)

Tolerance can be set from the part manager.
You can set for parts in the master parts library and line parts library.

1 Choose desired parts for batch

editing.

 When more than one part is selected, choose

parts while holding down the [Shift] key or
[Ctrl] key.
1

Parts060800S-15E03

2 Choose [Batch Edit]  [Tolerance] on

the right-click menu.

 The confirmation window opens.

 The warning message will pop up if you select

parts data currently being downloaded when
the Line Parts Library is selected.

Parts060800S-16E02
Parts060800S-43E01

3 Click [OK].

 The <Tolerance> window opens.

Parts060800S-44E02
3

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-189

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

4
4 Mark the checkbox of [Override
Standard Setting].

5 Enter values

5 6 Click [OK].
Parts060800S-45E00  The confirmation window opens.
6
 Upon selection of the Line Parts Library, the
warning message will pop up if you select
parts data currently being downloaded.

Parts060800S-46E01

7 Click [OK].

Parts060800S-47E01

Page 6-190 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Setting Define Brightness Check for Flip-flop (batch setting)

Components flip-flop check can be set on the part manager.
It can be defined for any parts in both the Master and Line Parts Libraries.

1 Choose desired parts for batch

editing.

 When more than one part is selected, choose

parts while holding down the [Shift] key or
[Ctrl] key.
1

Parts060800S-15E03

2 Choose [Batch Edit]  [Brightness

Check for flip-flop] on the right-click
menu.

 The confirmation window opens.

 Upon selection of the Line Parts Library, the

warning message will pop up if you select
parts data currently being downloaded.

Parts060800S-16E02

Parts060800S-39E01

3 Click [OK].

 Unmarking ‘Add to only part whose function

class is fixed resistor’ adds to add parts.

Parts060800S-40E00
3

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-191

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Upon selection of the Line Parts Library, the

warning message will pop up if you select
parts data currently being downloaded.

Parts060800S-41E01

 If there is any part whose setting is skipped

due to an excessive size, the skip part list
appears.

Parts060800S-62E00

4 Click [OK].

Parts060800S-42E01
4

Page 6-192 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Center area check (batch setting)

Center area check can be set from the part manager.
You can set for parts in the master parts library and line parts library.

1 Choose desired parts for batch

editing.

 When more than one part is selected, choose

parts while holding down the [Shift] key or
[Ctrl] key.
1

Parts060800S-15E03

2 Choose [Batch Edit]  [Center

Position Check] on the right-click
menu.

 The confirmation window opens.

 Upon selection of the Line Parts Library, the

warning message will pop up if you select
parts data currently being downloaded.

Parts060800S-16E02

Parts060800S-48E01

3 Click [OK].

 The <Center Position Check Batch Edit>

window opens.

Parts060800S-49E00
3

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-193

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

4 Enter values.

5 Click [OK].

 The confirmation window opens.

 Upon selection of the Line Parts Library, the

warning message will pop up if you select
parts data currently being downloaded.

4
Parts060800S-50E00
5

Parts060800S-51E01

6 Click [OK].

Parts060800S-52E01
6

Page 6-194 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Rotation area check (batch setting)

Rotation area check can set from the part manager.
You can set for parts in the master parts library and line parts library.

1 Choose desired parts for batch

editing.

 When more than one part is selected, choose

parts while holding down the [Shift] key or
[Ctrl] key.
1

Parts060800S-15E03

2 Choose [Batch Edit]  [Rotation

Check] on the right-click menu.

 The confirmation window opens.

 Upon selection of the Line Parts Library, the

warning message will pop up if you select
parts data currently being downloaded.

2
Parts060800S-16E02
Parts060800S-53E01

3 Click [OK].

 The <Rotation Check Batch Edit> window

opens.

Parts060800S-54E00
3

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-195

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

4 Enter values.

5 Click [OK].

 The confirmation window opens.

4  Upon selection of the Line Parts Library, the
warning message will pop up if you select
parts data currently being downloaded.
Parts060800S-55E00
5

Parts060800S-56E01

6 Click [OK].

Parts060800S-57E01

Page 6-196 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Adhesion check of part surrounding (batch setting)

Adhesion check of part surrounding can be set from the part manager.
You can set for parts in the master parts library and line parts library.

1 Choose desired parts for batch

editing.

 When more than one part is selected, choose

parts while holding down the [Shift] key or
[Ctrl] key.
1

Parts060800S-15E03

2 Choose [Batch Edit]  [Surrounding

Check] on the right-click menu.

 The confirmation window opens.

 Upon selection of the Line Parts Library, the

warning message will pop up if you select
parts data currently being downloaded.

2
Parts060800S-16E02
Parts060800S-58E01

3 Click [OK].

Parts060800S-59E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-197

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Upon selection of the Line Parts Library, the

warning message will pop up if you select
parts data currently being downloaded.

Parts060800S-60E01

4 Click [OK].

Parts060800S-61E01
4

Page 6-198 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Batch Delete
In Batch Delete, the following items in the detailed setup menu can be batch-deleted.
 Tolerance
 Brightness Check
 Brightness Check for flip-flop
 Center Position Check
 Rotation Check
 Surrounding Check
 CM/DT Machine Information
 CM Reference
 Inspection Data Link

 Batch deletion procedure (Example: Tolerance)

Tolerance can be deleted from the component list.
Any parts in either the Master Parts or Line Parts Libraries can be deleted.

1 Choose a component that you want to

batch-delete.

 Press and hold the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key while

choosing components consecutively.

Parts060800S-62E00

2 Choose [Batch Delete]  [Tolerance]

in the right-click menu.

 The confirmation window opens.

 Upon selection of the Line Parts Library, the

warning message will pop up if you select
parts data currently being downloaded.

Parts060800S-63E01 Parts060800S-64E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-199

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

3 Click [Yes].

Parts060800S-65E00
3

4 Click [OK].

Parts060800S-66E00

Page 6-200 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 Comparing the parts data

Compares the entire parts data of selected parts
Also you can edit the parts data using the part editor on the comparison result screen.

1 Choose several parts to compare.

 Choose more than one part to compare.

 To select more than one part, hold down the
[Shift] or [Ctrl] key and click each part you
want to select.
1

Parts060800S-67E00

2 Choose [Edit] → [Compare] or

right-click on the selected part and
choose [Compare] from the right-click
menu.

 The <Select Comparison Source> window

2 opens

Parts060800S-68E00

3 Choose the comparison source part.

4 Click [OK].

 If the setting of the parts is the same, the

3 dialog telling you that 'No differences found in
Part Data' is displayed. And if there is a
difference, the comparison result screen is
Parts060800S-69E00 displayed.
4

Parts060800S-70E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-201

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.7 Editing Existing Components

 The comparison result screen shows the

difference of the part from the comparison
source part as follows.

Background of a cell
Yellow: Difference
White: No difference
Value in a cell
The set value is displayed as a rule,
however, if several settings are configured
in one item or there is not value available,
* is displayed.
For a part with no setting is displayed as
blank.
Parts060800S-71E00

5 To edit the part data, choose the item

in the red frame and right-click the
item and click [Open] from the
right-click menu.

Parts060800S-72E00

 The part editor starts up.

Partts060800S73E00

Page 6-202 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.8 Setting Substitute Components

6.8 Setting Substitute Components

When the components currently used can be substituted, substitute component settings should
be configured.
Define a group of components that are interchangeable as substitutes.
To define a substitute component, the following conditions apply.
1. The maximum number of components constituting one group is 10.
2. Each component takes only one group of substitute components.
3. Components belonging to the same group must be configured by the same data in the
following items.
‘Nozzle setup,’ ‘Lighting’,’ ‘Thickness measure,’
4. To use substitute components, they must be registered by NPM-DGS in advance.
Substitute components cannot be registered on the machine.
5. For the inspection head, production is continued without changing inspection parameters.
6. Normally, substitute components are set from line component.
7. When substitute components of the master component library are transferred to the line
component library, you need to export the substitute component setting of the master
component library and import it to the line component library.

6.8.1 Adding a New Setting

 Creating a new setting from the component list window

1 With components being selected

(select all that apply), choose
[Substitute Part]  [Add Substitute
1 Part] on the menu bar or [Add
Substitute Part] on the right-click
menu displayed over the selected
components.

 The <Add Substitute Part> window opens.

Parts060801S-01E04

2 Click [Add].

 The <New Group> window opens.

2

Parts060801S-02E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-203

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.8 Setting Substitute Components

3 Enter a group name.

 The following one-byte symbols are not

accepted.
3 ¥/:?“<>|~
Parts060801S-03E00
4
4 Click [OK].

 The <New Group> window closes.

5 Choose a component to add to the

substitute component group, and click
.

 The highlighted component moves from

‘Selected’ to ‘Registered.’
5

Parts060801S-04E00

6 Click [OK].

 If the group whose substitute components are

added is used for downloading the production
data, the following dialog opens. (It displays
only for downloaded line component library.)

Parts060801S-11E00

Parts060801S-05E00
 For synchronization with the latest line
6 component library, see below.
‘9.6.6 Synchronize Recipe with Latest
Line Parts Library’.

Page 6-204 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.8 Setting Substitute Components

 Creating a new setting from the part editor window

1 Click the substitute component button

. Or, choose [Advanced] 
1 [Substitute Part] on the menu bar.

 The <Add Substitute Part> window opens.

Parts060801S-06E03

2 Click [Add].

 The <New Group> window opens.

2

Parts060801S-07E00

3 Enter a group name.

 The following one-byte symbols are not

accepted.
3 ¥/:?“<>|~
Parts060801S-08E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-205

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.8 Setting Substitute Components

4 Choose a component to add to the

substitute component group, and click
.

 The highlighted component moves from

4 ‘Selected’ to ‘Registered.’

Parts060801S-09E00

5 Click [OK].

 The substitute component button becomes

active.

 If the group whose substitute components are

added is used for downloading the production
data, the following dialog opens. (It displays
only for downloaded line component library.)

Parts060801S-10E00

Parts060801S-11E00

 For synchronization with the latest line

component library, see below.
‘9.6.6 Synchronize Recipe with Latest
Line Parts Library’.

Page 6-206 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.8 Setting Substitute Components

6.8.2 Deleting a Setting

 Deleting a setting from the component list window

1 Choose [Substitute Part]  [Remove

Substitute Part] on the menu bar.

1  The <Remove Substitute Part> window

opens.

Parts060802S-01E03

2 Click ‘Group’ to select the desired

group.

 The components registered as substitute

components are displayed.
2
2

Parts060802S-02E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-207

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.8 Setting Substitute Components

3 Choose the desired component.

4 Click [Remove].

 If all substitute components in the group are

deleted, the group will also be deleted.

3
5 Click [Close].

 The <Remove Substitute Part> window

closes.

 If the group whose substitute components are

deleted is used for downloading the
production data, the following dialog opens. (It
displays only for downloaded line component
Parts060802S-03E00
4 5 library.)

Parts060801S-12E00

Page 6-208 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.8 Setting Substitute Components

 Deleting a setting from the part editor window

1 Click the substitute component button

. Or, choose [Advanced] 
1 [Substitute Part] on the menu bar.

 The <Remove Substitute Part> window

opens.

Parts060801S-06E03

2 Click [Yes].

 If the group whose substitute components are

deleted is used for downloading the
production data, the following dialog opens. (It
displays only for downloaded line component
library.)

Parts060801S-12E00

 If all substitute components in the group are

deleted, the group will also be deleted.

Parts060802S-05E00
2

3 Click [Yes].

 The substitute component button becomes

inactive.
Parts060802S-06E00

3 

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-209

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.8 Setting Substitute Components

6.8.3 Importing / Exporting the settings

 Importing the substitute component setting
1 Choose [Substitute Part]  [Import]
on the menu bar.

 The <Import Substitute Parts Group> window

opens.
1

Parts060803S-01E01

2 Click of the ‘File Name’.

 The <Open> window opens.

Parts060803S-02E01

3 Choose a desired substitute file name

(.Sbak) to be imported.

3 4 Click [Open].

Parts060803S-04E00
4

5 Choose ‘Master Parts Library’ from

Select Master / Line in Import to.

5
Parts060803S-03E01

Page 6-210 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.8 Setting Substitute Components

6 Click [Import].

Parts060803S-07E00
6

7 On the confirmation window, click

[OK].

 Import starts and the component data and

substitute component setting are imported.

 For import of the substitute component group,

the group setting of substitute component in
DGS will be replaced with the one in the import
file.

Parts060803S-05E00 7

8 Click [OK].

Parts060803S-06E01
8

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-211

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.8 Setting Substitute Components

 Exporting the substitute component setting

1 Choose a desired library to be
exported from the component list.

2 Choose [Substitute Part]  [Export].

2
1  The <Save As> window opens.

 If there is no substitute component setting in

the selected component library, the following
error dialog opens.

Parts060803S-07E01

Parts060803S-11E00

3 Choose a location to be exported.

3 4 Type a filename.

5 Click [Save].

 The <Save As> window closes and the file is

exported.

Parts060803S-08E00
4 5

6 Click [OK].

Parts060803S-09E00

Page 6-212 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.8 Setting Substitute Components

 Displaying substitute part group

1 Choose [Substitute Part]  [Show

Substitute Part] on the menu bar.

 The < Show Substitute Part > window opens.

1

Parts060803S-10E00

2 Click [OK].

 The < Show Substitute Part > window closes.

Parts060803S-11E00
2

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-213

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error Image

6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error

Image
 Recognition test at the time of data modification (when an arbitrary
image is selected)
 Before this function is used, you must obtain image data of the desired component from the
machine.

1 Open the component edit window to

test.

 Refer to ‘6.7 Editing Existing Components’.

2 Choose [Recognition Test] 

[Recognition Test with Failure Image]
on the menu bar.
2  If an image file is master component, the
<Open> window opens. Go to step 5.
Parts060901S-01E01  If it is line component, the <Select image for
LNB recognition test> window opens. Go to
step 3.

 Perform steps 3 and 5 only when it is selected

from the line component library.
3 To change the location to save an
4 5 image, click [Change Path] and
choose the applicable folder.

3 4 Choose [Select an Image].

5 Click .
Parts060901S-22E01

6 Choose an image file to be tested.

7 Click [Open].

Parts060901S-02E01

Page 6-214 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error Image

 The <Recognition test> window opens, which

will reproduce and show defects occurred
c
when the component was saved on the
machine.

 For a recognition error, its cause and solution

are displayed in the ‘Result’ area (c).

 Clicking [Error Details] displays the error

image.
d

Parts060901S-03E01

8 Edit the data with the component

editor window, referring to the cause
and solution of error.

 Contents vary depending on defects.

Parts060901S-04E00

9 Choose [Recognition Test] 

[Recognition Test with Corrected
Data] on the menu bar or click on
the tool bar.

9
Parts060901S-05E01

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-215

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error Image

 The result is displayed based on the edited

data.

 If defects are not resolved, reedit the data with

the component editor window and execute the
recognition test.

Parts060901S-07E01

10 Click [Execute] or choose

[Recognition Test]  [Recognition
Test with Corrected Data] on the
menu bar and check the data
creditability by repeating recognition.
e. ‘Move X/Y’
With this box checked off, the image is
recognized, being moved randomly in X/Y
e directions.
h f f. ‘Rotate’
g With this box checked off, the image is
recognized, being randomly rotated.
g. ‘Break in error ’
With this box checked off, evaluation is
10 interrupted in the case of error occurrence.
h. ‘Count’
Parts060901S-08E01
Set the execution count to either 10 times or
30 times.

11 Choose [Recognition Test]  [End

Recognition Test] on the menu bar.

 The <Test> window closes.

Parts060901S-09E01

11

Page 6-216 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error Image

 Recognition test during editing data (when an image is selected from

LNB)

1 Open the component edit window to

test.

 If an image is selected from LNB, the image

only for line components is available.. '6.7
Editing Existing Components'

2 Choose [Recognition Test] 

[Recognition Test with Failure Image]
on the menu bar.

2
Parts060901S-01E01

4 3 To change the location to save an

image, click [Change Path] and
choose the applicable folder.

5 4 Choose [Select image loaded from

3 LNB]

5 Click [Load from LNB]

Parts060901S-23E01

 The image saved in the machine is loaded and

displayed in a list.

 For LNB with a password, the following dialog

may appear.
Confirm that the proper user ID and password
are set in the [LNB Securities] tab and perform
the operation again.
For the LNB securities tab, refer to ‘4.3.3
Option Configuration ■LNB securities’.

Trouble140100-21E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-217

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error Image

6
6 Choose either [Selected part(s)] or [All
parts].

 [Selected part(s)]
Displays only components identical to the ones
7 opening by the currently parts editor.
 [Selected part(s)
Displays all recognition images acquired by the
machine.

Parts060901S-24E01

8
7 Choose a component from the
component list.

 When a component is selected, preview for

the image is shown on the right window.

8 Click [Start recognition test]

 The <Recognition test> window opens, which

c will reproduce and show defects occurred
when the component was saved on the
machine.

 For a recognition error, its cause and solution

are displayed in the ‘Result’ area (c).

 Clicking [Error Details] displays the error

image.
d
 The rest of procedures are the same as the
one for ■Recognition test at the time of data
modification (when an arbitrary image is
selected).

Parts060901S-03E01

Page 6-218 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error Image

 Editing the recognition data using an image (teach)

1 Choose [Recognition Test]  [Teach

with Failure Image] on the menu bar
after the recognition test has started.

 The <Test> window closes and the <Modify>

window opens.

 Action on the component editor window will be

Parts060901S-10E01 1 locked.

2 Move and rotate the image so that it is

displayed at the screen center without
a b tilt.

a.
Moves a component at moving pitch
c d
intervals.
2
b. Moving pitch
Choose the moving distance of a
component.
0.01mm, 0.10mm, 1.00mm, 5.00mm

c.
Rotates a component at rotating pitch
intervals.

Parts060901S-11E00 d. Rotation pitch

Choose the rotating angle of a component.
0.01°, 0.10°, 1.00°, 5.00°

 Move a component to the position where the

component’s image fits into the frame of
shape data such as molds or leads.

 If the external dimensions are not correct, the

image cannot appear properly. Set correct
external dimensions onto the component
editor window in advance.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-219

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error Image

3 Choose the add shape from the add

shape combo box or choose [Modify]
 [Choose Add Shape]  [Add
shape] on the menu bar.
‘Lead group’:
Lead row (1 to 255 leads, including missing
3 leads)

‘Ball group’:
Ball array (2x2 to 64x64, including missing
array)

‘Rectangle’:
Lighter or darker inside

Parts060901S-12E01 ‘Circle’:
Circle or circular arc with lighter or darker
inside

‘Line’:
One side is lighter and the other is darker

‘Corner’:
Brighter or darker inside

‘Brightness check ’:
Brightness check for specified detected
area

4 Click [Display the detected area] or

choose [Modify]  [Display the
detected area] on the menu bar to
display the detected area (red color)
on the image.

4  The frame of the detected area appears the

image center.

Parts060901S-13E01

Page 6-220 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error Image

5 Drag the detected area and adjust the

range for detecting the shape.

 The detected area should be set on the area

where the shape is with high contrast.

Parts060901S-14E01

6 Click [Detect and add] or choose

[Modify]  [Detect and add] on the
menu bar to detect the shape within
the detected area.

Parts060901S-15E01

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-221

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error Image

7 If the detection is successful, the

message window appears. Click
e [Yes].

 If you click [No], it exits without adding the

shape.

 The added shape is shown with a red line

shape in graphic (e) over the image.
7

 If the detection fails, the following message

window appears. Click [Yes] and readjust
again.

Parts060901S-16E01

Parts060901S-17E00

f g  When brightness check is selected, the setup

dialog of the brightness check option is
displayed prior to the message window of ‘Is
the detected shape added?’ Conduct
applicable settings with reference to the
measured value and click [SET].

f. ‘Brightness Measure Method’

Choose either ‘Average’ or ‘Histogram’.
Graph shows the brightness histogram
within the detected area.
Parts060901S-18E00

g. ‘Brightness of Defined Area’

Choose from among ‘Lighter than
neighboring area (Over 160)’, ‘Darker than
neighboring area (Under 80)’, ‘Within below
range’, or ‘Output of below range’.

Page 6-222 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error Image

8 To add manually, select a desired

shape from [Choose the right shape].

 The following shapes can be added.

・Circular Hole
・Electrode
・Corner
・Rectangular Hole
8 ・Line
・Unequally arranged ball

Parts060901S-25E00

9 Drag the red frame to adjust its

boundaries to identify the area you
want to detect shapes.

Parts060901S-26E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-223

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error Image

 The shapes within the dragged area are

added.

Parts060901S-27E00

10 For fine adjustment of the added

shape, expand the Set value (click
). Choose the desired item, and
then by either choose [Edit the
selected data] on the right-click menu
or click the item to adjust under a
selected state.

 While for an item of numeric values, it is the

edit box and for a selection type is the combo
box, the setting dialog box appears for others.

 The shape graphic on the image changes

according to the value edited.

10

Parts060901S-19E01

Page 6-224 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.9 Recognition Test Using Machine Recognition Error Image

11 To delete the added shape, choose

the desired shape, and then choose
[Delete the selected option] on the
right-click menu.

 After deleted, the shape graphic on the image

will be also cleared.

11

Parts060901S-20E01

12 After all desired shapes are added,

click [Finish and Exit] or choose
[Modify]  [Exit] on the menu bar to
finish the recognition data teach using
an image.

 The <Modify> window closes and the <Test>

window appears again.

 The edit data is reflected to the component

editor.

Parts060901S-21E01 12

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-225

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.10 CSV Output

6.10 CSV Output

 Output Parts Data from Parts Library in CSV format.

1 Choose a parts library that you want to

output in CSV format.

 In doing so, you should select a parts library

within Master Parts Library or Line Parts
Library.

Parts061000S-01E00

 Selecting Master Parts Library

2 Choose [File]  [CSV Output] on the

menu bar.

 <Save As> window appears.

2
Parts061000S-02E01

 Selecting Line Parts Library

2
Parts061000S-03E02

Page 6-226 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.10 CSV Output

3 Choose a directory to save the CSV

file to.

3
4 Type the CSV filename.

5 Click [Save].

 Output of the CSV file is completed.

Parts061000S-04E01 4 5

6 Click [OK].

Parts061000S-06E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-227

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.10 CSV Output

 Information output in CSV format

 NPM
Item Explanation
‘Part Name’ Shows the component name.
‘Part Library Name’ Shows the part library name.
‘REF’ Shows the CM REF number, and is displayed when a check mark
is placed next to [Use CM Reference].
‘Description’ Shows the explanations being set.
‘Shape Code’ Shows the shape code.
‘Physical Class’ Shows the component shape.
‘Functional Class’ Shows the component type.
‘L’ Shows the component length.
‘W’ Shows the component width.
‘T’ Shows the component height.
‘Supply Type’ Shows the component supply type.
‘Supply Kind’ Shows the supply type of a component.
‘Tape Kind’ Shows the tape material.
‘Tape Width’ Shows the tape width.
‘Tape Pitch’ Shows the tape feed pitch.
‘Reel Size’ Shows the reel size.
‘Part Count’ Show the number of components in a reel.
‘Supply Direction’ Shows the supply angle.
‘Creation Date’ Shows the date when the component data was created.
‘Modification Date’ Shows the date when the component data was updated.
‘Pickup Error Setting’ Shows the setting of an action during pickup error either Parts
Empty Stop or Pickup Error Stop.
‘Recog Error Stop’ Shows the action at the time of recognition error.
‘Polarity’ Shows whether or not to be present polarity on a component.
‘Nozzle’ Shows the using nozzle type.
‘Vacuum Sensor Pickup Check’ Shows whether or not to check pickup using the vacuum sensor.
‘Vacuum Sensor Mount Check’ Shows whether or not to check placement using the vacuum
sensor.
‘Pickup Gap’ Shows the distance between a component and a nozzle during
pickup.
‘Mount Gap’ Shows the distance between bottom side of the component and
the top side of the PCB during placement.
‘Brightness Check’ Shows the brightness check value.
‘Dispense Options’ Shows whether to execute Dispense Options.
‘Inspection Data’ Shows whether to execute Inspection Data.
‘Pickup Offset Z’ Shows a pickup plane offset.
‘Eject Height’ Shows a mount plane offset.
‘Offset Check for Dense Mounting’ Shows whether to execute Offset Check for Dense Mounting.
‘Tolerance: Part Size’ Chows the tolerance value.
‘Tolerance: Lead width’ Shows the maximum tolerance value for the size of leads in the
lead group.
‘Tolerance: Lead pitch’ Shows the maximum tolerance value for the pitch of leads in the
lead group.
‘Tolerance: Lead float’ Shows the maximum tolerance value for float checks on leads in
the lead group.
‘Tolerance: Ball diameter’ Shows the maximum tolerance value for the diameter of balls in
the lead group.
‘Tolerance: Ball pitch’ Shows the maximum tolerance value for the pitch of balls in the
lead group.
‘Tolerance: Coplanarity’ Shows the maximum tolerance value for coplanarity checks on
balls in the lead group.
‘L’ Shows the length of parts. Displayed when a check mark is placed
next to [Use CM Reference].
‘W’ Shows the width of parts. Displayed when a check mark is placed
next to [Use CM Reference].

Page 6-228 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.10 CSV Output

Item Explanation
‘Recognition Check’ Shows recognition check flags set for parts.
‘Pickup Speed’ Shows the speed at which components are picked up.
‘Mount Speed’ Shows the speed at which components are placed.
‘Pickup hold time’ Shows the time during which the head is kept lowered for pickup.
‘Mount hold time’ Shows the time during which the head is kept lowered for
placement.
‘Camera’ Shows a camera used for component recognition.
‘Lighting’ Shows a lighting mode used for component recognition.
‘Recog Speed’ Shows a component recognition speed.
‘Recog Height’ Shows the height at which components are recognized.
‘Number of Scans’ Shows the number of scans during component recognition.
‘Placement angle recognition’ Shows whether to recognize components at a placement angle or
not.
‘Automatic Height Measure (cushion Shows whether or not to carry out the automatic height
end sensor)’ measurement in pickup.
‘Auto Height Measure (Height Shows whether or not to carry out the automatic height
Sensor)’ measurement in pickup.
‘Height Measure Gap’ Shows the automatic height measurement gap.
‘3D Mount Gap’ Shows the 3D mount gap.
‘Pickup Offset X’ Shows the X-direction displacement amount from the normal
pickup position.
‘Pickup Offset Y’ Shows the Y-direction displacement amount from the normal
pickup position.
‘Pickup angle’ Shows a nozzle rotation angle upon pickup.
‘Gang Pickup’ Shows whether to carry out simultaneous pickup or not.
‘Pickup Position Learning’ Shows whether to learn and automatically adjust the pickup
position or not.
‘Pickup Shift Tolerance’ Shows an acceptable amount of the pickup position displacement.
‘Pickup before Inspection’ Shows whether to continuously pick up components or not during
placement while the inspection head of the opposite head inspects
components.
‘Mount Load’ Shows a load applied to a component upon mounting.
‘Mount 2 Step Motion (Down)’ Shows the nozzle lowering motion upon mounting.
‘Mount 2 Step Motion (Up)’ Shows the nozzle ascending motion upon mounting.
‘2 Step Motion Height Offset (Down)’ Sets this if you want to start a 2-step motion earlier than the regular
motion when using it for placement. Tact time will be decreased, but
the load on the parts during placement will be reduced.
‘Discard to’ Shows the place where components are ejected.
‘Thickness Measure’ Shows whether to measure the component thickness or not.
‘Thickness Upper Limit’ Shows upper-limit of the component thickness.
‘Thickness Lower Limit’ Shows lower-limit of the component thickness.
‘Thickness Measure Timing’ Shows whether to detect the component tombstoning or not.
‘Lamp Offset’ Shows the offset value for each lamp. The offset values are output
in the following order: ‘Shadow Lamp Offset’, ‘Direct Lamp Offset’,
‘BGA Lamp Offset’ and ‘PIP Lamp Offset’.
‘Advance Feeding’ Shows whether to forward the tape or not.
‘Pickup Position Auto Teach’ Shows whether to automatically adjust the pickup position o not.
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Shows the feeder drive speed.
‘Action After Splice Detection’ Shows an action during splicing detection.
‘Advance Feed Count’ Shows the number of lines to feed at once.
‘Lift Speed’ Shows the tray lifter speed.
‘Pull Axis Speed’ Shows the tray drawing speed.
‘Tray Position Recognition’ Shows whether to recognize the tray position or not.
‘Transfer’ Shows whether to carry out a transcript action or not.
‘Transfer Load’ Shows the transcript load when the transcript unit is used.
‘Transfer Height’ Shows the height upon transcript.
‘Squeegee Gap’ Shows the squeegee gap.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-229

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.10 CSV Output

Item Explanation
‘Transfer Time’ Shows the time during transcript.
‘Transfer Speed’ Shows the speed during transcript.
‘Transfer Mode’ Shows the transfer order.
‘Parts Empty Count’ Shows the number of retry times during part empty stop.
‘Pickup Error Count’ Shows the number of retry times during pickup error stop.
‘Pickup Position Auto Teach Shows whether to automatically teach the pickup position during
(splicing)’ splicing or not.
‘Rotation Check’ Shows the rotation check value.
‘Center Position Check’ Shows the center position check value.
‘Brightness Check Count’ Shows the number of times that brightness check is performed.
‘Surrounding Check’ Shows whether a surrounding check is made.
‘Recognition Error Count’ Shows the number of recognition errors.
‘Wait Before Mount’ The machine waits for the set milliseconds (0 to 1000) before the
nozzle is moved down for mounting. This is used to increase
mounting accuracy.
‘Pickup 2 Step Motion (Down)’ Shows the nozzle descending motion during pickup
‘Pickup 2 Step Motion (Up)’ Shows the nozzle ascending motion during pickup
‘MSD Level’ Shows the MSD level value.
‘NPI’ Shows whether or not to set the NPI flag.
‘Label’ Shows the label name set to a component.

Page 6-230 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.10 CSV Output
 CM/DT
A value is output only if the checkbox is marked.

Parts061000S-05E01

Item Explanation
‘Part Name’ Shows the component name.
‘Part Library Name’ Shows the part library name.
‘Description’ Shows the explanations being set.
‘Shape Code’ Shows the shape code.
‘L’ Shows the component length.
‘W’ Shows the component width.
‘T’ Shows the component height.
‘Supply Type’ Shows the component supply type.
‘Supply Kind’ Shows the supply type of a component.
‘Tape Kind’ Shows the tape material.
‘Tape Width’ Shows the tape width.
‘Tape Pitch’ Shows the tape feed pitch.
‘Reel Size’ Shows the reel size.
‘Part Count’ Shows the number of components contained in a component
supply package.
‘Creation Date’ Shows the date when the component data was created.
‘Modification Date’ Shows the date when the component data was updated.
‘Polarity’ Shows whether or not to be present polarity on a component.
‘Nozzle’ Shows the using nozzle type.
‘Recognition Check’ Shows a recognition check flag of a component.
‘Pickup Speed’ Shows the speed at which components are picked up.
‘Mount Speed’ Shows the speed at which components are placed.
‘Pickup hold time’ Shows the time during which the head is kept lowered for
pickup.
‘Mount hold time’ Shows the time during which the head is kept lowered for
placement.
‘Recog Height’ Shows the height at which components are recognized.
‘Pickup Gap’ Shows the distance between a component and a nozzle during
pickup.
‘Mount Gap’ Shows the distance between bottom side of the component
and the top side of the PCB during placement.
‘Automatic Height Measure Shows whether or not to carry out the automatic height
(cushion end sensor)’ measurement in pickup.
‘Height Measure Gap’ Shows the automatic height measurement gap.
‘Pickup Offset X’ Shows the X-direction displacement amount from the normal
pickup position.
‘Pickup Offset Y’ Shows the Y-direction displacement amount from the normal
pickup position.
‘Pickup Angle’ Shows a nozzle rotation angle upon pickup.
‘Mount Load’ Shows a load applied to a component upon mounting.
‘Pickup Error Setting’ Shows the pickup error setting.
‘Thickness Measurement’ Shows whether to measure the component thickness or not.
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Shows the feeder drive speed.
‘Lift Speed’ Shows the tray lifter speed.
‘Pull Axis Speed’ Shows the tray drawing speed.
‘Tray Position Recognition’ Shows whether to recognize the tray position or not.
‘Transfer’ Shows whether to carry out a transcript action or not.
‘Transfer Load’ Shows the transcript load when the transcript unit is used.
‘Transfer Height’ Shows the height upon transcript.
‘Squeegee Gap’ Shows the squeegee gap.
‘Transfer Time’ Shows the time during transcript.
‘Transfer Speed’ Shows the speed upon transcript.
‘Transfer Mode’ Shows the transfer order.
EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-231
 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.10 CSV Output

Item Explanation
‘Chip Size L’ Shows a chip size X. 1
‘Chip Size W’ Shows a chip size Y. 1
‘Chip Size T’ Shows a chip size Z.
‘Chip Kind’ Shows the chip type.
‘Package Angle’ Shows the package angle of a component.
‘Recog Speed’ Shows the speed upon part recognition.
‘Chip Recognition’ Shows the reference number.
‘Laser Recognition’ Shows the IC type for laser recognition.
‘Detect Standing’ Shows whether to detect the component tombstoning or not.
‘Vacuum Sensor Pickup Check Shows whether or not to check pickup by the vacuum sensor.
(For High-speed)’
‘Thickness Tolerance’ Shows an acceptable amount when component thickness is
measured.
‘Vacuum Sensor Pickup Check Shows whether or not to check pickup by the vacuum sensor.
(For Multi-heads)’
‘Lead Float Check’ Shows whether or not to check lead float.
‘Lead Float Limit’ Shows tolerance of lead float.
‘1st Laser Scanning Position’ Shows a laser scan position on the upper side.
‘2nd Laser Scanning Position’ Shows a laser scan position on the right side.
‘3rd Laser Scanning Position’ Shows a laser scan position on the Bottom side.
‘4th Laser Scanning Position’’ Shows a laser scan position on the Left side.
‘Shadow Lamp Offset’ Shows offset of a shadow lamp.
‘Direct Lamp Offset’ Shows offset of a direct lamp.
‘BGA Lamp Offset’ Shows offset of a BGA lamp.
‘Flip Chip 1 Lamp Offset’ Shows offset of a flip chip 1 lamp.
‘Flip Chip 2 Lamp Offset’ Shows offset of a flip chip 2 lamp.
‘Reserve Lamp Offset’ Shows offset of a reserve lamp.
‘Pickup Offset Z’ Shows pickup surface offset.
‘Eject Height’ Shows placement surface offset.
‘Placement angle recognition’ Shows whether to recognize components at a placement angle
or not.
‘Eject Height’ Shows placement surface offset.
‘Placement angle recognition’ Shows whether to recognize components at a placement angle
or not.
‘Chip Size MAX L’ Shows the maximum chip size of X. 1
‘Chip Size MAX W’ Shows the maximum chip size of Y. 1

1: The definition of Chip Sizes L / W varies according to the part recognition reference
number. For details, refer to the following.
‘6.5.3 Editing Components  ②Component shape information  ■When CM
reference number is used’ or ‘5.2.10 Edit Chip Information’ in the programming
manual (common to PT200 / PS200)

Page 6-232 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.10 CSV Output
 Insertion Machine
The value is output only when the checkbox is marked.

Parts060603S-61E00

Item Explanation
‘Part Name’ Shows the component name.
‘Part Library Name’ Shows the part library name.
‘Shape Code’ Shows the shape code.
‘Kind’ Shows the tool type to be used.
‘Tool Number’ Shows the tool number to be used.
‘Body Chuck Width Control’ Shows control of the body chuck width.
‘Body Chuck Width’ Shows the body chuck width.
‘Body Chuck Gap’ Shows the body chuck gap.
‘Body Chuck Depth Control’ Shows control of the body chuck depth.
‘Body Chuck Depth’ Show the body chuck depth.
‘Body Chuck Strength’ Sets the load applied to the claw then the body chuck holds a
component.
‘Swing Action' Shows the action of the swing nozzle.
‘Pickup Speed’ Shows the speed at which components are picked up.
‘Mount Speed’ Shows the speed at which components are placed.
‘Pickup hold time’ Shows the time during which the head is kept lowered for
pickup.
‘Mount hold time’ Shows the time during which the head is kept lowered for
placement.
‘Camera Type’ Shows the camera to be used for component recognition.
‘Lighting’ Shows the light mode to be used for component recognition.
‘Recognition Speed’ Shows the speed during component recognition.
‘Recog Height’ Shows the height at which components are recognized.
‘Pickup Gap’ Shows the distance between a component and a nozzle during
pickup.
‘Mount Gap’ Shows the distance between bottom side of the component
and the top side of the PCB during placement.
‘Automatic Height Measure Shows whether or not to carry out the automatic height
(cushion end sensor)’ measurement in pickup.
‘Auto Height Measure (Height Shows whether or not to carry out the automatic height
Sensor)’ measurement in pickup.
‘Height Measure Gap’ Shows the automatic height measurement gap.
‘3D Mount Gap’ Shows the 3D placement gap.
‘Pickup Offset X’ Shows the X-direction displacement amount from the normal
pickup position.
‘Pickup Offset Y’ Shows the Y-direction displacement amount from the normal
pickup position.
‘Pickup Angle’ Shows a nozzle rotation angle upon pickup.
‘Pickup Position Learning’ Shows whether or not to learn and automatically adjust the
pickup position.
‘Pickup Shift Tolerance’ Shows an acceptable amount of the pickup position
displacement.
‘Mount Load’ Shows a load applied to a component upon mounting.
‘Mount 2 Step Motion (Down)’ Shows the nozzle descending motion upon mounting.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-233

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.10 CSV Output

Item Explanation
‘2 Step Motion Height Offset Sets this to start a 2 Step Motion earlier than a regular motion
(Down)’ when using it for placement. Tact time will be decreased, but the
load on the parts during placement will be reduced.
‘Wait Before Mount’ Machine will wait defined milliseconds (0 to 1000) before
moving nozzle down for mounting. This is used for better
accuracy.
‘Insert Load’ Set the insert load that is required for injection after the
lowering of the head for placement (the standard load until the
head is lowered for placement)
‘Discard to’ Shows the place where components are ejected.
‘Pickup Error Setting’ Shows the setting of an action during pickup error either Parts
Empty Stop or Pickup Error Stop.
‘Parts Empty Count’ Shows the number of retries when the pickup error setting is
set to [Parts Empty Stop].
‘Pickup Error Count’ Shows the number of retries when the pickup error setting is
set to [Pickup Error Stop].
‘Pickup Error Setting’ Shows the setting of an action during pickup error either Parts
Empty Stop or Pickup Error Stop.
‘Recognition Error Count’ Shows the number of recognition errors.
‘Vacuum Sensor Pickup Check’ Shows whether or not to check pickup using the vacuum
sensor.
‘Vacuum Sensor Mount Check’ Shows whether or not to check placement using the vacuum
sensor.
‘Thickness Measure’ Shows whether to measure the component thickness or not.
‘Thickness Upper Limit’ Shows upper-limit of the component thickness.
‘Thickness Lower Limit’ Shows lower-limit of the component thickness.
‘Thickness Measure Timing’ Shows whether to detect the component tombstoning or not.
‘Lamp Offset’ Shows the offset value for each lamp. The offset values are
output in the following order: ‘Shadow Lamp Offset’, ‘Direct
Lamp Offset’, ‘BGA Lamp Offset’ and ‘PIP Lamp Offset’.
‘Lift Speed’ Shows the tray lifter speed.
‘Pull Axis Speed’ Shows the tray drawing speed.
‘Tray Position Recognition’ Shows whether to recognize the tray position or not.
‘Pickup Position Auto Teach Shows whether the pickup position auto teach (splicing) is
(splicing)’ performed.
‘Advance Feeding’ Shows whether to forward the tape or not.
‘Pickup Position Auto Teach’ Shows whether to automatically adjust the pickup position o
not.
‘Feeder Drive Speed’ Shows the feeder drive speed.
‘Action After Splice Detection’ Shows an action during splicing detection.
‘Advance Feed Count’ Shows the number of lines to feed at once.
‘Radial Reference Height’ Set the distance between the feed hole in tape and the contact
surface between the component and PCB.
‘Pickup Offset Z’ Shows pickup surface offset.
‘Eject Height’ Shows placement surface offset.
‘Maximum Part Height’ Set the total component height from the bottom of the lead to
the top of the component.
‘Body Height’ Set the height, from the PCB surface to the top of the
component, of the component in condition of being inserted.

Page 6-234 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.10 CSV Output

Item Explanation
‘Lead Diameter’ Shows the outer diameter of the insertion lead.
‘Lead Pitch’ Shows the spacing between the individual insertion leads set in
line and spaced equally.
‘Lead Count’ Shows the number of the insertion leads set in line and spaced
equally.
‘Clinch’ Set anvil unit operation.
There are three types as follows:
• [No]: No operation.
• [Clinch]: Cutting or bending of a lead under PCB.
• [PCB Support]: Supports PCB from below. No cutting or
bending of a lead.
‘Clinch Angle’ Set the tilt angle of the anvil unit with reference to the angle of
the insertion head.
‘Outer Lead Distance’ Set the spacing between the two outermost leads.
For the machine with anvil unit, these leads are cut or bent.
‘Insertion Detection Level’ Set the insertion detection level in the range of 0 to 7if clinching
leads. Set it to a lower value when the leads are soft, and,
when the leads are hard, to a higher value.

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-235

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.10 CSV Output

 CSV file output examples (When information on both NPM and CM/DT is output)
[NPM]
Part Name, Part Library Name, REF, Description, Shape Code, Physical Class, Functional Class, L,
W, T, Supply Type, Supply Kind, Tape Kind, Tape Width, Tape Pitch, Reel Size, Part Count, Supply
Direction, Creation Date, Modification Date, Pickup Error Setting, Recog Error Stop, Polarity,
Nozzle, Vacuum Sensor Pickup Check, Vacuum Sensor Mount Check, Pickup Gap, Mount Gap,
Brightness Check, Dispense Option, Inspection Data, Pickup Offset Z, Eject Height, Offset Check
for Dense Mounting, Tolerance: Part Size, Tolerance: Lead Width, Tolerance: Lead Pitch,
Tolerance: Lead Coplanarity, Tolerance: Ball Diameter, Tolerance: Ball Pitch, Tolerance: Ball
Coplanarity, L, W, Teach, Pickup Speed, Mount Speed, Pickup hold time, Mount hold time, Camera,
Lighting, Recognition Speed, Recog Height, Scan Count, Recognize by Mount Angle, Automatic
Height Measure(cushion end sensor), Auto Height Measure(Height Sensor), Height Measure Gap,
3D Mount Gap, Pickup Offset X, Pickup Offset Y, Pickup Angle, Gang Pickup, Pickup Position
Learning, Pickup Shift Tolerance, Pickup before Inspection, Mount Load, Mount 2 Step Motion
(Down), Mount 2 Step Motion (Up), 2 Step Motion Height Offset (Down), Discard to, Thickness
Measure, Thickness Upper Limit, Thickness Lower Limit, Thickness Measure Timing, Shadow Lamp
Offset, Direct Lamp Offset, BGA Lamp Offset, PIP Lamp Offset, Advance Feeding, Pickup Position
Auto Teach, Feeder Drive Speed, Action After Splice Detection, Advance Feed Count, Lift Speed,
Pull Axis Speed, Try Position Recognition, Transfer, Transfer Load, Transfer Height, Squeegee
Gap, Transfer Time, Transfer Speed, Transfer Mode, Parts Empty Count, Pickup Error Count,
Automatic Height Measure at splicing, Pickup Position Auto Teach (splicing),Rotation Check, Center
Position Check, Surrounding Check, Brightness Check Count, Recog error count, Wait Before
Mount, Pickup 2 Step Motion (Down),Pickup2 Step Motion (Up), MSD Level, NPI, Label
"1005C", "default", "", "1005C", "", "Rectangular Chip", "Capacitor", "1.000", "0.500", "0.500",
"P0802_S", "Tape and Reel", "Paper", "8", "2", "Small (180mm)", "10000", "0", "2/13/2015 1:31:56
PM", "2/13/2015 1:32:31 PM", "Parts Empty Stop", "Set count", "Yes", "230, 226, 1001, 0, 0", "No",
"Yes", "0.000", "0.300", "", "Off", "Off", "0", "0.000", "Off", "", "", "", "", "", "", "", "", "", "Not Yet",
"100.000", "100.000", "Standard", "Standard", "2D Camera", "Direct Lighting", "Auto", "0.000",
"Auto", "No", "No", "No", "0.000", "0.000", "0.000", "0.000", "0.000", "Allow", "Yes", "0.000", "Yes",
"2.500", "1 step", "Dust Box", "0.000", "Yes", "0.120","-0.120", "Every turn", "0.000", "0.000", "0.000",
"0.000", "No", "No", "Standard(Fast)", "Advance Feed", "0.000", "", "", "", "No", "2.500", "0.000",
"0.000", "150.000", "100.000", "Transfer -> Recognition", "Use machine setting", "Stop
Immediately", "No", "No", "", "0.000,0.000,0.500,0.500", "No", "0", "3.000", "0","1 Step Down","1
Step Down","0","New","Label"

[CM/DT]
Part Name, Part Library Name, Description, Shape Code, L, W, T, Supply Type, Supply Kind, Tape
Kind, Tape Width, Tape Pitch, Reel Size, Part Count, Creation Date, Modification Date, Polarity,
Nozzle, Teach, Pickup Speed, Mount Speed, Pickup hold time, Mount hold time, Recog Height,
Pickup Gap, Mount Gap, Height Measure Gap, Pickup Offset X, Pickup Offset Y, Pickup Angle,
Mount Load, Pickup Error Stop, Thickness Measure, Feeder Drive Speed, Lift Speed, Pull Axis
Speed, Try Position Recognition, Transfer, Transfer Load, Transfer Height, Sqeegee Gap, Transfer
Time, Transfer Speed, Transfer Mode, Chip size L, Chip size W, Chip size T, Chip Kind, Package
Angle, Recog Speed, Chip Recognition, Laser Recognition Type, Detect Standing, Vacuum Sensor
Check - HS Head, Thickness Tolerance, Vacuum Sensor Check - MP Head, Lead Inspect Required,
Coplanarity Tolerance, Top Scanning Position, Right Scanning Position, Bottom Scanning Position,
Left Scanning Position, Shadow Lamp Offset, Direct Lamp Offset, BGA Lamp Offset, Flip chip lamp
offset 1,Flip chip lamp offset 2,Reserve lamp offset, Pickup Offset Z, Eject Height, Recognize by
Mount Angle, Chip Size MAXL, Chip Size MAXW
"1005C", "Default", "", "1005C", "1.000", "0.500", "0.500", "P0802_S", "Tape and Reel", "Paper", "8",
"2", "Small (180mm)", "10000", "2/13/2015 1:31:56 PM", "2/13/2015 1:32:31 PM", "Yes","226; 230;
1001; 110; 115", "Not Yet", "100.000", "100.000", "Standard", "Standard", "0", "0.000", "0.300",
"0.000", "0.000", "0.000", "0.000", "2.500", "Use machine setting", "Yes", "Standard (Fast)", "", "", "",
"No", "2.500", "100.000", "0.000", "150.000", "0.000", "Transfer -> Recognition", "1.000", "0.500",
"0.500", "Capacitor", "-90", "Auto", "55.000", "0", "No", "No", "0.000", "No", "No", "0.000", "0.000",
"0.000", "0.000", "0.000", "0.000", "0.000", "0.000", "0.000", "0.000", "0.000", "0", "0", "No", "1.000",
"0.500"

Page 6-236 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.11 Lighting Recognition Check List

6.11 Lighting Recognition Check List

The parts editor, when a set value that is not suited to the lighting mode used is saved, issues a
warning message. It is still possible to save the set value even if the warning message is
displayed; however, such unrecommended settings can be the cause of a false recognition.

Lighting mode Where to set values Measures

Shadow When any of the following set values Set appropriate nozzles for Shadow Lighting, or
Lighting is selected as the nozzle value set to change the lighting mode to Direct Lighting.
parts.
• X has a larger value than Tx
• Y has a larger value than Ty
• X has a larger value than Tx, or Y
has a larger value than Ty
When the following range of Set any reference numbers other than those
reference numbers exclusive to exclusive to Direct Lighting, or change the lighting
Direct Lighting is set for the Use CM mode to Direct Lighting.
Reference.
• 80 to 89, 109 to 113, 117 to 119,
125 to 126, 137
Direct Lighting When the following range of Set any reference numbers other than those
reference numbers exclusive to exclusive to Shadow Lighting, or change the lighting
Shadow Lighting is set for the Use mode to Shadow Lighting.
CM Reference.
• 71 to 72, 95, 97 to 99, 114 to 116,
120 to 122, 127 to 128, 136, 138 to
139, 151 to 165
BGA Lighting When the following range of Set any reference numbers other than those
reference numbers exclusive to exclusive to Direct Lighting, or change the lighting
Direct Lighting is set for the Use CM mode to Direct Lighting.
Reference.
• 80 to 89, 109 to 113, 117 to 119,
125 to 126, 137
When the following range of Set any reference numbers other than those
reference numbers exclusive to exclusive to Shadow Lighting, or change the lighting
Shadow Lighting is set for the Use mode to Shadow Lighting.
CM Reference.
• 71 to 72, 95, 97 to 99, 114 to 116,
120 to 122, 127 to 128, 136, 138 to
139, 151 to 165

 Example of a warning message

Parts060603S-28E00

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-237

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.12 Head Camera Recognition Option

6.12 Head Camera Recognition Option

6.12.1 Adding and Editing Head Camera Recognition Option
Recognition option using the head camera is added /edited in the <Head Camera Recognition
Option(s)> window.
 Changes are not reflected to a part unless you save on the part editor. Make sure to save
changes.

1 On <Part Editor>, Choose [Advanced]

 [Head Camera Recognition Option
(s)] on the menu bar.

Parts061301S-01E00 1

 When option is newly added

2 Choose desired option from ‘Available

Option’.

2
3 Click [<< Add].

3  The edit window of the selected option will

start up.

Parts061301S-02E01

 When option is edited

2 Choose desired option from ‘Defined

Option’.

2
3 Click [Edit].

 The edit window of the selected option will

start up.

 For details of pre-pickup inspection, see the

‘Pre-pickup inspection editor’ in the operating
3 manual.
Parts061301S-03E01 For the pre-pickup inspection function, contact
us.

Page 6-238 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.12 Head Camera Recognition Option

6.12.2 Deleting Head Camera Recognition Option

Options of head camera recognition set to a part are deleted.
 Changes are not reflected to a part unless you save on the part editor. Make sure to save
changes.

1 On <Part Editor>, choose [Advanced]

 [Head Camera Recognition
Option(s)] on the menu bar.

Parts061302S-01E00 1

2 Choose desired option from ‘Defined

Option’.

2 3 Click [Delete].

 The confirmation window opens.

3
Parts061301S-03E01

4 Click [Yes].

Parts061302S-03E00
4

 The selected option is cleared from the list.

Parts061302S-04E01

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-239

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.12 Head Camera Recognition Option

6.12.3 Top Side Recognition

A fluorescent containing in a LED part is recognized by the head camera and corrected its
position by picking it up so that the fluorescent center comes to the placement position.

2 4

Parts061303S-01E03

 Setting item
No. Item Explanation
1. ‘Correct’ Sets ‘Top side recognition’ to a part.
 If you do not want to set it, unmark the checkbox. Default is ‘ON’.
2. ‘Recognition Target’
‘Ox’ X coordinate offset amount of a fluorescent.
‘Oy’ Y coordinate offset amount of a fluorescent.
‘Sx’ X coordinate size of a fluorescent.
‘Sy’ Y coordinate size of a fluorescent.
‘Color’ Sets a fluorescent color to be recognized.
 ‘Select ‘Black’ if a mark is darker than its surroundings, and select
‘White’ if it is lighter.
3. ‘Lamp Control’
‘Manual’ Uses the set value of the following ‘Lamp 1 to 4’.
‘Lamp 1’ Sets the manual control value of lamp 1. (1 to 255)
‘Lamp 2’ Sets the manual control value of lamp 2. (1 to 255)
‘Lamp 3’ Sets the manual control value of lamp 3. (1 to 255)
‘Lamp 4’ Sets the manual control value of lamp 4. (1 to 255)
4. ‘Search Area’ Specifies the area that the recognition system searches a
fluorescent.
Enter the lower left coordinate and the upper right coordinate so that
the offset position is centered.
5. ‘Tolerance’
‘XY’ Fluorescent size tolerance.
‘θ’ Fluorescent angle tolerance.

Page 6-240 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.12 Head Camera Recognition Option

 Setting the top side recognition data

1 Enter each item.

 By referring to information described in the

previous page, set the recognition data.
‘■Setting item’

Parts061303S-03E03
1

2 Click [OK].

 Top side recognition is set to a part.

Parts061303S-04E03
2

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-241

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.12 Head Camera Recognition Option

6.12.4 Post-Placement Inspection

Carries out head camera recognition to check if components are placed on the predetermined
positions after placement.

Parts061304S-01E00

 Setting item
No. Item Explanation
1. ‘Inspect after Sets ‘Post-Placement Inspection’ to a component.
placement’  Unmark the checkbox if you do not want to set this function. It is
marked by default.
2. ‘Position A’
‘X coordinate’ Enter the X coordinate of the recognition position A.

‘Y coordinate’ Enter the Y coordinate of the recognition position A.

‘Inspection’ Opens the ‘Post-placement inspection data window’ for the

inspection position A
3. ‘Position B’
‘X coordinate’ Enter the X coordinate of the recognition position B.

‘Y coordinate’ Enter the Y coordinate of the recognition position B.

‘Inspection’ Opens the ‘Post-placement inspection data window’ for the

inspection position B

Page 6-242 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.12 Head Camera Recognition Option

3
1

Parts061304S-02E00

 Setting Item
No. Item Explanation
1. ‘Lamp Control’
‘Lamp 1’ Sets the manual control value of the lamp 1. (0 to 255)
‘Lamp 2’ Sets the manual control value of the lamp 2. (0 to 255)
‘Lamp 3’ Sets the manual control value of the lamp 3. (0 to 255)
‘Lamp 4 Sets the manual control value of the lamp 4. (0 to 255)
2. ‘Search Area’ Enter the start and end points of the search area.
3. ‘Select Color’ Sets the color of a component to be recognized
* If a mark is darker than the surrounding color, select ‘Black’ and if it
is brighter, select ‘White’.
4. ‘Judge’
‘Threshold’ Sets the threshold value. (1 to 255)
‘Judge’ Sets the judgement standard value. (0 to 100)

EJS9AE-MB-06P-23 Page 6-243

 NPM-DGS
Programming Manual
6.12 Head Camera Recognition Option

 Setting the post-placement inspection recognition data

1 Enter each item.

 By referring to information described in the

previous page, set the recognition data.
‘■Setting item’

1
Parts061304S-01E00

2 Click [OK].

 Post-placement inspection recognition is set

to the component.

Parts061304S-01E00
2

Page 6-244 EJS9AE-MB-06P-23

Notice
The contents of this document are subject to
change without prior notice.

COMMOE-BC-18F-00
◍ Company and product names described in this document are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
◍ Some of our products fall under the export control items
(or technologies) established in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign
Trade Act. When exporting (or providing technologies overseas),
please check its legal restrictions and be sure to take necessary
procedures such as to obtain the export permission.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka City, Fukuoka, Japan

Phone number: +81-92-477-1205
Fax number: +81-92-477-1664

© Panasonic Smart Factory Solutions Co., Ltd. 2018

Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of the law.

Printed in Japan